JP2022118333A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To enhance the performance of a game machine.SOLUTION: A game machine includes a counting switch, and in which information related to counted points can be transmitted to a lending unit side every 300 ms (hereafter, the timing every 300 ms in which the information related to counted points can be transmitted to the lending unit side is referred to as "counting notification timing"). At the counting notification timing after pressing time of the counting switch becomes 500 ms or more, a predetermined number of counted points can be transmitted to the lending unit side. When the counting switch is released during a period of time from the counting notification timing after the pressing time of the counting switch becomes 500 ms or more until the next counting notification timing (hereafter, referred to as "second counting notification timing"), a predetermined number counted points of the can be transmitted to the lending unit side at the second counting notification timing.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 40

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a slot machine (rotary drum type game machine) is known as one of the game machines. As a slot machine of this kind, there is known a point-type slot machine in which a game can be played using points stored in a card without using medals (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2013-56055 A

The problem to be solved by the present invention is to improve the performance as a gaming machine.

The present invention includes a counting switch, and is configured so that information related to counting points can be transmitted to the lending unit side every first period (hereafter, information related to counting points can be transmitted to the lending unit side). The timing for each first period is referred to as "counting notification timing"), and at the counting notification timing after the counting switch has been depressed for the second period or longer, a predetermined number of counting points is transmitted to the lending unit side. The next counting notification timing (hereinafter referred to as "second counting notification timing") starts from the counting notification timing after the pressing time of the counting switch is equal to or longer than the second period. The game machine is configured to be able to transmit a predetermined number of counting points to the lending unit side at a second counting notification timing when the counting switch is released during the period.

According to the present invention, performance as a gaming machine can be improved.

FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a game machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the front door of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a front view of the cabinet of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the reel arrangement of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing symbol combinations of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing symbol combinations of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing symbol combinations of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a diagram showing symbol combinations of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing symbol combinations of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a condition device of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing targets of the internal lottery of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the results of the internal lottery of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the results of the internal lottery of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing contents of messages used for communication between the gaming machine and the rental unit of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a diagram showing the contents of the gaming machine information notification among the telegrams output from the gaming machine to the lending unit of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing the type of gaming machine among the information included in the gaming machine information notification output by the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing gaming machine information included in a telegram when gaming machine performance information is set in the gaming machine information notification output by the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing gaming machine information included in a telegram when gaming machine installation information is set among gaming machine information notifications output by gaming machines according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing gaming machine information included in a telegram when hall controller/fraud monitoring information is set among the gaming machine information notifications output by the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a basic communication sequence between a gaming machine and a lending unit according to this embodiment. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing the activation sequence of the gaming machine and the lending unit according to this embodiment. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the activation sequence of the gaming machine and the lending unit according to this embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a counting notification sequence between the gaming machine and the lending unit according to this embodiment. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a lending notification sequence between a gaming machine and a lending unit according to this embodiment. FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a recovery sequence from an abnormality in communication between the gaming machine and the lending unit according to this embodiment. FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a sequence when a communication error occurs during counting between the gaming machine and the rented unit according to the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a sequence when a communication error occurs during lending between the gaming machine and the lending unit according to the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is a flowchart relating to counting control of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 29 is a flowchart relating to the scoring process of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 30 is a flowchart relating to game machine information management of the game machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a transmission pattern of gaming machine information notifications after the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is started for the first time. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a second transmission pattern of hall controller/fraud monitoring information in the gaming machine information notification of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a pattern in which the transmission timings of the hall control/fraud monitoring information and the gaming machine installation information match in the gaming machine information notification of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a pattern in which the transmission timings of the hall control/fraud monitoring information, the gaming machine installation information, and the gaming machine performance information in the gaming machine information notification of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment coincide. FIG. 35 is a comparative example for explaining the action and effect of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example without. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a preferable example in which the number-of-insertions signal ON and the BB state signal ON are transmitted with hall controller/fraud monitoring information at different timings in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 37 is a comparative example for explaining the action and effect of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example without. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a preferable example in which the number-of-payouts signal ON and the BB status signal ON are transmitted at the same timing with hall controller/fraud monitoring information in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing the counting execution flag setting process of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a time chart relating to the counting process of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a time chart relating to the counting process of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a time chart relating to the counting process of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a time chart relating to the counting process of the gaming machine according to this embodiment.

<Explanation of Terms>
"Medals (number of medals)", "game media (number of game media)", "game value", and "points (scores or points)" are synonymous, and are referred to as medals as a concept even if there are no actual medals. There is "Bet", "BET", and "insertion" regarding game media are synonymous, and all are acts of betting game media. The "effect selection switch P8W" and the "effect determination switch P8E" may be collectively referred to as "sub-switches". When representing a hexadecimal value, it is described as "0x00" or "00h", and if there is no particular description before or after the number, it is represented in decimal. A "reel" may be referred to as a "rotating drum", and both have the same meaning. The "storage means" may be referred to as "RWM", "RAM", or "storage area", all of which are synonymous. "Giving" used in "giving game media" or "giving points" may be referred to as "payout" and both have the same meaning. The "setting/reset switch" may be referred to as a "setting change switch" or a "reset switch" for each function, but in either case, the same switch is indicated. Note that the "setting change switch" and the "reset switch" may be provided as different switches.

Features (outline) of the gaming machine P according to the present embodiment will be described. Each element will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings.

<Description of Appearance of Gaming Machine P>
First, the basic structure of the gaming machine P according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the gaming machine P, a front door P2 (also called front mask, front door, front panel, door or door) and a cabinet P1 (also called back box or housing) are locked by a hinge structure. The hinge structure is provided on the left side when the game machine P is viewed from the front, and is configured so that the front door P2 can be opened with the left side as an axis. In order to open the front door P2, the door open key is inserted into the cylinder provided on the right side of the game machine P (provided on the right side of the front door P2) when viewed from the front, and the door open key is pushed. By rotating it to the right, it becomes possible to change from the locked state to the unlocked state (unlocked state). The door open error may be canceled by rotating the door open key to the left while it is inserted into the cylinder of the front door P2. Errors that can be cleared are not limited to door open errors. , total score upper limit error, total score threshold reached state, lending device connection error, lending serial number error, lending device communication error 1, lending device communication error 2, lending device communication error 3, lending device communication error 4, lending device communication error 5 , rental device communication error 6, rental device communication error 7, etc.) may be included.

A door switch is provided in the vicinity of the cylinder on the back surface of the front door P2, and it is possible to determine whether the front door P2 is open by detecting ON or OFF of the door switch.

The door switch can be advanced and retracted by an elastic member such as a spring, and when the front door P2 is closed, the tip of the door switch contacts a door switch receiving portion provided on the cabinet P1, thereby pushing the door switch. When the door switch is pushed in, the light is blocked by the optical sensor provided in the door switch, so that the ON state of the door switch is detected and it is determined that the door is closed. .

When the front door P2 is open, the tip of the door switch is not in contact with the door switch receiving portion provided on the cabinet P1, and the door switch protrudes due to the biasing force of an elastic member such as a spring. When the door switch is protruding, the optical sensor provided in the door switch is not shielded from light, so that the door switch is detected to be OFF and the door is determined to be open.

The process of determining whether or not the door is open is performed for each interrupt process by the main control board P15. In the input port reading process in the interrupt process by the main control board P15, the input port corresponding to the door switch is checked to determine whether the door is open or not depending on whether the door switch is ON or OFF. is doing.

The above-described process for determining whether the door is open is not limited to this. good. For example, it may be determined that the door is open by detecting that the door switch is ON, and that the door is closed by detecting that the door switch is OFF. As for the door switch, various sensors such as a proximity sensor may be used to detect the opening and closing of the door. It may be an aspect.

On the front side of the front door P2, there are a start switch P3, a left stop switch P4L, a middle stop switch P4C, a right stop switch P4R (hereinafter collectively referred to as "stop switch P4"), and a MAX bed switch. P5M, 1 bet switch P5O (hereinafter these may be collectively referred to as "bet switch P5"), settlement switch P6, count switch P7 (may be referred to as a count button), effect selection switch P8W, effect A determination switch P8E and the like are provided. Further, a game medium number display section P9 and a given number display section (not shown) are provided as display sections for informing information about the game. In addition, a display window P10 for making the reels visible and an image display device (image display device P11M, image display device P11S) for increasing interest in the game are provided.

(Start switch P3)
It is a lever-shaped switch, and an arbitrary specified number of game media can be bet (for example, a player can bet (bet) a number of game media arbitrarily selected from 1 to 3 insertion points). is enabled, and the reel starts rotating when operated.

(Stop switch P4)
In this embodiment, the left reel P18L corresponds to the left stop switch P4L, the middle reel P18C corresponds to the middle stop switch P4C, and the right reel P18R corresponds to the right stop switch P4R. Also, when the stop switch P4 is operable, it is suggested that the stop switch P4 is effective by changing the color of the main body of the stop switch P4 or the lamp around it. For example, when the stop switch P4 can be operated, it lights up in blue, and when it cannot be operated, it lights up in red.

(Bet switch P5 (MAX bed switch P5M, 1 bed switch P5O))
A game medium number storage means (also referred to as a total score storage area) provided in the game machine P (more specifically, the game medium number control board P16) for storing the number of game media (also referred to as a total score) owned by the player. ) is not 0 (when the information displayed in the game media number display portion P9 is not 0), the action of operating the bet switch P5 sets the number of bets. However, if the information stored in the game medium number storage means is 0, the operation of the bet switch P5 is invalid (not accepted). In addition, it is composed of a MAX bet switch P5M that can bet the maximum number set for each game machine P and a 1 bet switch P5O that can bet "1", and the 1 bet switch P5O is operated multiple times. As a result, it is possible to bet the same number of bets as the number of operations within the range of the maximum bet number.

(Payment switch P6)
When the settlement switch P6 is operated in a situation where a bet number storage means provided in the gaming machine P stores a value of "1" or more (under a situation where the bet number is a value of "1" or more), , the bet number stored in the bet number storage means is added to the game medium number storage means. For example, when the settlement switch P6 is operated in a situation where "2" is stored in the bet number storage means and "100" is stored in the game media number storage means, "0" is stored in the bet number storage means. "102" is stored in the game medium number storage means. The period during which the settlement process can be executed when the operation of the settlement switch P6 is accepted is the period from when the game medium is inserted until when the start switch P3 is operated. In other words, even if the operation of the settlement switch P6 is accepted, the settlement processing is not executed until the game ends after the start switch P3 is operated. Alternatively, the operation of the settlement switch P6 is accepted from the time the game medium is inserted until the start switch P3 is operated. The operation of the settlement switch P6 may not be accepted.

Also, the 1-bet switch P5O and the settlement switch P6 may be configured as one switch (1-bet switch/settlement switch). For example, the function may be switched according to the long press time of the 1 bet switch / settlement switch, and if the pressing time is less than 1000ms (1 bet switch / settlement switch before 1000ms after accepting the operation of If the operation of the adjustment switch is no longer accepted), the function of the 1 bed switch P5O is executed, and if the pressing time is 1000 ms or more (1000 ms after the operation of the 1 bed switch/acquisition switch is accepted), the adjustment It may be configured to perform the function of switch P6. In addition, in order to execute the function of the settlement switch P6 after 1000 ms have passed since the operation of the 1 bed switch/settlement switch is accepted, there is no need to stop accepting the operation of the 1 bed switch/settlement switch. The function of the settlement switch P6 is executed even if the operation of the 1-bet switch/settlement switch is accepted at the time when 1000 ms has passed since the switch operation was accepted.

(count switch P7)
By operating the counting switch P7, the information stored in the game medium number storage means is sent to the outside of the game machine P via a game ball lending device connection terminal board (described later) provided in the game machine P. It is configured to be able to transmit to the lending unit. For example, in a situation where "50" is stored in the game medium number storage means, by operating the count switch P7, the information "50" as a count value (also referred to as a "count point") is displayed as a game ball or the like. It is configured so that it can be transmitted to the rental device connection terminal board, and then the information "50" can be transmitted to the rental unit as the count value. It should be noted that "0" is stored in the game medium number storage means after the count switch P7 is operated and the count value is transmitted.

(Production selection switch P8W)
The effect selection switch P8W is a so-called "cross key" and is composed of an upward switch, a rightward switch, a downward switch, and a leftward switch. For example, by operating the upward direction switch of the effect selection switch P8W, it becomes possible to move the cursor or the like displayed on the image display device P11M or the image display device P11S upward. Also, during game standby (also referred to as game standby state), operating the up switch increases the volume, operating the down switch decreases the volume, and operating the right switch increases the light intensity of the lamp. Alternatively, the light amount of the lamp may be reduced when the left direction switch is operated.

(Production determination switch P8E)
The performance determination switch P8E serves as a determination button when determining a performance, etc., and as a chance button when executing a performance suggesting to the player that a situation advantageous to the player will occur. For example, when the cursor is indicated on an item displayed on the image display device P11M or the image display device P11S, the item indicated by the cursor can be determined by operating the effect determination switch P8E. Further, during a game, when an effect such as "Press the chance button!" is configured to In addition, a drive source (solenoid, motor, etc.) may be arranged in the effect determination switch P8E, and the operation part of the effect determination switch P8E may be configured so as to vibrate up and down.

(Total score clear switch)
The total score clear switch is a switch for initializing the total score stored in the total score storage means. If the total score clear switch is ON when the power is turned on, the total score can be initialized. is configured to be

(Game media count display P9)
A display device for displaying information on the number of game media (also referred to as total score) stored in the number-of-game-medium storage means, and can display numerical information up to five digits. Five segment display portions are arranged in a horizontal row in each digit display portion that constitutes the game medium number display portion P9. Information on the number of media can be notified. The five segments may have decimal points (sometimes referred to as DP points), and there is no problem with a display mode using decimal points. Moreover, each segment is configured so that the display mode changes depending on whether the LED is turned on or off.

In this embodiment, the maximum number of game media that can be displayed in the game media number display portion P9 is "16383", and when displaying "1", "□□□□1" (four squares are blank (5 (four non-lighting out of four segment display portions)) are displayed right-justified. Further, when the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means is "0", it is displayed as "□□□□0". If the number of game media stored in the number-of-game-medium storage means is "0" and the number-of-game-media display section P9 displays "□□□□□", the number-of-game-media display section P9 will display Even if there is no malfunction, there is a possibility that the game medium number display section P9 may be misidentified as malfunctioning. Therefore, by displaying "□□□□0" in the game medium number display section P9, it is possible to know that the game medium number display section P9 is not malfunctioning.

Note that, when an error occurs, the game media number display section P9 may display error information corresponding to the error instead of reporting the information on the number of game media. In this case, information on the number of game media and error information may be alternately displayed in the game media count display section P9. For example, it is conceivable to display the information on the number of game media for 3 seconds→display the error information for 3 seconds→display the information on the number of game media for 3 seconds→ . . . If an error is to be displayed on the game media number display area P9, "Pxx□□" (two □ indicate a blank; two x indicate a numerical value, a symbol, or an alphabet (error identification corresponding to various errors). The type of the error can be grasped by displaying "xx" which is the information)) and is displayed left justified. In other words, the information on the number of game media is displayed right justified, such as the above-mentioned "1", and the minimum digit (the rightmost segment display portion) is any numerical value from "0" to "9". Information is displayed. On the other hand, the error information is displayed left-aligned like the above-mentioned "Pxx□□", and the minimum digit is not displayed, and the numerical information is not displayed (the rightmost segment display section is not lit). With this configuration, whether or not the lowest digit of the game medium number display portion P9 is displayed (whether or not at least a portion of the rightmost segment display portion is illuminated) determines whether the currently displayed It becomes possible to easily determine whether the information received is numerical information or error information.

Also, in the second segment display portion from the right in the game medium number display portion P9, it is similarly confirmed whether the currently displayed information is numeric information or error information. can be easily distinguished.

Also, as in this embodiment, when a game machine is controlled using the main control chip and the game medium number chip, an error detected by the main control chip is expressed as "Pxx□□" and detected by the game medium number chip. By expressing the error that occurs as "Hxx□□", it is possible to make it easier to determine where the error has occurred. For example, since the input error is detected by the main control chip, it is conceivable to display "P01□□", "PE1□□", etc., and the communication abnormality is detected by the game medium number chip, so "H01□□" It is conceivable to display such as "HE1□□". In this way, the identification information such as "P" and "H" respectively corresponding to the chip (abnormal occurrence location) that detected the error, and the error identification information such as "E1" and "01" corresponding to the above "xx". are displayed at the same time, it is possible to display the location and type of error (type of error) without changing the number of digits even if there are more than 100 types of error.

Also, an example has been described in which the identification information is changed according to which chip detected the error, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the identification information may be changed according to the type of error. For example, a recoverable error can be expressed as "Pxx□□", and an unrecoverable error can be expressed as "Hxx□□". According to such a configuration, it is possible to facilitate determination of the degree of importance of the error.

Further, when an error is displayed on the game medium number display section P9, if an error that can be counted occurs and the count switch is operated during the error display and the counting process is performed, the counting process is performed. Among them, information on the number of game media and error information in the game media count display portion P9 may be alternately displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to check the error information even during the counting process.

Further, when an error is displayed in the game medium number display section P9, if an error that allows lending processing occurs and the lending switch is operated during the error display and lending processing is performed, the lending processing is performed. Among them, information on the number of game media and error information in the game media count display portion P9 may be alternately displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to check the error information even during the lending process.

In addition, when an error is displayed in the game medium number display portion P9, the power is turned off while the error is being displayed in the game medium number display portion P9, and the power is turned on while the total score clear switch is being operated. In this case, the total score is initialized but the error is not cleared. Therefore, the information indicating "0" and the error information displayed in the game medium number display portion P9 may be alternately displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to check the error information even if the total score clear switch is operated and the total score is initialized.

(Status display lamps 1 to 5)
The status display lamps 1 to 5 are composed of five LEDs, and one LED is arranged at a position corresponding to each segment of the game medium number display portion P9 (not shown). The state display lamp is controlled to light up by the game medium number control board P16, and lights up when there is a change in the state managed by the game medium number control board P16. It should be noted that the status display lamp may be arranged at any position as long as it can be visually recognized by the player.

The status display lamp 1 is configured to be lit in the case of rental device connection failure (VL failure flag=FFh), and to be turned off in other cases (VL failure flag=00h).

The status display lamp 2 is configured to be lit when the lending serial number is abnormal, and to be extinguished in other cases.

The status display lamp 3 is turned on in the case of rental device communication errors 1 to 7, and is turned off in the other cases.

The status display lamp 4 is turned on when the total score is 15000 or more, and is turned off in other cases.

The status display lamp 5 is configured to turn on when the count point is other than 0 (value equal to or greater than 1) when sending the count notification, and turn off when the count point is 0 when sending the count notification. When the status display lamp 5 is turned on, it is judged whether or not a counting flag (described later) is set. When the counting flag is set (counting flag=FFh), the status The display lamp 5 is turned on, and the status display lamp 5 is turned off when the counting flag is not set (counting flag=0).

In addition, the counting flag is cleared (counting flag = 0) at each counting notification timing, and when the counting execution flag (described later) = 1 or more (when the counting switch is pressed for a short time or a long time), the count notification timing , and when the VL abnormality flag is not equal to 0, the total score is 0, or the counting execution flag is 0 at the subsequent counting notification timing, the counting flag is no longer set. That is, when the count value is "1" or more, the counting flag is set to FFh for at least 300 ms, which is the output interval of the count notification. In other words, the status display lamp 5 is lit for at least 300 ms. The counting flag set when the counting execution flag is equal to or greater than 1 is cleared when the count notification timing comes, but is reset in the same interrupt process, so the status display lamp 5 is turned off. It will remain lit without

By configuring in this way, even if the short press of the count switch is established immediately before the count notification timing, the state display lamp 5 can be lit for 300 ms, and the time in which the state display lamp 5 can be visually recognized is secured. It becomes possible to Further, when the long-pressing of the count switch spans n times (multiple times) of count notification timings, the lighting state can be maintained for a period of n×300 ms.

In addition, even if the count switch is pressed for a short time and only "1" is counted as the count value, even if the count switch is pressed for a long time and only "50" is counted as the count value, the status display The lamp 5 will light for 300ms. Therefore, it is possible to turn on the status display lamp 5 by common processing without separate processing for short-pressing and long-pressing, so that the complexity of the program can be eliminated and the program capacity can be reduced.

(Granted number display part)
When game media (scores) are given as a result of a game, the display device is for displaying the number of given game media, and can display numerical information up to two digits at maximum. The display part of each digit constituting the given number display part is composed of a plurality of segments, and by lighting the segments, it is possible to inform the information of the number of game media. If the error information corresponding to the error that has occurred is not displayed on the game medium number display portion P9, the error information corresponding to the error that has occurred may be displayed on the given number display portion. In this case, the error information may be displayed after the information on the number of game media provided in the provided number display section. For example, if the number of game media to be awarded as a result of a game is "7", "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", and "7" are displayed in the awarded number display section. is displayed, and then "E1" (error code) is displayed. Although the awarded number display unit is not shown, it is conceivable that it is arranged on the left side of the settlement switch P6 and the 1-bet switch P5O when viewed from the front.

(Display window P10)
When the front door P2 is closed, the pattern of the reel tape attached to each reel of the left reel P18L, the middle reel P18C, and the right reel P18R (see FIG. 3) which are rotatably provided in the vertical direction is displayed in the display window P10. becomes visible through the Specifically, from the display window P10, when the reels are stopped, out of the 21 (20, 16, etc.) symbols, in the rotation direction of the left reel P18L, the middle reel P18C, and the right reel P18R. Three patterns that are continuous along the line are visible. That is, 3 [symbols]×3 [reels]=9 patterns in total can be visually recognized in the display window P10. Here, among the stop display positions where the left reel P18L, the middle reel P18C, and the right reel P18R each stop and display three symbols, the uppermost stop display position is the upper row, the center stop display position is the middle row, and the lowermost stop display position is The stop display position is set to the bottom row.

(Image display device)
The image display device displays, in addition to various effect images, a game instruction image for instructing the pressing order of the stop switch P4 during the game, an error image when an error occurs, and the like. In this embodiment, two image display devices, that is, an image display device P11M and an image display device P11S are provided as image display devices. Depending on the model, only one image display device may be installed, three or more image display devices may be installed, or none may be installed. As the image display device, various forms of display devices such as a liquid crystal display, plasma display, organic EL display, dot display, and projector can be adopted as long as they are display devices for allowing the player to view images.

In addition, an operation mode display device (also called an instruction monitor) that notifies the operation mode of the stop switch P4 may be provided. It should be noted that the operation mode of the stop switch P4 may be notified to the given number display section (may also be used). When the operation mode of the stop switch P4 is notified to the given number display section, the given number display section may be referred to as an instruction monitor. In addition, a 1-bet lamp, a 2-bet lamp, and a 3-bet lamp for notifying the number of bets, a replay display lamp indicating that a replay (also referred to as replay) can be executed, and a game can be started by operating the start switch P3. A game executable lamp indicating that the game is executable, a game medium insertable lamp indicating that the game medium can be inserted by operating the bet switch P5, and the like may be provided.

<Description of main parts arranged on the back surface of the front door P2 of the gaming machine P>

Next, the rear structure of the front door P2 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

(Sub control board P12)
The sub-control board P12 (also called sub-control means, sub-control board (means), effect control board (means)) is accommodated in the case of the sub-control board P12. A sub-control CPU, a sub-control ROM, and a sub-control RAM are mounted on the sub-control board P12 (the sub-control CPU, sub-control ROM, and sub-control RAM may be built in one chip). The sub-control CPU, sub-control ROM, and sub-control RAM can communicate data with each other via a bus. The sub control board P12 determines data to be output to the performance lamps, speakers, and image display devices (image display device P11M, image display device P11S) based on information (also referred to as commands) from the main control board P15, which will be described later. do. In other words, the sub-control board P12 is mainly performing control related to effects. Information cannot be transmitted from the sub control board P12 to the main control board P15 (one-way communication). In addition, it acquires the data input by operating the effect selection switch P8W or the effect determination switch P8E, and based on the data input by operating the effect selection switch P8W or the effect determination switch P8E. , speakers, and image display devices (image display device P11M, image display device P11S).

(Game media count display board P13)
The game medium number display board P13 is a board for displaying the game medium number display portion P9. Specifically, it is the substrate on which the game medium number display portion P9 is installed.
(speaker)
There are four speakers, an upper right speaker P14UR at the upper part of the front door, an upper left speaker (not shown), a lower right speaker P14DR at the lower part of the front door, and a lower left speaker P14DL. In addition to sound, output an error sound or warning sound that informs that an error has occurred.

<Description of Main Parts Arranged in Cabinet P1 of Gaming Machine P>

Next, the internal structure of the cabinet P1 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

(Main control board P15)
The main control board P15 (also called main control means, first main control board (means), main control board (means), or game control board (means)) is housed in the main control board case. The main control board P15 is protected by a main control board case, and is configured to be difficult to open by sealing the main control board case with caulking (also called a sealing member).

The main control board P15 is equipped with a first main control CPU, a first main control ROM, and a first main control RAM (the first main control CPU, the first main control ROM, and the first main control RAM are built in the chip and called the main control chip). The first main control CPU, first main control ROM, and first main control RAM are capable of data communication with each other via a bus. The main control board P15 controls the internal lottery, reel control such as drive and stop of the reels, all reels stop, winning judgment control based on the stopped symbol combination, bonus game state (simply referred to as bonus) and RT state. It performs game state transition control of various game states such as.

A RAM clear switch is connected to the main control board P15, and the advantageous section information stored in the main control board P15 can be cleared by operating the RAM clear switch. When the RAM clear switch is operated during the advantageous interval, the advantageous interval ends and the normal interval is set. The information cleared by operating the RAM clear switch is the information about the advantageous section, and the information about the setting value, total score, bet number, RT status, and role ratio monitor is not cleared. Further, the method of operating the RAM clear switch for clearing the advantageous section may be by pressing it once, by detecting that it has been pressed continuously for a predetermined time (so-called long press), or by pressing it. It may be that the power was turned on under certain circumstances. The RAM clear switch is placed at a position where the player (user) cannot operate it (for example, the main control board P15 that is not exposed unless the front door P2 is opened, the inside of the cabinet, the front door rear surface, etc.). Note that the RAM clear switch may also be used as a reset switch. Although the details will be described later, the advantageous section is a game section in which an instruction monitor may notify an advantageous stop switch operation mode (including operation sequence and operation position), and the normal section is an advantageous period due to the instruction monitor. This is a game section in which the operation mode of the stop switch is not notified.

The storage capacity of the built-in ROM of the main control chip mounted on the main control board P15 is "16 KB or less", and the use area (also referred to as the first program) of "7.5 KB or less" and other use areas outside (also referred to as a second program). The use area stores or stores only a control area (also referred to as a first control area) of "4.5 KB or less" in which the program executed by the main control board P15 is stored, and information other than the program. It has a data area (also referred to as a first data area) of "3.0 KB or less". Outside the use area, there are a control area (also referred to as a second control area) and a data area (also referred to as a second data area) like the use area. A program relating to the progress of the game is stored in the usage area, and a program relating to anti-fraud measures and a program used for gaming machine testing are stored outside the usage area.

(Game media number control board P16)
Game media count control board P16 (second main control board (means), payout control board (means), medal count control board (means), medal count display control board (means), or game media count display control board (means) ) is housed in the game media number control board case. The game media count control board P16 is protected by a game media count control board case, and by sealing the game media count control board case with caulking (also called a sealing member), it is difficult to open the game media count control board case. is configured to be

The game media number control board P16 is equipped with a second main control CPU, a second main control ROM, and a second main control RAM (the second main control CPU, the second main control ROM, and the second main control RAM are may be built in one chip). The second main control CPU, second main control ROM, and second main control RAM are capable of data communication with each other via a bus. The game medium number control board P16 controls the display of the game medium number display section P9, transmits information (commands) to the lending unit via a game ball lending device connection terminal board, which will be described later, and controls the number of game balls. Receiving information (commands) from the rental unit via the rental device connection terminal board, transmitting information (commands) to the main control board P15, and receiving information (commands) from the main control board P15 be able to.

In addition, the game medium number control board P16 is provided with game medium number storage means for storing the number of acquired game media. By subtracting the inserted number, which is the number of game media to be used, the number of game media currently possessed by the user is stored.

A total score clear switch is connected to the game media number control board P16. The total score stored in the game media number control board P16 can be cleared by detecting the operation of the switch. The information cleared by operating the total score clear switch is only the total score, and other information (for example, information on the number of bets, etc.) is not cleared. Further, the total score clear switch for clearing the total score may be operated by pressing it once or by detecting that it has been pressed continuously for a predetermined time (so-called long pressing). The total score clear switch is arranged at a position where the user cannot operate it (for example, on the game media number control board P16, inside the cabinet, on the rear surface of the front door, etc.).

When the total score is cleared by turning on the power while the total score clear switch is being operated, the total score clear status is turned ON, and the total score is cleared until one game started after that is completed. The status is kept ON, and the total score clear status is turned OFF after one game is completed. The total score clear status information may be transmitted to the lending unit, and when the lending unit receives the information that the total score clear status is ON, the total score information stored in the lending unit is cleared. In addition, when the total score clear status is ON in the game machine P and the lending points are given from the lending unit, the total score clear status remains ON and the lending points are newly added as the total score. Even if the total score clear status is turned OFF after one game is finished, the total score to which the new lending points are added is not cleared.

In addition, even if the power is turned off during the game (during reel rotation, payout processing (also called score giving processing), etc.) and the power is turned on in a situation where the total score clear switch is operated, the total score will not be cleared. The total score clear status remains OFF, the power is turned off after the end of the game, and when the power is turned on while the total score clear switch is being operated, the total score is cleared, and the total score clear status is changed. becomes ON. In this case, the game medium number control board P16 determines whether or not the game is in progress based on the game start information and game end information transmitted from the main control board P15, and activates the total score clear switch during the game. The total score is not cleared by the operation.

Also, the total score clear switch is operated during the game, the game is terminated while the total score clear switch is operated, and the power is turned off when the total score clear switch is operated and the game is completed. is performed, and when the power is turned on while the total score clear switch is being operated, the total score is cleared and the total score clear status is turned ON.

Also, if the power to the total score clear switch is turned off during a game and the power is turned on while the total score clear switch is being operated, the total score will be cleared and the total score clear status will be turned ON. In this case, the total score clear status is changed from ON to OFF at the end of the game next to the game in which the total score clear switch was operated. In other words, the total score clear status is kept ON at the end of the game in which the total score clear switch is operated, and the total score clear status is turned OFF at the end of the next game. As a result, even when the total score clear status is ON for a short period of time (timing when the total score clear switch is operated just before the end of the game), the total score clear status can be maintained ON in the next game. Fraud such as clearing the total score can be suppressed. Note that the total score clear status may be turned OFF after the end of the game in which the total score clear switch is operated. In this case, the capacity reduction effect can be expected by sharing the program for updating the total score clear status.

Further, the total score is not cleared only by pressing the total score clear switch, but since the total score clear switch is detected, it is possible to check whether or not there is an abnormality in the switch managed by the game medium number control board P16. A monitor lamp for visual recognition by the administrator lights up. On the other hand, the monitor lamp does not turn on when the total score clear switch is being detected, but the monitor lamp is turned off when the total score clear switch is being detected, and the total score clear switch is not being detected. It may be configured so that the monitor lamp is sometimes turned on. The monitor lamp is a lamp mounted on the main control board P15 and/or the game medium number control board P16, but may be mounted on another board.

Also, if the power is turned off during or after the game is over, and the power is turned on while the setting key switch is ON and the total score clear switch is ON, the main control board P15 will turn off the setting key switch. It is determined whether or not it is ON, and whether or not the total score clear switch is ON is determined on the game medium number control board P16.

When the power is turned on while the setting key switch is ON and the total score clearing switch is ON, the setting change mode is activated, and after initializing a predetermined range of storage areas in the first main control RAM, settings are made. A value can be selected. On the other hand, in the game media number control board P16, after initializing the storage area of the specific range of the second main control RAM based on the power being turned on, the second main control board P16 based on the total score clear switch being ON. The total score is cleared by initializing the memory area storing the total score in the control RAM. By configuring in this manner, setting change and total score clearing can be performed at the same time by turning on the power once, so that it is possible to prevent the operation of the game parlor manager from becoming complicated.

Here, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch ON and the total score clear switch ON, the main control board P15 activates the setting change mode, and the predetermined range of the first main control RAM will be initialized. When the conditions for ending the setting change mode are met (the setting key switch is turned off after the start switch P3 is operated to fix the set value), the setting change mode is ended. After that, when the bet button is operated, the situation becomes such that the betting process using the total score can be executed (game standby). In other words, if the initialization of the storage area storing the total score is not completed before the setting change mode ends, there is a possibility that bet processing will be performed based on the total score that has not been cleared. In order to solve this problem, when the power is turned on while the setting key switch is ON and the total score clear switch is ON, a predetermined range of storage areas in the first main control RAM is initialized. It is preferable that the timing of starting initialization of the storage area storing the total score in the second main control RAM is earlier than the timing of starting. As another method, when the power is turned on while the setting key switch is ON and the total score clear switch is ON, the timing at which the initialization of the predetermined range of the storage area of the first main control RAM is completed. It is preferable that the timing at which the initialization of the storage area storing the total score in the second main control RAM is completed is earlier than the timing.

Also, if the power is turned on while the setting key switch is ON and the total score clear switch is ON, the setting change mode may be entered but the total score may not be cleared. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the total score from being cleared even if the total score clear switch is erroneously operated during the work of shifting to the setting change mode. The total score is important information, and such a control system may be used when it is important to prevent the total score from being cleared easily.

Also, if the power is turned on while the setting key switch is ON and the total score clear switch is ON, the total score may be cleared without shifting to the setting change mode. According to such a configuration, even if the setting key switch is erroneously operated during the work of clearing the total score, it is possible not to shift to the setting change mode. The set value is important information in the profit control of the game arcade, and such a control system may be used when it is important to prevent illegal changes.

In addition, when shifting to setting change mode, the LCD will display "setting change mode", the frame lamp will light red, and the setting change mode BGM and "setting change" voice will be heard from the speaker. It is output until the mode ends, and when the total score is cleared, the frame lamp lights up in orange, and the voice "Total score cleared" is output from the speaker for a short period of time or once. is configured to For this reason, even if the transition to the setting change mode and the clearing of the total score are performed at the same time, in order to make it easier to recognize all the situations, the notification regarding the clearing of the total score is output for a short period of time or once. are prioritized. In order to give priority, for example, if the audio channel for the setting change mode audio and the audio for clearing the total score is the same, by outputting the audio for clearing the total score later, the audio for clearing the total score , or even if the audio channel for the setting change mode and the sound for clearing the total score are set to different channels, while the sound for clearing the total score is being output, It is conceivable to lower the volume of the voice or mute it. By configuring in this way, even if the transition to the setting change mode and the clearing of the total score are performed at the same time, the situation can be easily recognized.

The memory capacity of the built-in ROM of the game media count control chip mounted on the game media count control board P16 is "16 KB or less", and the use area (also referred to as the first program) of "7.5 KB or less" It has a non-used area (also called a second program). In the used area, only a control area of "4.5 KB or less" (also referred to as a first control area) in which the program executed by the game media number control board P16 is stored and information other than the program are stored or stored. and a data area (also referred to as a first data area) of "3.0 KB or less" to be stored. Outside the use area, there are a control area (also referred to as a second control area) and a data area (also referred to as a second data area) like the use area. A program relating to the progress of the game is stored in the use area, and a program relating to anti-fraud measures and a program used for role ratio monitoring are stored outside the use area.

Also, the game media number control board P16 is equipped with a role ratio monitor (also referred to as a performance display monitor), and is configured to be able to execute arithmetic processing and display processing for displaying stay ratios in various states.

The role ratio monitor is the cumulative advantageous section ratio or the cumulative instructed role ratio (selectable according to the specifications of the game machine), the continuous role ratio among the latest 6000 games, and the role ratio among the latest 6000 games. It is a display device that switches and displays the ratio, the cumulative continuous role ratio, the cumulative role ratio, and the cumulative role object state ratio every 4800 ms. number can be displayed. The upper two digits of the four digit number displayed by the four 7-segment LEDs are called an identification segment, and the lower two digits are called a ratio segment.

"Role" in the role ratio refers to the first type special role (so-called RB), the second type special role (so-called CB), and the ordinary role (so-called SB). ” is a ratio calculated by payout during operation of accessory/total payout×100. In addition, the payout in the operation of the type 1 special role product continuous operation device (so-called BB) and the type 2 special role product continuous operation device (so-called MB) is also included in the "payout during operation of the role product", but during the BB Payouts in general games and general games during MB are not included in the “payout during operation of the accessory”.

The "continuous role" in the continuous role ratio refers to the first type special role (so-called RB), and the "continuous role ratio" is the payout during operation of the first type special role / total payout It is a ratio calculated by ×100. Note that the payout in the operation of the type 1 special accessory continuous operation device (so-called BB) is also included in the "payout during the operation of the accessory", but the payout in the general game during the BB is the "payout during the operation of the accessory". not included in

The "instruction-inclusive role" in the instruction-inclusive role ratio includes the payout in the game (so-called AT) in which the instruction function is activated in the above-mentioned "accessory", and the "instruction-inclusive role ratio" , (payout during operation of the instruction function or payout during operation of the accessory)/total payout×100. Here, (payout while the instruction function is activated or payout while the accessory is in operation) does not refer to the payout in the game in which the instruction function is in operation and the accessory is activated, but the payout in the game in which the instruction function is activated. It refers to the sum of the payouts of the game in which the number and the accessory are activated. If the game in which the instruction function was activated was the game in which the accessory was activated, instead of adding the two payout numbers, the payout during product operation). If the player makes a mistake in operating the stop switch in a game in which the AT is activated, the maximum payout may not be obtained. In this case, the payout is calculated based on the actual payout.

Among the information displayed on the role ratio monitor, the information displayed in the identification segment is the cumulative advantageous section ratio, the cumulative instructed role ratio, the continuous role ratio in the latest 6000 games, and the role ratio in the latest 6000 games. It is information for identifying which ratio is being displayed among the ratio, the cumulative continuous accessory ratio, the cumulative accessory ratio, and the cumulative accessory state ratio, and is indicated by "7U." and "7P. ”, “6Y.”, “7Y.”, “6A.”, “7A.”, “5H.”. For example, if "7U." It shows that it is a character ratio.

Of the information displayed on the role ratio monitor, the information displayed in the ratio segment is information for visually recognizing the calculation results of various ratios, and is displayed in two-digit numbers using two 7-segment LEDs. For example, when the calculation result is 70, "70" is displayed in the ratio segment. Note that the calculated results are rounded down to the nearest decimal point and displayed. Also, when the calculation result is 100, "99" is displayed. Also, when the total number of games is less than 400, the ratio segment is displayed as "00".

The identification segment is displayed in a flashing manner when the cumulative number of games is less than the reference number of games. The reference number of games is determined according to various ratios, 175,000 games in the case of the cumulative advantageous section ratio, 175,000 games in the case of the cumulative instructed accessory ratio, and the latest 6000 games. 6,000 games in the case of the continuous role ratio, 6,000 games in the case of the latest 6,000 games, and 17,500 games in the case of the cumulative continuous role ratio, In the case of the cumulative role item ratio, the number is 17,500 games, and in the case of the cumulative role item, etc. state ratio, the number is 175,000 games.

The ratio seg is displayed in a blinking manner when the displayed numerical value is equal to or greater than the threshold. The threshold is determined according to various ratios, and is 70 in the case of the cumulative advantageous section ratio, 70 in the case of the cumulative instructed role ratio, and 70 in the case of the continuous role ratio among the latest 6000 games. 60 in the case of the latest 6000 game character ratios, 70 in the case of cumulative continuous character ratios, 70 in the case of cumulative total character ratios, etc. 50 for state ratios. If the total number of games is less than 400 and the calculation result is equal to or greater than the threshold value but "00" is displayed in the ratio segment, the ratio segment is displayed in a lighting mode.

Of the information displayed in the identification segment of the role ratio monitor, only one of "7U." and "7P." is displayed according to the specifications of the gaming machine. "7U." is an identification display indicating the advantageous section ratio, and the value of (the number of games played in the advantageous section÷total number of games×100) is displayed in the ratio segment. "7P." is an identification display indicating the ratio of instructed accessories, and the value of (the number of payouts of instructed accessories (the number of accessories paid out + the number of payouts when the instruction function is activated) ÷ the total number of payouts × 100) is used as a ratio segment. indicate. A game machine that does not have an instruction function (a game machine that does not notify the operation mode stop switch that is advantageous to the player on the instruction monitor) displays "7U." and "--" is displayed in the ratio segment (hereinbelow, a specification in which "7U.--" is displayed on the indication monitor is referred to as a 7U type (without indication function)).

Further, since there is a possibility that which of the "7U." is desirable. In order to configure in this way, the role ratio monitor type information ("0" for 7U type (without instruction function), 7U type (with instruction function), "2" for 7P type) is transmitted to the game medium number control board P16, and the game medium number control board P16 monitors the role ratio transmitted from the main control board P15. The type information is stored in a certain storage area. The game media number control board P16, regardless of whether the specification is 7U type or 7P type, includes information that is used only for any of the "number of games played in advantageous section" and "number of instructed bonus payouts". Role ratio monitor type information stored in a predetermined storage area and transmitted from the main control board P15 when displaying the advantageous section ratio or the instructed role ratio in the identification seg and the ratio seg of the role ratio monitor It is configured to display the required information based on

The game medium number control board P16 is required based on the role ratio monitor type information transmitted from the main control board P15 not only when displaying on the role ratio monitor but also when transmitting the gaming machine performance information to the lending unit. information is sent. For example, when transmitting the gaming machine performance information when the gaming machine P is of the 7U type (no instruction function), FFh is transmitted as the information regarding the instructed accessory ratio, and FFh is transmitted as the information regarding the advantageous section ratio. Also, for example, when the gaming machine P is of the 7U type (with instruction function) and the gaming machine performance information is transmitted, FFh is transmitted as information regarding the ratio of instructed accessories, and FFh is transmitted as information regarding the advantageous section ratio ( A value corresponding to the result of number of games/total number of games x 100) is transmitted. Also, for example, when the gaming machine P is of the 7P type, when the gaming machine performance information is transmitted, the value corresponding to the result of (indicated role payout number/total payout number x 100) is used as information on the instructed role payout ratio. and FFh as information on the advantageous section ratio.

In addition, since the initial value of the role ratio monitor type information storage area of the game medium number control board P16 is 0, communication failure between the main control board P15 and the game medium number control board P16 when the power is turned on causes the main control When the role ratio monitor type information is not transmitted from the board P15, the role ratio monitor type information becomes 0 even if the specification of the game machine P is the 7P type. Also, if the first class special accessory is not installed at this time, all the ratio segments related to ``6Y.'', ``7Y.'', ``6A.'', ``7A.'', and ``5H.'' -" is displayed.

In this way, even if a communication failure occurs between the main control board P15 and the game media number control board P16 when the power is turned on, the role ratio monitor display will change the number displayed in the ratio segment to "-". -" is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that it is not normal.

In order to confirm whether the role ratio monitor can operate normally, a test pattern is displayed in the identification segment and the ratio segment for 4800 ms after the power is turned on and the interrupt process is activated. As a test pattern, all segments (including DP) of four 7-segment LEDs constituting the role ratio monitor are displayed in a blinking manner. For example, "8.8.8.8." may be displayed in a blinking manner. The test pattern may be displayed at any timing during setting change, setting confirmation, or RWM abnormal error, in addition to the timing after power-on.

When the cumulative number of games in the identified segment is less than the reference number of games, when the displayed numerical value is greater than or equal to the threshold value in the ratio segment, and when the test pattern is displayed in the identification segment and the ratio segment, the segment is displayed in a blinking manner. However, more specifically, the blinking mode is displayed by switching between lighting and extinguishing at every 300 ms such as lighting 300 ms→extinguishing 300 ms→lit 300 ms→extinguishing 300 ms→ . . . Also, when the various ratio information is switched, lighting is started, thereby preventing the display time of the various ratio information from becoming longer or shorter depending on the timing of lighting and blinking.

As described above, the cumulative advantageous section ratio or the cumulative instructed role ratio, the continuous role ratio among the latest 6000 games, the role ratio among the latest 6000 games, and the cumulative continuous The character object ratio, the cumulative character object ratio, and the cumulative condition ratio of the character object, etc. are configured to switch the display contents every 4,800 ms, and this 4,800 ms is set to a multiple of 600 ms, which is one set of lighting and blinking. By doing so, it is possible to configure so that one of the 7-segment LEDs is always lit at the switching timing of the various ratios displayed on the role ratio monitor even when displaying in a blinking mode. becomes.

By configuring in this way, even at the timing when various ratio information is switched, lighting is started, so that it is possible to continuously display a display that does not give a sense of discomfort due to the fact that the blinking period does not deviate.

In addition, since the test pattern display period after the power is turned on is also set to 4800 ms, the 7-segment LED is turned off when the test pattern is displayed for 4800 ms. It is possible to display information about the included role ratio from lighting.

Next, a control method for blinking display on the role ratio monitor will be described.

In order to blink the display mode of the role ratio monitor, it has a storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time for switching between lighting and lighting. A storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time for switching between lighting and extinguishing is a 2-byte storage area, and a process of adding 1 is executed for each interrupt process. A storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch between lighting and extinguishing is initialized (0 is stored) when the power is turned on, and then circulates between 0 and 299 each time an interrupt process is executed. In other words, the next value after 299 is 0.

Example 1) When the storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch between lighting and extinguishing is set to "0" and the update process is performed, the storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time for switching between lighting and extinguishing is set to " 1”. At this time, the carry flag is set to 1 (the carry flag is set to 1 because a carry occurs as a result of the calculation of "0-299").
Example 2) If the storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch on and off is "298" and the update process is performed, the storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch on and off will be set to " 299”. At this time, the carry flag is set to 1 (the carry flag is set to 1 because a carry occurs as a result of the calculation of "298-299").
Example 3) When the storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch between lighting and extinguishing is "299" and the update process is performed, the storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time for switching between lighting and extinguishing is set to " 0”. At this time, the carry flag is set to 0 (the carry flag is set to 0 because no carry occurs as a result of the calculation of "299-299").

As described above, if the storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time for switching between lighting and extinguishing is any value from 0 to 298, the carry flag is set to 1, and the time for switching between lighting and extinguishing is set to 1. If the storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for management is 299, carry flag=0. In other words, the carry flag becomes 0 every 300 ms.

When the carry flag becomes 0, the flashing switching flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is updated. The flashing switching flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is initialized (0 is stored) when the power is turned on, and when 0 is stored in the flashing switching flag (_FL_CHG_FLS), the role ratio monitor is turned on, and the flashing switching flag ( _FL_CHG_FLS), the role ratio monitor is turned off. In other words, since the carry flag becomes 0 every 300 ms, by repeatedly storing 0 and 1 in the flashing switching flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) every 300 ms, the display mode of the role ratio monitor changes between the lighting mode and the extinguishing mode every 300 ms. can be repeatedly displayed (blinking display).

When the display of the role ratio monitor is displayed in a blinking mode, if the total number of games in the identification segment is less than the reference number of games, if the display numerical value is greater than or equal to the threshold value in the ratio segment, the test pattern is displayed in the identification segment and the ratio segment. Since it is one of the cases of displaying, in cases other than these cases, it is displayed in the lighting mode without referring to the flashing switching flag (_FL_CHG_FLS). However, regardless of whether or not the blinking switching flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is referred to, the storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch between lighting and extinguishing is updated for each interrupt process, so the blinking switching flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is updated as needed, and even when the flashing switching flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is switched from not referring to to referring to it, the timing of turning on and off and the switching timing of various ratio displays can be displayed without deviation. It becomes possible.

(Terminal board for connecting equipment for renting game balls, etc.)
A game ball rental device connection terminal board (also referred to as a connection terminal board) has a role as a relay board for performing two-way communication between the game machine P and the rental unit. The game ball rental device connection terminal plate is housed in a game ball rental device connection terminal plate case. The game ball rental device connection terminal plate is protected by a game ball rental device connection terminal plate case. The rental device connection terminal board case is configured to be difficult to open.

The game ball lending device connection terminal board has a connector (D-sub 9-pin) for two-way communication with the lending unit, and a harness connected to the connector from an opening provided on the back side of the housing of the gaming machine P. Two-way communication is possible via a cable (about 1.5m to 2.0m long). In addition, the connection terminal board for the game ball lending device is equipped with a capacitor to stabilize the communication with the lending unit. The lending unit is provided with a lending switch, and when the lending switch is operated, a lending notification is sent from the lending unit, and the lending notification is sent to the game medium number control board P16 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board. is entered. The connector for connecting the game ball rental device connection terminal plate and the rental unit is provided with a spring lock so that the harness cannot be easily pulled out.

The main control board P15, the game medium number control board P16, and the game ball lending device connection terminal board are housed in board cases, respectively. may be housed together in one board case, or the main control board P15, the game medium number control board P16, and the game ball rental device connection terminal board may be housed together in one board case. Further, even when the board case is installed in the game machine P, the back side can be easily confirmed.

In a conventional game machine using medals, the main control board P15 and the spinning drum device board are connected by a harness. When the power supply from the capacitor mounted on the device board is cut off, the data stored in the RAM of the main control chip can be initialized. As a result, even if incorrect data is stored in the RAM, it can be reliably initialized by unplugging the harness. In addition, since the board case of the main control board P15 is sealed, if a capacitor is mounted on the main control board, the board case of the main control board must be destroyed in order to cut off the power supply from the capacitor as described above. After that, it is necessary to remove the main control chip from the main control board P15. Thus, in order not to damage the board case when the power supply from the capacitor is cut off, it is desirable to mount the capacitor on a board other than the main control board.

On the other hand, the game ball rental device connection terminal board described in the present embodiment uses a photocoupler to perform high-speed communication with the rental unit, so power tends to run short. It is desirable to supply Therefore, a capacitor is mounted on the game ball lending device connection terminal plate, the game ball lending device connection terminal plate and the game medium number control board P16 are connected with a harness, and the game medium number control board P16 and the main control board are connected. By connecting P15 with a harness, the capacitor mounted on the game ball rental device connection terminal board becomes a backup power supply for the main control chip mounted on the main control board P15.

The main control board P15, the game medium number control board P16, and the game ball lending device connection terminal board are each sealed with a board case, and the game medium number control board P16, the game ball lending device connection terminal board, Since the main control board P15 and the game medium number control board P16 are connected by harnesses, the harnesses can be removed to initialize the data stored in the RAM of the main control chip. In addition, since the game media count control chip of the game media count control board is sealed with a board case, it is difficult to insert and remove it. It is configured.

The main control board P15 and the number-of-game-media control board P16 are connected via a 32-pin connector. Pin 1 is DC 12V, Pin 2 is DC 12V, Pin 3 is DC 5V, Pin 4 is DC 5V, Pin 5 is the main control data signal, Pin 6 is the control state signal 1, pin 7 is control state signal 2, pin 8 is control state signal 3, pin 9 is control state signal 4, pin 10 is control state signal 5, pin 11 is Pin 1 is game medium number control data signal 1, 12th pin is game medium number control data signal 2, 13th pin is game medium number control data signal 3, and 14th pin is game medium number control data signal. 4, the 15th pin is for the game medium number control data signal 5, the 16th pin is for the game medium number control data signal 6, the 17th pin is for the game medium number control data signal 7, and the 18th pin is for the game medium number control data signal 7. The 19th pin is the game medium number control data signal 9, the 20th pin is the game medium number control data signal 10, and the 21st pin is the game medium number control data signal 11. The 22nd pin is for the game medium number control data signal 12, the 23rd pin is for the game medium number control data signal 13, the 24th pin is for the game medium number control data signal 14, and the 25th pin is for the game medium. 26th pin is game media count control data signal 16; 27th pin is game media count control data strobe signal; 28th pin is power interruption detection signal 1; The pin is a backup power supply, the 30th pin is a GND signal, the 31st pin is a GND signal, and the 32nd pin is a GND signal. The main control board P15 and the game media number control board P16 may be directly connected by a harness, or may be indirectly connected via a relay terminal board.

The game medium number control board P16 and the game ball lending device connection terminal board are connected via a 5-pin connector. Pin 1 is DC 5V, pin 2 is the VL signal, pin 3 is the transmit signal, pin 4 is the receive signal, and pin 5 is the GND signal. The game medium number control board P16 and the game ball lending device connection terminal board may be directly connected by a harness, or may be indirectly connected via a relay terminal board.

The game media count control board P16 and the game media count display board P13 are connected via a 14-pin connector. Pin 1 is the LED digit A signal, pin 2 is the LED digit B signal, pin 3 is the LED digit C signal, pin 4 is the LED digit D signal, and pin 5 is the LED digit D signal. The 6th pin is the game medium number display segment A signal, the 7th pin is the game medium number display segment B signal, the 8th pin is the game medium number display segment C signal, and the 9th pin. is the game medium number display segment D signal, the 10th pin is the game medium number display segment E signal, the 11th pin is the game medium number display segment F signal, and the 12th pin is the game medium number display segment G signal. , the 13th pin is the game medium number display segment P signal, and the 14th pin is the game medium number display segment P signal. Signals relating to the 1st to 14th pins are signals transmitted from the game medium number control board P16 to the game medium number display board P13. The game media count control board P16 and the game media count display board P13 may be directly connected by a harness, or may be indirectly connected via a relay terminal plate.

The game medium number control board P16 and the counting switch P7 are connected via a 2-pin connector. The number 1 pin is a count switch P7 signal, and is used to transmit a signal regarding the operation input of the count switch P7 to the game medium number control board P16 when the count switch P7 is operated. When the count switch P7 signal is input, part or all of the total score information managed by the game medium number control board P16 is sent to the lending unit. The 2nd pin is a GND signal and is used as GND. The game media number control board P16 and the count switch P7 may be directly connected by a harness, or may be indirectly connected via a relay terminal plate.

The game ball rental device connection terminal board and the rental unit are connected via a 9-pin connector. Pin 1 is the LG signal, Pin 2 is the TXD- signal, Pin 3 is the RXD- signal, Pin 4 is the PSI signal, Pin 5 is the LG signal, Pin 6. is the TXD+ signal, pin 7 is the RXD+ signal, pin 8 is the VL signal, and pin 9 is the VL signal. The TXD+ signal and TXD- signal are used to transmit information from the gaming machine P (connecting terminal board for equipment for renting out game balls, etc.) to the renting unit. The RXD+ signal and the RXD- signal are used by the gaming machine P (terminal board for connection of equipment for renting out game balls, etc.) to receive information from the renting unit. The PSI signal is used as a signal connection confirmation signal for confirming the connection between the gaming machine P and the lending unit. The VL signal is used as an insulated DC5V power supply. Also, the harness connecting the 2nd pin and the 6th pin is twisted. Also, the harness connecting the 3rd pin and the 7th pin is twisted. The game ball rental device connection terminal board and the rental unit may be directly connected by a harness, or may be indirectly connected via a relay terminal board.

The main control board P15 and the door relay board are connected via a 40-pin connector. Pin 1 is 5V DC, Pin 2 is 5V DC, Pin 3 is 5V DC, Pin 4 is 5V DC, Pin 5 is the GND signal, and Pin 6 is the LED digit 1 signal. Pin 7 is the LED Digit 2 signal, Pin 8 is the LED Digit 3 signal, Pin 9 is the LED Digit 4 signal, Pin 10 is the LED Digit 5 signal, Pin 11 is the Pin 12 is the LED Segment 1B signal, Pin 13 is the LED Segment 1C signal, Pin 14 is the LED Segment 1D signal, and Pin 15 is the LED Segment 1E signal. , pin 16 is the LED segment 1F signal, pin 17 is the LED segment 1G signal, pin 18 is the LED segment 1P signal, pin 19 is the GND signal, and pin 20 is the GND signal. , pin 21 is the GND signal, pin 22 is the GND signal, pin 23 is the GND signal, pin 24 is the GND signal, pin 25 is the start switch sensor signal, pin 26 is the The pin is a GND signal, the 27th pin is a settlement switch signal, the 28th pin is a 1-piece insert switch signal, the 29th pin is a 3-piece insert sensor signal, and the 30th pin is a GND signal. Pin 31 is the left stop switch P4L sensor signal, pin 32 is the GND signal, pin 33 is the middle stop switch P4C sensor signal, pin 34 is the GND signal, pin 35 is the GND signal. , the 36th pin is the right stop switch P4R sensor signal, the 37th pin is the GND signal, the 38th pin is the GND signal, the 39th pin is the GND signal, and the 40th pin is the connector connection monitor. is a signal. The main control board P15 and the drum device board P17 may be directly connected by a harness, or may be indirectly connected via a relay terminal plate.

The main control board P15 and the reel device board P17 are connected via a 26-pin connector. No.1 pin is DC12V, No.2 pin is DC12V, No.3 pin is DC5V, No.4 pin is DC5V, No.5 pin is backup power supply, No.6 pin is left reel P18L motor Φ0 pin 7 is the left reel P18L motor Φ1 signal, pin 8 is the left reel P18L motor Φ2 signal, pin 9 is the left reel P18L motor Φ3 signal, pin 10 is the middle reel P18C The 11th pin is the middle reel P18C motor Φ1 signal, the 12th pin is the middle reel P18C motor Φ2 signal, the 13th pin is the middle reel P18C motor Φ3 signal, and the 14th pin is the right The 15th pin is the right reel P18R motor Φ1 signal, the 16th pin is the right reel P18R motor Φ2 signal, the 17th pin is the right reel P18R motor Φ3 signal, and the 18th pin is the left reel P18L sensor signal, the 19th pin is the middle reel P18C sensor signal, the 20th pin is the right reel P18R sensor signal, the 21st pin is the door switch signal, and the 22nd pin is the GND signal. The 23rd pin is a GND signal, the 24th pin is a GND signal, the 25th pin is a GND signal, and the 26th pin is a GND signal. The main control board P15 and the drum device board P17 may be directly connected by a harness, or may be indirectly connected via a relay terminal plate.

The main control board P15 and the setting/reset switch are connected via a 5-pin connector. In this embodiment, the setting change switch for changing the set value in the setting change mode and the reset switch for canceling the error are the same switch, but they may be provided as different switches.

The main control board P15 and the sub-control board are connected via a 30-pin connector.

The rotary drum device board P17 and the power supply board are connected via an 8-pin connector.

The spinning drum board P17 and the left reel P18L motor are connected via a 4-pin connector. Pin 1 is the motor Φ0 signal, pin 2 is the motor Φ1 signal, pin 3 is the motor Φ2 signal, and pin 4 is the motor Φ3 signal. The spinning drum board P17 and the left reel P18L motor may be directly connected by a harness, or may be indirectly connected via a relay terminal plate.

The reel device board P17 and the left reel P18L sensor are connected via a 3-pin connector. The 1st pin is DC5V, the 2nd pin is the left reel P18L sensor signal, and the 3rd pin is the GND signal. The reel device board P17 and the left reel P18L sensor may be directly connected by a harness, or may be indirectly connected via a relay terminal plate.

The spinning drum device board P17 and the middle reel P18C motor are connected via a 4-pin connector. Pin 1 is the motor Φ0 signal, pin 2 is the motor Φ1 signal, pin 3 is the motor Φ2 signal, and pin 4 is the motor Φ3 signal. The spinning drum board P17 and the middle reel P18C motor may be directly connected by a harness, or may be indirectly connected via a relay terminal plate.

The reel device board P17 and the center reel P18C sensor are connected via a 3-pin connector. The 1st pin is DC5V, the 2nd pin is the middle reel P18C sensor signal, and the 3rd pin is the GND signal. The reel device board P17 and the center reel P18C sensor may be directly connected by a harness, or may be indirectly connected via a relay terminal plate.

The spinning drum board P17 and the right reel P18R motor are connected via a 4-pin connector. Pin 1 is the motor Φ0 signal, pin 2 is the motor Φ1 signal, pin 3 is the motor Φ2 signal, and pin 4 is the motor Φ3 signal. The spinning drum board P17 and the right reel P18R motor may be directly connected by a harness, or may be indirectly connected via a relay terminal plate.

The reel device board P17 and the right reel P18R sensor are connected via a 3-pin connector. The 1st pin is DC5V, the 2nd pin is the right reel P18R sensor signal, and the 3rd pin is the GND signal. The reel device board P17 and the right reel P18R sensor may be directly connected by a harness, or may be indirectly connected via a relay terminal plate.

The reel device board P17 and the door switch are connected via a 3-pin connector. The 1st pin is a door switch signal, the 2nd pin is a GND signal, and the 3rd pin is a GND signal. The reel device board P17 and the door switch may be directly connected by a harness, or may be indirectly connected via a relay terminal plate.

The door relay board and the display board are connected via a 14-pin connector.

The door relay board and the max bed are connected via a 6-pin connector.

The door relay board and the start switch P3 are connected via a 3-pin connector.

The door relay board and the stop switch P4 are connected via a 9-pin connector.

<Setting change mode>
The setting change mode is a mode in which a setting value can be selected (in other words, a setting value setting mode in which a setting value can be set). This information can be selected and stored in the set value information storage means. Here, a setting value display (not shown) for displaying the setting value is provided, and in the setting change mode, the hall clerk determines the setting value information based on the information displayed on the setting value display. be able to. The set value displayed on the set value display is information of any one of "1" to "6".

After the power switch is off (OFF) and the setting key switch is turned on (ON), the setting change mode is started (setting change is started) by turning on the power switch.

After starting the setting change mode (starting setting change), it is possible to select which setting value information to use by operating the setting change switch. For example, if the setting change switch is operated while "2" is displayed on the set value display, "3" is displayed on the set value display. Further, when the setting change switch is operated while "6" is displayed on the set value display, "1" is displayed on the set value display. When the setting change mode is activated, a predetermined range of storage area of the first main control RAM is initialized. By this initialization processing, game states such as recoverable errors and advantageous sections are initialized, but the total score is not initialized. When initializing the total score, it is necessary to operate the total score clear switch separately.

After starting the setting change mode (starting setting change), the setting change switch is operated to select the setting value, the start switch P3 is operated to confirm the setting value, and then the setting key switch is turned off. , the setting change mode can be terminated (the setting change can be terminated). After finishing the setting change mode (finishing the setting change), it becomes possible to bet the entry point, and when the operation of the start switch P3 is accepted after the entry point is betted, the game can be executed.

If the setting change mode is terminated while "1" is displayed on the setting value display, "0" is stored as the setting value information and "2" is displayed on the setting value display. When the setting change mode is ended, "1" is stored as the setting value information, and when the setting change mode is ended while "3" is displayed on the setting value display, When "2" is stored and "4" is displayed on the set value display and the setting change mode is terminated, "3" is stored as the set value information and "5" is displayed on the set value display. If the setting change mode is ended when is displayed, "4" is stored as the setting value information, and if the setting change mode is ended while "6" is displayed on the setting value display, "5" is stored as set value information.

Here, even in the setting change mode, communication between the lending unit and the game machine P is performed. In other words, even during the setting change mode, it is possible to receive a rental notification, which will be described later, and add points to the gaming machine P. Also, even during the setting change mode, it is possible to transmit a count notification, which will be described later, and count the points of the gaming machine P. FIG.

Further, it is possible to construct such that communication between the lending unit and the game machine P is not performed even in the setting change mode. In other words, even during the setting change mode, the game machine P does not receive the rental notification even if the rental switch of the rental unit is operated, so the points cannot be added to the game machine P. In this case, even if the count switch P7 is operated, the number of points of the game machine P cannot be counted because the count notification is not transmitted during the setting change mode.

<Setting confirmation mode>
The setting confirmation mode is a mode in which the setting value can be confirmed, and the current setting value can be displayed on the setting value display.

When the setting key switch is turned on under the condition that the power switch is on, the setting confirmation mode can be started (setting confirmation is started). Note that in the setting confirmation mode, unlike in the setting change mode, setting values cannot be selected and changed. Further, when the setting key switch is turned on under the condition that one or more points are betted and the power switch is turned on, the setting confirmation mode can be prevented from starting. In other words, the setting confirmation mode is started when the setting key switch is turned on in a situation where no bet is placed (including automatic betting due to replaying).

After starting the setting confirmation mode (starting setting confirmation), by turning off the setting key switch, the setting confirmation mode can be ended (setting confirmation is ended).

Here, even in the setting confirmation mode, communication between the lending unit and the gaming machine P is being performed. In other words, even during the setting confirmation mode, it is possible to receive a rental notification, which will be described later, and add points to the gaming machine P. Also, even during the setting confirmation mode, it is possible to transmit a count notification, which will be described later, and count the points of the gaming machine P. FIG.

Further, it is possible to construct such that communication between the lending unit and the gaming machine P is not performed even in the setting confirmation mode. In other words, during the setting confirmation mode, the game machine P does not receive the rental notification even if the rental switch of the rental unit is operated, so the points cannot be added to the game machine P. Further, in this case, even if the counting switch P7 is operated, the number of points of the game machine P cannot be counted because the count notification is not transmitted during the setting confirmation mode.

<Rental unit>
The gaming machine P in this embodiment can communicate with the lending unit. For example, the lending unit is provided with a lending switch, and transmits a lending notification to the gaming machine P when the lending switch is operated. The lending unit is equipped with an SC board for receiving information from the game machine P, and the information transmitted by the game medium number control board P16 in the game machine P is configured to be received by the SC board.

<Hall computer>
When the SC board provided in the rental unit receives information from the game machine P, part of the information is transmitted from the rental unit to the hall computer. The information transmitted from the lending unit to the hall computer includes the number of put-in items, the number of pay-out items, the main control state, fraud information, and the like. When the hall computer receives information from the lending unit, it executes processing for displaying the information on a data display or the like outside the gaming machine. In addition, since the hall computer may simultaneously manage information from gaming machines using game medals as conventional objects, the number of insertions and the number of payouts can be calculated by receiving the number of pulses corresponding to the number of insertions and payouts. and the number of payouts. In other words, although the game machine P transmits the values of the number of inputs and the number of payouts as they are, the hall computer, which is the final receiving medium, receives them in pulses. A time lag occurs.

<Description of power-on processing controlled by the main control board P15 applicable to the present embodiment>
When the game machine is powered on, it is determined whether or not the power failure detection signal is ON, and if the power failure detection signal is not ON (if it is OFF), the function setting of the main control chip is performed, and the power is switched off. When the detection signal is ON, the determination of whether the power interruption detection signal is ON is looped (the following power-on processing is not executed).

The function setting of the main control chip executes the initial setting of the built-in registers.

Subsequently, the checksum of the RWM area is calculated and the power-off processing completion flag is checked to generate power-off recovery data.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the door switch signal and the setting key switch signal are ON. If the door switch signal is ON (the front door is open) and the setting key switch signal is ON. executes the setting change device processing, and if any switch is OFF, determines whether or not the power failure recovery data is normal.

Subsequently, if the power failure recovery data is not normal, an error is displayed, and the error state is looped until initialization processing is performed. If the power failure recovery data is normal, the stack pointer is restored based on the data saved at the time of power failure.

Then read the input port.

Subsequently, an interrupt activation process is executed. In the interrupt activation process, settings related to four channels 0 to 3 of the serial communication port are executed. Of these, channel 0 can be set for transmission and reception, channel 1 can be set for transmission only, channel 2 can be set for transmission only, and channel 3 is for transmission. It is possible to set only

To set channel 0 to allow reception, bit 7 of the setting area (a part of the internal register) corresponding to channel 0 is set to "1". Also, by setting bit 6 of the setting area (a part of the internal register) corresponding to channel 0 to "1", it is possible to set channel 0 to permit transmission. In this embodiment, since channel 0 is set only for reception, bit 7 is set to "1" and bit 6 is left as "0". By only permitting reception of this channel 0, the main control board can receive commands from the game medium number control board. In this embodiment, when a command is sent from the main control board to the game medium number control board, the serial communication port is not used because the command is sent by parallel communication. Commands may be transmitted using any one of channels 1 to 3 of the serial communication port. Even in this case, mutual communication can be performed without performing complicated processing such as adjusting the timing of a command for transmission and a command for reception by setting channel 0 to permit only reception.

In the interrupt activation process, the reception setting for channel 0 is set in the use area, and the transmission setting for channel 2 is set outside the use area. Channel 2 executes transmission settings to execute processing for outputting test signals from the main control board to the test IF board.

In the interrupt activation process, after setting channel 0 reception permission and transmission non-permission setting, the serial communication setting program outside the use area is called and transmission permission setting for channel 2 is executed. By setting the reception setting for channel 0 earlier than the transmission setting for channel 2 in this manner, it is possible to quickly prepare for the transmission of commands from the game medium number control board.

After the interrupt start processing is executed, the interrupt processing at the time of power failure is resumed.

<Description on the game progress main process controlled by the main control board P15 applicable to the present embodiment>
The game-related processing in the gaming machine P includes interval interrupt processing (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “interrupt processing”) that is executed periodically (every 2.235 ms in this embodiment), and after the interval interrupt processing is completed. It is roughly divided into a game progress main process that is executed until the start timing of the next interval interrupt process.

In the game progress main process, first, a setting changeable state in which setting changes are possible is set. When the setting changeable state is set, if the setting key switch is turned on when the power is turned on, the setting change mode is entered. When the setting change enabled state is not set (when the setting change disabled state is set), the setting change mode is not entered even if the setting key switch is turned on when the power is turned on.

Next, it becomes a game standby state, confirms whether or not the setting key switch, MAX bet switch, 1 bet switch, and settlement switch have been operated (confirms whether or not rising of various switch signals is detected), and confirms whether the setting key switch has been operated. If it is determined that the signal rises (if it is determined that the setting key switch has risen), the setting confirmation process is executed, and if it is determined that the MAX bet switch has been operated, the process of throwing in 3 points is executed. When it is determined that the 1-bet switch has been operated, the process of throwing in one point is executed, and when it is determined that the settlement switch has been operated, the settlement process of the bet points is executed.

Here, the input processing (hereinafter also referred to as betting processing) executed by the main control board P15 will be described.

When the main control board P15 receives the operation of the MAX bet switch or the 1 bet switch (when it determines that there is rising data for the MAX bet switch or the 1 bet switch), the maximum number of inputs (also referred to as the specified number ) and the current number of bets (also referred to as the current number of bets, the number of bets being bets, and the number of bets being bets) is subtracted and the result is "0" (zero flag = 1 case), the input processing is terminated, and if the result obtained by subtracting the maximum input number of "3" and the current input number is not "0" (when the zero flag is not 1), the input request number (also referred to as the bet request number) ).

In the setting processing of the number of input requests, if the operation of the 1 bet switch is accepted, the number of requests to be inserted is set to "1", and if the operation of the MAX bet switch is accepted, the number of possible inputs (current input When the number is ``0'', it is ``3'', when the current number of inputs is ``1'', it is ``2'', and when the current number of inputs is ``2'', it is ``1''. Set as the number of requests.

The set number of required insertions is transmitted to the game media number control board P16 as an insertion request command (also referred to as a bet request command). The command transmitted from the main control board P15 to the game medium number control board P16 consists of a first control command (1 byte) and a second control command (1 byte). and the second control command indicates data. For example, in the case of an input request command, the first control command is "20h" and the second control command is any value from "01h" to "03h". In other words, when the game media number control board P16 receives a command from the main control board P15, it can confirm from the first control command that it is an insertion request command, and from the second control command it can confirm the number of insertion requests. can be done.

After the main control board P15 has transmitted the insertion request command, if a command for the number of insertions is transmitted from the game media number control board P16, the main control board P15 adds one point to the bet number according to the number of insertion requests. . In addition, the 1st to 3rd bet lamps are sequentially turned on each time the number of bets is added by one point.

Further, when the main control board P15 transmits the insertion request command and then the game medium number control board P16 transmits the acceptance prohibition command, the insertion process is terminated. Here, when the game media count control board P16 transmits a non-acceptable command to the main control board P15, the value (total score) stored in the total score storage area which is the RAM area of the game media count control board P16 ) is less than the number of input requests. For example, when the number of insertion requests is "3" and the value stored in the total score storage area is less than "3", the game media number control board P16 transmits the acceptance prohibition command to the main control board P15. When the number of insertion requests is "2" and the value stored in the total score storage area is less than "2", the game media number control board P16 transmits an acceptance prohibition command to the main control board P15. Also, when the number of input requests is "1" and the value stored in the total score storage area is less than "1", the game media number control board P16 transmits an acceptance prohibition command to the main control board P15.

Here, the settlement processing executed by the main control board P15 will be described.

When the main control board P15 receives the operation of the settlement switch (when it judges that there is rising data of the settlement switch), it reads the number of bets inserted, and the number of bets inserted is "0". If the number of bets placed is "0", the settlement process is terminated. The lamp, the replay display lamp, the game executable lamp, and the game medium insertable lamp are turned off. In addition, since the settlement process cannot be executed during the replay, the settlement process is not executed even if the settlement switch is operated during the replay. In other words, the 1-bed lamp, 2-bed lamp, 3-bed lamp, game-executable lamp, and game medium-insert lamp, including the re-game display lamp, are not turned off even if the settlement switch is operated during the re-game.

After turning off the various lamps, set the settlement request command. As the value of the second control command of the settlement request command, the value of the register stored when reading the number of bets (also referred to as the settlement request number) at the time of execution of settlement processing is used. In other words, the number of settlement requests is any value from "01h" to "03h".

Next, the set settlement request command is transmitted to the game medium number control board P16.

After the main control board P15 has transmitted the settlement request command, when the game media number control board P16 transmits the settlement request command, the main control board P15 sends a command to start settlement processing to the sub control board P12. Clear the number of bets that have been placed, turn off the lit 1st to 3rd bet lamps, and send a command to finish the settlement process to the sub-control board P12. The sub control board P12 outputs a settlement sound to the speaker when a command to start the settlement process is transmitted from the main control board P15, and when a command to end the settlement process is transmitted from the main control board P15 Terminate the output of the settlement tone output to the speaker.

Further, if the main control board P15 transmits the settlement request command, and then the game media number control board P16 transmits a non-acceptable command, the settlement process is terminated. Here, in the case where the game media count control board P16 transmits a non-acceptable command to the main control board P15, the value stored in the total score storage area, which is the RAM area of the game media count control board P16, exceeds the upper limit (16383). For example, when the number of settlement requests is "3" and the value stored in the total score storage area is "16381" to "16383", the game media number control board P16 transmits a reception prohibition command to the main control board P15. do. When the number of settlement requests is "2" and the value stored in the total score storage area is "16382" or "16383", the game media number control board P16 transmits a reception prohibition command to the main control board P15. Further, when the number of settlement requests is "1" and the value stored in the total score storage area is "16383", the game media number control board P16 transmits a reception prohibition command to the main control board P15. In this way, in a situation where settlement cannot be made even if the settlement switch is operated, at least the value (score) stored in the total score storage area, which is a RAM area, of the game medium number control board P16 is reduced by operating the counting switch. A part is sent to the lending unit, and after that, the value obtained by adding the number of settlement requests to the value stored in the total score storage area, which is the RAM area of the game media number control board P16, exceeds the upper limit (16383). If the settlement switch is operated after that, settlement processing becomes possible.

Subsequently, when a game-enabled entry point has been turned on, it is confirmed whether or not the start switch has been operated (confirmed whether or not the rise signal of the start switch has been detected). If no playable insertion points have been inserted, the game is on standby.

Subsequently, as a result of confirming whether or not the start switch has been operated, if it is determined that the start switch has been operated, the setting change disabled state is set, and if it is determined that the start switch has not been operated, the game waits become medium.

Subsequently, after setting the setting change disabled state, the internal lottery process is executed. In the internal lottery process, small wins, replays (also referred to as replays), BB, RB, loss, etc. are determined by lottery.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the minimum game time (the time required to guarantee 4.1 seconds or more from the start of the reel rotation of a certain game to the start of the reel rotation of the next game) has elapsed, and the minimum game time is determined. If it is determined that the minimum game time has elapsed, the reel rotation start processing is executed, and if it is determined that the minimum game time has not elapsed, the minimum game time determination processing is looped until the minimum game time has elapsed.

Subsequently, in the drum rotation start process, the process for rotating all the drums is executed, and the production of the number of frames to be shifted data is started until the operation of the stop switch can be accepted.

Next, it is determined whether the stop switch operation can be accepted.If the stop switch operation can be accepted, it is confirmed whether the stop switch has been operated (whether the start signal of the stop switch has been detected). check). If it is not possible to accept the operation of the stop switch, the process returns to the creation of the number of frames to be shifted data.

Subsequently, as a result of confirming whether or not the stop switch has been operated, if it is determined that the stop switch has been operated, the stop position is determined from the stop acceptance position and the number of slewing frames. If it is determined that the stop switch has not been operated, the process returns to the step of creating the shift frame number data.

Subsequently, when the stop position is determined, it is determined whether or not all the reels (three reels in this embodiment) have stopped, and when it is determined that all the reels have stopped, display determination processing is performed. If it is determined that all the reels have not stopped, the process returns to the step of creating the shift frame number data.

Subsequently, after executing the display determination process, the payout process is executed.

In the payout process, it is determined whether or not the re-game operation pattern has stopped, and when it is determined that the re-game operation pattern has stopped, the number of insertions at the start of the game is stored as automatic insertion number data, and the re-game operation pattern is stopped. If it is determined that the payout time has not passed, it is determined whether the value of the score giving timer is not "0", and if the value of the score giving timer is not "0", the score is scored. Waits until the value of the awarding timer becomes "0", and if the value of the scoring timer is "0", the value of the scoring timer is "27", which indicates the payout time for one awarding point ( 60.35 ms) is stored, a payout request command is set.

After the main control board P15 has transmitted the payout request command, if the payout request command is sent from the game media count control board P16, the main control board P15 will send the acquired number data indicating the acquired number (at the start of payout, " 0” is stored) is incremented, and the score giving data indicating the number of payouts (at the start of payout, the number of payouts corresponding to winning symbols is stored) is decremented. Then, if the value of the score giving data is not 0, the process of judging whether the value of the score giving timer is not "0" is repeated until the value of the score giving data becomes 0 again. The obtained number data is data for displaying the obtained number on the given number display section.

In addition, when the main control board P15 transmits the payout request command and then the game medium number control board P16 transmits the unacceptable command, the value of the score giving timer is set to determine whether or not the payout time has elapsed. is not "0". Here, when the game media count control board P16 transmits the unacceptable command to the main control board P15, the value stored in the total score storage area which is the RAM area of the game media count control board P16 is "1". exceeds the upper limit (16383).

As a specific example, when the total score is 16381 and the payout process for 8 points is to be executed, first the score timer is set to "27" and then 1 point is given. Assume that after 35 ms have elapsed, the score award timer is set to "27" again and 1 point is assigned to reach 16383 (upper limit). After the total score reaches 16383, it is judged whether or not the value of the score giving timer is "0" in order to judge whether or not the payout time has elapsed without adding one point to the total score. return. When the total score is 16383, the process of adding 1 point is not executed until the counting switch is operated. However, since the interrupt process is continuously executed, the value of the score giving timer is decremented for each interrupt process. go. Then, when the value of the score giving timer becomes "0" without the counting switch being operated (when 60.35 ms elapses), the score giving timer is set to "27" again. After that, the value of the point imparting timer is decremented when the counting switch is operated and the payout becomes possible, and when the value of the point imparting timer is judged not to be "0", the processing of imparting one point can be executed.

In this way, even when the total score reaches the upper limit during the score giving process, the value of the score giving timer is updated, and one point is given when the count switch is operated and one point can be given. There is a high possibility that the time until 1 point can be given earlier than the time from immediately after giving 1 point to giving 1 point. In other words, 60.35 ms must elapse in order to give 1 point again after giving 1 point under normal conditions. Since the time from the operation of the counter switch to the awarding of 1 point again is 60.35 ms or less, the possibility of awarding 1 point quickly increases, and the possibility of starting the game quickly after the upper limit is lifted. It's getting higher.

Subsequently, the operation state management processing of the replay, the accessory and the accessory continuous operating device is executed. Execution of the operating state management process ends one game, and returns to the beginning of the game progress main process (setting changeable state set process).

In addition, when it is determined that the start switch has been operated, the setting change disabled state is set so that the setting cannot be changed in the setting change disabled state. However, the configuration may be such that the setting can be changed (even after the start switch is operated).

<Description of interval interrupt processing controlled by the main control board P15 applicable to the present embodiment>
In interval interrupt processing, register save processing is first executed. In the register saving process, the register value is stored in the stack area so as to be able to return to the game progress main process that was executed immediately before after the interrupt process is completed.

Subsequently, interrupt flag clear processing is executed. In the interrupt flag clear processing, the interrupt flag is cleared (turned off) to permit interrupt processing.

Then, power-off processing is executed. In the power-off process, if the power-off detection signal is ON, a power-off process, which will be described later, is executed, and if the power-off detection signal is OFF, the power-off process is terminated.

Subsequently, an interrupt counter update process is executed. In the interrupt counter update process, the counter is updated for each interrupt process.

Subsequently, main control command acquisition processing is executed. In the main control command acquisition process, a command is received from the game media number control board P16 and stored in the main control command buffer.

Subsequently, input port read processing is executed. Input port read processing reads an input port.

Subsequently, the reel drive management process is executed. In the spinning drum drive management process, the drive process corresponding to the state is executed for all the reels.

Subsequently, a game media count control command output process is executed. In the game medium number control command output process, a command is stored in the game medium number command buffer in order to transmit the command to the game medium number control board P16.

Subsequently, port output processing is executed. In port output processing, data is set in an output port and output.

Subsequently, timer measurement processing is executed. Timer measurement processing includes a condition device output timer, a payout count signal output timer, an overflow test signal timer, a reel stop reception waiting timer, a minimum game time management timer, a score giving timer, a setting change device operation start waiting timer, and a bonus operation start. Updates various timers such as the time waiting timer and the bonus operation end waiting timer.

Then, error management processing is executed. The error management process checks for setting value errors and built-in random number errors. The error management process is a process of calling a program outside the usage area, and the error check is executed by the program outside the usage area.

Subsequently, gaming machine information management processing (main control) is executed. In the gaming machine information management process (main control), the information on the gaming machine fraud 1 and gaming machine fraud 2 is updated.

Subsequently, sub control command transmission processing is executed. In the sub-control command transmission process, a command to be transmitted to the sub-control board is set.

Subsequently, LED display processing is executed. In the LED display process, a process of setting a 7-segment LED segment table to be displayed on the given number display unit, and the like are executed.

Subsequently, the sub notification data output process is executed. In the sub notification data output process, whether or not the stop switch and MAX bet switch can be effectively operated, whether the door is open or closed, etc. are transmitted to the sub control board.

Subsequently, game media number control notification processing is executed. In the game media number control notification process, the game media number control notification information is updated.

Subsequently, register restoration processing is executed. In the register restore process, the information saved in the stack by the register save process is restored.

Subsequently, interrupt permission processing is executed.

<Description of power-off processing controlled by the main control board P15 applicable to the present embodiment>
When the power supply of the game machine P is turned off, or when the power supply interruption detection signal is turned on due to an external factor such as a power failure, power supply interruption processing is executed. If the power-off detection signal is not ON, the power-off process is terminated. When the voltage falls below a predetermined value, a power failure detection signal is input to a predetermined input port, and when a power failure detection signal is input to a predetermined input port twice consecutively in interrupt processing, it is determined that the power has been shut off. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the voltage falls below a predetermined value even once, an external interrupt occurs and the power failure detection signal is turned ON. may be configured.

When it is determined that the power failure detection signal is ON, the output ports (0 to 6) are turned OFF.

Subsequently, stack pointer save processing is executed.

Subsequently, a power-off processing completion flag and RWM checksum data setting processing are executed.

Subsequently, RWM write prohibition processing is executed.

Subsequently, it enters a state of waiting for a reset signal, and thereafter loops this state.

<Description of power-on processing, main loop processing, and power-off processing controlled by game media count control board P16 applicable to the present embodiment>
When the game machine is powered on, the function of the game medium number control chip is set. In the function setting of the game media number control chip, the initial setting of the built-in register is executed.

Subsequently, RWM initialization processing is executed. In the RWM initialization process, the power status flag is checked and the RWM checksum data is calculated. Also, the RWM area outside the use area is initialized by the program outside the use area.

Check the power status flag and calculate the RWM checksum data (checking the power status flag and calculating the RWM checksum data may be collectively referred to as determination of RWM abnormality), and if it is determined to be normal, Counting flag, gaming machine information notification timer A, gaming machine information notification timer B, gaming machine information notification timer C, serial number, counting serial number, counting points, cumulative counting points, lending serial number, lending point receipt result, MY counter for calculation , MY counter for output, main control chip ID, main control chip manufacturer code, main control chip product code, etc. are initialized (for example, 0 is stored in each storage area). Note that the initialization of various storage areas is performed regardless of whether the setting key switch is on or not. After the RWM initialization process, it is determined whether or not the total score clear switch is ON. If it is determined to be ON, the total score is initialized. Do not initialize the total score. With such a configuration, whether or not to clear the total score can be executed based on the operation of the total score clear switch, so that the total score can be prevented from being cleared carelessly.

The power status flag is checked and the RWM checksum data is calculated. If it is determined to be abnormal, the storage area (counting flag, game machine information notification timer A, game machine information notification timer B, game machine information notification timer C, serial number, counting serial number, counting points, cumulative counting points, lending serial number, lending point receipt result, MY counter for calculation, MY counter for output, main control chip ID, main control chip manufacturer code , main control chip product code, etc.), and also initializes the storage areas that store information on the total score and the role ratio monitor (for example, stores 0 in various storage areas). Note that the initialization of various storage areas is performed regardless of whether the setting key switch is on or not.

If it is judged normal as a result of checking the power supply status flag and calculating the RWM checksum data, it is judged whether or not the total score clear switch is ON. If it is determined that the result of executing the calculation is abnormal, it is not determined whether or not the total score clear switch is ON. This is because the total score is initialized by the initialization process that is executed when the results of checking the power supply status flag and calculating the RWM checksum data are determined to be abnormal. In other words, even if the total score clear switch is operated, the power status flag is checked and the RWM checksum data is calculated, and if an abnormality is determined, initialization is executed based on the operation of the total score clear switch. do not do. By configuring in this way, it is possible to avoid executing the initialization of the storage area storing the total score twice, and it is possible to shorten the processing time for the initialization processing.

Incidentally, as determination of an RWM abnormality, two of checking the power supply state flag and calculating the RWM checksum data are performed, but either one may be performed. Also, other checking methods may be used to determine the RWM abnormality.

In addition, as a result of checking the power supply status flag and calculating the RWM checksum data, if it is determined that there is an abnormality, RWM initialization processing at the time of power return abnormality (for example, all RWM areas of the second main control RAM (total score It may be determined whether or not the total score clear switch is ON after the initialization of (including the storage area storing the ) is executed. Then, it may be configured such that it is determined whether or not the total score clear switch is ON after executing the RWM initialization process at the time of power return failure.

According to such a configuration, when an abnormality is determined as a result of executing the check of the power status flag and the calculation of the RWM checksum data (when the result of checking the power status flag is determined to be abnormal, or when the RWM checksum data If the result of executing the data calculation is judged to be abnormal), after executing the RWM initialization process at the time of the power return abnormality, it is judged whether the total score clear switch is ON or not. If the clear switch is ON, the storage area storing the total score is also initialized again, and although the initialization ranges may overlap, the total score can be reliably initialized.

Also, a program outside the use area is called to turn on a test pattern display flag for displaying a test pattern on the role ratio monitor.

After that, interrupt processing is started. The interruption cycle of the game media number control board P16 in this actual mode is set to 1 ms.

Subsequently, a power failure detection process is executed to determine whether power failure has been detected. In the power-off detection processing, when power-off is detected, power-off processing is executed, and when power-off is not detected, interrupt processing is awaited.

When the power supply of the gaming machine P is turned off or the voltage drops below a predetermined value due to an external factor such as a power failure, a power failure detection signal is input to a predetermined input port. If a power failure detection signal is input to the input port of the power supply, it is determined to be power failure and the power failure detection signal is turned ON. In such a case, an external interrupt may be generated to turn ON the power-off detection signal.

Next, in the power-off processing when a power-off is detected in the power-off detection processing, if the power-on is normal, the power status flag is saved as normal, and if the power-on is abnormal, the power status flag is saved as abnormal. do.

Subsequently, RWM write prohibition processing is executed.

Subsequently, it enters a state of waiting for a reset signal, and thereafter loops this state.

<Description of Interval Interrupt Processing Controlled by Game Media Number Control Board P16 Applicable to this Embodiment>
Interval interrupt processing (also called timer interrupt processing or interrupt processing) controlled by the game media count control board P16 is executed every 1 ms. In interval interrupt processing, first, interrupt flag clear processing is executed. In the interrupt flag clear processing, the interrupt flag is cleared (turned off) to permit interrupt processing.

Subsequently, input port read processing is executed. In the input port reading process, input port 3 is read.

The input ports of the game medium number control board P16 are: game medium number control data signals 1 to 8 for input port 1; game medium number control data signals 9 to 16 for input port 2; A control data strobe signal, a power failure detection signal, a count button signal, a VL signal, and a medal count clear button signal can be input.

Input ports 1 and 2 are input ports used for parallel communication between the main control board P15 and the number-of-game-media control board P16, and the input ports are read when a command is received from the main control board P15. Input port 1 receives a command indicating the type of information, and input port 2 receives a command indicating information data.

The input port 3 is an input port used for serial communication with various switches, rental units, and the main control board P15, and the input port is read by the game media number control command reception process.

In the input port reading process, rising edge data of input port 3 is created from the previous level data of input port 3 and the current level data of input port 3 .

Next, when the bit data to which the power failure detection signal of the input port 3 is input is 1, 1 is added to the value of the power failure check counter. Then, the value of the power interruption check counter is checked, and if the value of the power interruption check counter is 7, it is determined that the power interruption has been detected, and 1 is stored in the power interruption detection flag. ON).

Next, the VL signal is checked in order to confirm the connection abnormality with the lending unit. First, the VL abnormality flag is set to 0 (the VL abnormality flag is cleared). When the bit data to which the VL signal of the input port 3 is input is 0, FFh is stored in the VL abnormality flag (1 is subtracted from the value of the VL abnormality flag and stored). If the bit data to which the VL signal of the input port 3 is input is 1, it is normal, so the following processing is executed.

Next, the processing for managing the pressing time of the counting switch (hereinafter also referred to as counting execution flag setting processing) will be described with reference to FIG.

Note that the counting execution flag setting process is performed when the player operates (presses) the counting switch, or when the player releases (does not press) the counting switch. This is processing for setting a flag indicating whether a short-pressing operation has been accepted or whether a long-pressing operation has been accepted as an operation of the counting switch.

First, "count switch ON?" determines whether or not the count switch is operated. As a method for determining whether or not the counting switch is operated, as described above, before executing the counting execution flag setting process, the counting switch input to the input port 3 in the interrupt process of the game medium number control board P16 is checked. input data (ON or OFF) is stored in a storage area (also referred to as an input port 3 level data storage area) in the RWM area of the game media number control board P16, and the counter switch stored in the storage area is a value indicating ON, it can be determined as YES, and if the input data of the counter switch stored in the storage area is a value indicating OFF, it can be determined as NO.

"Count execution timer = 0?" determines whether the timer value measuring the time during which the count switch is operated is "0". As a method for measuring the time during which the counting switch is operated, for example, the RWM area of the game medium number control board P16 has a counting execution timer storage area (_TM_CAL_ACT) for measuring the time during which the counting switch is operated. , if the value stored in the storage area is "0", it is determined as YES, and if the value stored in the storage area is a value other than "0" (for example, "200" or "500") If there is, it can be determined as NO. Note that the counting execution timer storage area is a storage area capable of storing 2-byte data (0 to 65535) so that values from "0" to "500" can be stored.

“Count execution flag ≠ 0?” determines whether or not the count execution flag is “0”. Here, the counting execution flag is a flag for managing whether a short-pressing operation is accepted as the operation of the counting switch or a long-pressing operation is accepted as the operation of the counting switch. For example, a counting execution flag storage area (_FL_CAL_ACT) for managing the counting execution flag is provided, and when the counting execution flag storage area is "0" (when the counting execution flag is 0), it is still possible to operate the counting switch. Indicates a situation in which it is not determined whether a short-press operation has been accepted or a long-press operation has been accepted as an operation of the counting switch, and the counting execution flag storage area is "1" (the counting execution flag is 1) indicates a situation in which it is determined that a short-press operation has been accepted as the operation of the counting switch. A situation is shown in which it is determined that a long press operation has been accepted as the operation of the counting switch.

Therefore, "counting execution flag ≠ 0?" is determined to be YES, and if "0" is stored in the counting execution flag storage area, it is determined to be NO.

The "save count execution flag=1" is a process of saving "1" in the count execution flag storage area. In other words, this is a process of determining that a short press operation has been received as the operation of the counting switch. For example, if the count switch is not operated, the count execution timer storage area is "200", and "0" is stored in the count execution flag storage area, "1" is stored in the count execution flag storage area. .

'Clear counting execution timer' is a process for resetting the counting execution timer storage area to an initial value (for example, '0'). As is clear from FIG. 39, "counting execution timer clear" is executed when the counting switch is not operated, and not only when "1" is stored in the counting execution flag storage area, but also when "1" is stored in the counting execution flag storage area. Even if "1" is not stored (for example, "1" or "2" is already stored in the counting execution flag storage area), it is executed. In other words, if the counting switch is not operated, the counting execution timer storage area is set to the initial value, and if the counting switch is operated again after that, the value of the counting execution timer storage area is changed from the initial value to the value of the counting execution timer storage area. is configured so that it can be updated.

"Counting execution timer ≥ 500" determines whether or not the timer value measuring the time during which the counting switch is operated is "500" or more (the time during which the counting switch is operated is 500 ms or more). For example, if the value of the counting execution timer storage area is "500", it is determined to be YES, and if the value of the counting execution timer storage area is less than "500" (specifically, the value of the counting execution timer storage area When the value is "0" to "499"), it is judged as NO.

"Count execution timer +1" is a process of adding "1" to the timer value that measures the time during which the counting switch is operated (updates the time during which the counting switch is operated). As is clear from FIG. 39, when "count execution timer≧500" is YES, "count execution timer +1" is not executed. In other words, after the value of the counting execution timer storage area becomes "500", the value of the counting execution timer storage area is maintained at "500", so the value of the counting execution timer storage area is set to "0 to 500". can be accommodated. That is, since the count switch operation time does not exceed 500 ms (the value in the count execution timer storage area is greater than 500), the value stored in the count execution timer storage area does not overflow. is configured as With this configuration, for example, when the maximum value that can be stored in the counting execution timer storage area is "65535", the "counting execution timer + 1" is executed, so that the counting execution timer storage area When the value becomes "0" and the counting switch continues to be operated thereafter, the value in the counting execution timer storage area is updated, and the counting switch is released when the value in the counting execution timer storage area is less than "500". In this case, it is possible to prevent "1" from being stored in the counting execution flag storage area (ie, it is determined that the short-pressing operation has been accepted as the operation of the counting switch).

'Save count execution timer' is a process of saving the value updated by 'count execution timer + 1' in the count execution timer storage area. For example, when the value of the count execution timer storage area is "0", the value of the count execution timer storage area is "1", and when the value of the count execution timer storage area is "499", the count The value of the execution timer storage area becomes "500".

The "save count execution flag=2" is a process of saving "2" in the count execution flag storage area. In other words, this is a process of determining that a long press operation has been accepted as the operation of the counting switch. Specifically, when it is determined that the timer value measuring the time during which the counting switch is operated is "500" or more (the time during which the counting switch is operated is 500 ms or more), the counting execution flag storage area store "2" in

As described above, the counting execution flag setting process determines whether a short press operation is accepted as an operation of the counting switch or a long press operation is accepted as an operation of the counting switch. Processing to measure the operation time is performed.

Subsequently, game media count control command reception processing is executed. In the game media number control command reception processing, reception processing of commands from the lending unit and the main control board P15 is executed. When a gaming machine fraudulent command is received from a rental unit, a program outside the use area is called to accumulate and store fraudulent information.

Also, when a role product operating state command is received from the main control board P15, a program outside the use area is called to save the role product operating state.

Also, when a ratio display command is received from the main control board P15, a program outside the use area is called to save the role ratio monitor type number.

Also, when a start lever reception command is received from the main control board P15, the program in the use area stores the entry point information used in the game information of hall control/fraud monitoring information in the data area (_WK_MDL_IN) of the use area. Then, the entry point information for calling the program outside the use area and displaying it on the role ratio monitor is stored in the data area (_SN_MDL_IN) outside the use area. In addition, the entry point information used in hall control/fraud monitoring information is "3" (if the entry point of the previous game is 3 points, the entry point of the previous game is is 2 points) is stored, and the entry point information for displaying on the role ratio monitor is stored as "0" when the replay operation is performed (replay winning in the previous game).

Further, when a command to stop all reels is received from the main control board P15, the program in the use area stores the point information used in the game information of hall control/fraud monitoring information in the data area (_WK_MDL_OUT) of the use area. In addition, the assigned point information for calling the program outside the use area and displaying it on the role ratio monitor is stored in the data area (_SN_MDL_OUT) outside the use area. In addition, the given point information used in hall control/fraud monitoring information is "3" (if the previous game gave 3 points. is 2 points) is stored, and the assigned point information for displaying on the role ratio monitor is stored as "0" at the time of replay operation (replay winning in the previous game).

It should be noted that (_SN_MDL_OUT), which is a data area outside the use area for giving point information to be displayed on the role ratio monitor, includes the cumulative instructed role ratio, the continuous role ratio between the latest 6000 games, the latest 6000 This information is necessary for determining the character ratio between games, the total continuous character ratio, and the total character ratio. For example, a storage area capable of storing the cumulative number of given points, a storage area capable of storing the cumulative number of awards given when activating a role, and a storage area capable of storing the cumulative number of awards given when activating a role. By adding the information stored in (_SN_MDL_OUT), a storage area capable of storing the total number of rewards, a storage area capable of storing the total number of rewards given when activating a role, and a memory area capable of storing the total number of rewards given when activating a role. It becomes possible to update the storage area that can store the number.

Also, when Bit 3 of game machine fraud 2 is "1" when a command to stop all reels is received from the main control board P15 (the total score is cleared by operating the total score clear switch when the power is turned on) If the total score clear status is ON), a program outside the use area is called to set (clear) Bit 3 of gaming machine fraud 2 to "0".

Further, when a command to stop all reels is received from the main control board P15, calculations for game performance information and role ratio monitoring are executed.

Also, when receiving an input request command from the main control board P15, it determines whether the value of the second control command is "0", and if it determines that it is "0", it performs an abnormal command reception process. If it is determined not to be "0", it is determined whether or not it exceeds "3" ("4" or more). If it is determined that the value of the second control command exceeds "3", the abnormal command reception process is executed, and if it is determined that it does not exceed "3" (below "3"), the VL abnormality flag is not "0". or not. If it is determined that the VL abnormality flag is "0", the acceptance rejection set process is executed, and if it is determined that the VL abnormality flag is not "0", the result of subtracting the number of input requests from the total score is a negative value. It is determined whether or not there is (whether the carry flag is 1 or not). If the result of subtracting the number of input requests from the total score is determined to be a negative value, the reception rejection set process is executed. If the result of subtracting the number of input requests from the total score is determined to be A value obtained by subtracting the number of input requests from the score is stored as the total score. Then, after storing the number of input requests in the input point storage area for transmitting hall control/fraud monitoring information, a command to be transmitted to the main control board P15 is set. The acceptance rejection set process is a process of setting a value indicating an abnormality as the data of the second control command to be transmitted to the main control board P15 (for example, setting the most significant bit of the processing to set). In addition, the abnormal command reception processing includes a value indicating communication abnormality (eg, FFh) as the type of the first control command to be transmitted to the main control board P15, and a value indicating abnormality (eg, FFh) as the data of the second control command. ) is set. After setting the command, the command is transmitted to the main control board P15 at any time.

Further, when receiving the settlement request command from the main control board P15, it determines whether or not the value of the second control command is "0". If it is determined not to be "0", it is determined whether or not it exceeds "3" ("4" or more). If it is determined that the value of the second control command exceeds "3", the abnormal command reception process is executed, and if it is determined that it does not exceed "3" (below "3"), the VL abnormality flag is not "0". or not. If it is determined that the VL abnormality flag is "0", the reception rejection set process is executed, and if it is determined that the VL abnormality flag is not "0", the value obtained by adding the number of settlements to the current total score is the total score upper limit. Determine whether or not it exceeds the value (16383), and if it is determined that the value obtained by adding the number of settlements to the current total score exceeds the total score upper limit, execute the reception rejection set process and settle the current total score If it is determined that the value obtained by adding the number does not exceed the total score upper limit, the value obtained by adding the settlement number to the current total score is stored as the total score. Then, after storing the value obtained by subtracting the number of settlement requests from the value in the input point storage area for transmitting hall controller/fraud monitoring information, a command to be transmitted to the main control board P15 is set. Note that the acceptance rejection set process is a process of setting a value indicating an abnormality as the data of the second control command to be transmitted to the main control board P15 (for example, setting the most significant bit of the processing to set). In addition, the abnormal command reception processing includes a value indicating communication abnormality (eg, FFh) as the type of the first control command to be transmitted to the main control board P15, and a value indicating abnormality (eg, FFh) as the data of the second control command. ) is set. After setting the command, the command is transmitted to the main control board P15 at any time.

Also, when receiving a payout request command from the main control board P15, it determines whether the value of the second control command is not "1", and if it is determined not to be "1", it executes an abnormal command reception process. , is "1", it is determined whether or not the VL abnormality flag is not "0". If it is determined that the VL anomaly flag is "0", the reception rejection setting process is executed, and if it is determined that the VL anomaly flag is not "0", it is determined whether or not the total score is the upper limit value. When it is determined that the total score is the upper limit value, reception rejection set processing is executed, and when it is determined that the total score is not the upper limit value, a value obtained by adding "1" to the current total score is stored as the total score. Then, after updating the value of the assigned point storage area for transmitting hall control/fraud monitoring information, a command to be transmitted to the main control board P15 is set. The acceptance rejection set process is a process of setting a value indicating an abnormality as the data of the second control command to be transmitted to the main control board P15 (for example, setting the highest bit of the received payout request number data to "1" processing to set). In addition, the abnormal command reception processing includes a value indicating communication abnormality (eg, FFh) as the type of the first control command to be transmitted to the main control board P15, and a value indicating abnormality (eg, FFh) as the data of the second control command. ) is set. After setting the command, it is transmitted to the main control board P15 at any time.

Subsequently, a lending notification reception process is executed. In the lending notice reception process, a process of receiving a lending notice from the lending unit is executed.

Subsequently, timer management processing is executed. In the timer management process, a program outside the use area is called to update the rental notification reception timer 1 and the rental notification reception timer 2. FIG. A rental notice reception timer 1 and a rental notice reception timer 2 are used to determine a communication abnormality.

Subsequently, gaming machine information management processing (game media count control) is executed. In the game machine information management process (game medium number control), processes such as updating the game machine information notification timer A, the game machine information notification timer B, and/or the game machine information notification timer C are executed. As a result of updating the game machine information notification timer A, the game machine information notification timer B, and/or the game machine information notification timer C, the notification timing of hall controller/fraud monitoring information, game machine installation information, or game machine performance information has come. If so, the gaming machine information at the notification timing is transmitted to the lending unit. In addition, a check for rental device communication error 7 is performed by calling a program outside the use area.

Subsequently, counting control processing is executed. In the counting control process, the counting process is executed according to the operation status of the counting switch.

Subsequently, lending control processing is executed. In the lending control process, the lending process is executed according to the operation status of the lending switch of the lending unit. Also, a program outside the use area is called, and flags for rental device communication errors 1 to 6 are set according to the communication state.

Subsequently, state control processing is executed. In the state control processing, it is determined whether or not the VL abnormality flag, which is set when the VL signal is OFF, is ON, and whether or not the serial number abnormality flag, which is set when the serial numbers are not continuous, is ON. judgment processing of whether or not is executed. In other words, the VL abnormality flag is turned ON when the gaming machine P and the lending unit are not connected.

Subsequently, LED display processing is executed. In the LED display process, display control of the game medium number display portion P9 is executed.

Subsequently, ratio control processing is executed. In the ratio control process, a program outside the use area is called to update various counters for calculating the display contents of the role ratio monitor, and the display process of the role ratio monitor is executed.

Subsequently, interrupt permission processing is executed.

<Description of how each board cooperates when power is turned off and when power is turned on, applicable to this embodiment>
In the game according to the present embodiment, when a power cut occurs, the main control board P15 determines whether or not the power is cut by two interrupts, and the game medium number control board P16 determines whether or not the power is cut by seven interrupts. to judge. In other words, the main control board P15 judges that the power is turned off 4.47 ms (2.235 ms×2 times) after the voltage falls below the predetermined value, and the game media number control board P16 determines 7 ms after the voltage falls below the predetermined value. After (1 ms x 7 times), it is determined that the power is turned off.

Therefore, when the power is cut off, the main control board P15 can execute the power cut-off processing before the game medium number control board P16. The board P16 can receive commands from the main control board P15.

When the power is turned on, the main control board P15 activates the user mode after activating the security mode for a predetermined period (for example, 2883.54 ms), and the game media count control board P16 activates the user mode without activating the security mode. to start. The user mode is a mode for executing a game-related program, and the main control board P15 and the game medium number control board P16 first execute power-on processing.

Therefore, since the game media count control board P16 can be activated before the main control board P15 when the power is turned on, the game media count control board P16 can receive a command from the main control board P15.

Also, if the configuration is such that the power-off process is executed by an external interrupt after the power-off is detected, the power-off process will be executed even in a situation where the voltage drops to a predetermined value for only a moment (so-called momentary power failure). be done. In this case, since the WDT (watchdog timer) set at the time of power-off processing is not cleared after executing the power-off processing, a reset signal is output, and the main control board P15 keeps the security mode for a predetermined period (for example, 2883. 54 ms) Power-on processing is executed after starting, and power-on processing is executed without activating the security mode of the game media count control board P16. As a result, even if power-off processing is executed due to an instantaneous interruption, the game media count control board P16 can be activated before the main control board P15. can receive commands from

<Description of Game Features Using Advantageous Sections Applicable to the Present Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the prescribed number for starting the game is only three. In other words, the game cannot be started with anything other than the 3-coin stake, and the game can be started with only the 3-coin stake even when the bonus is activated.

In this embodiment, the effective line consists of one line consisting of the lower stage of the left reel P18L, the middle stage of the middle reel P18C, and the lower stage of the right reel P18R. Hereinafter, stopping the symbol combination on the active line is simply referred to as "stopping the symbol combination".

In this embodiment, there are ten kinds of patterns. They are called Red Seven, Blue Seven, Bar, Gold Bar, Blank, Cherry, Watermelon, Bell A, Bell B, and Replay, respectively. It should be noted that the names of the symbols and the types of the symbols are only examples, and there is no problem even if they are changed.

The reel arrangement of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 4, the number of symbols in one reel is 20, and the first reel (left reel P18L), the second reel (middle reel P18C), and the third reel (right reel P18R) are provided. there is

The symbol combinations in this embodiment are shown in FIGS. In the figure, the item "winning symbol/operating symbol/pattern symbol name" indicates the name of the condition device corresponding to the symbol combination. In addition, the "specified number and game state" shows the privilege to be given when the combination of symbols for each specified number is stopped. If "Specified number and game state" is described as "1 type BB", it means that 1 type BB is awarded when the symbol combination stops, and if it is described as "Replay" indicates that replay will be given when the symbol combination is stopped, and if a number is indicated, it indicates the number of payouts when the symbol combination is stopped, and if it is indicated as "-", it is applicable It shows that the symbol combination does not stop in the game state.

In this embodiment, the bonus is provided with one kind of BB, and the end condition is the provision of game media exceeding 11 points. In addition, this type 1 BB is a type in which the RB operates continuously, and the RB ends when either one of two wins or two games is satisfied. The specification is such that RB is automatically activated until the condition is met (given more than 11 points of game media).

As shown in FIG. 5, there are eight types of 1-type BB symbol combinations, and the drawing rate of the 1-type BB symbol combination on each reel (probability of stopping the symbols related to the symbol combination) is not 100%. In order to display the symbol combination of 1 type BB, it is necessary to press each reel.

In this embodiment, the RT transition starts from non-RT (also called 1 type BB non-inside), and if 1 type BB wins during non-RT and the 1 type BB symbol combination does not stop, the next game ( When the 1st BB symbol combination stops during RT1, RT1 ends and the 1st BB operates from the next game (1 BB (also referred to as middle), and when the operation of the type 1 BB is completed, the next game is shifted to non-RT. Also, since the setting change starts from non-RT, if the setting change device is activated during RT1 or type 1 BB operation, non-RT is set when the operation of the setting change device is completed. Since the RT state and the type 1 BB operating state are not cleared when the power is turned off without the setting change device operating (sometimes referred to as a normal power cut), when the power is restored, the state before the power cut is resumed. Specifically, when the power is cut off during the 1st type BB and then the power is restored, the 1st type BB operating state is during the 1st type BB, and the power is cut off in the state of RT1, and then the power is restored. If it does, the RT state is configured to be RT1.

Here, RT is an abbreviation for replay time, and is a state in which the probability of winning a replay can be varied for each of a plurality of RTs. For example, it is possible to make the replay winning probability of RT1 and the replay winning probability of RT2 different. Also, differentiating the winning probabilities of replays may mean that the winning probabilities of the replays as a whole may be different, or only the winning probabilities of a certain replay may be different and the winning probabilities of the replays as a whole may not differ. The timing for transitioning to RT can be set by stopping a predetermined combination of symbols, by winning a bonus (by activating a bonus condition device), by completing a predetermined number of games after the end of the bonus, etc. They can be combined as appropriate.

A condition device in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The item of "winning replay" in FIG. 10 describes numbers corresponding to winning numbers. In addition, the conditional device to be activated is described in the item of "conditional device". In addition, in the "common name" item, a simple name of the operating condition device is described. For example, the common name corresponding to the replay-H condition device is "right push: strong-battle eye", and it is shown that the strong battle eye stops when the right reel P18R is stopped for the first time, and the winning-A1 condition device The common name corresponding to is "push order bell A group 123", and the operation mode of the left reel P18L first stop, the middle reel P18C second stop, and the right reel P18R third stop is the correct operation mode (in this case, winning 52 ( It is shown that the operation mode is an operation mode in which the symbol combination of (winning) with a larger number of payouts than the winning (01-02, 09, 29-31) is stopped. In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to the condition device is shown in the item of "component". For example, it is indicated that replay 01 or replay 02 can be displayed when the replay-A condition device operates (wins). It should be noted that "0" in the item "winning replay" corresponds to losing.

The internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means in the non-internal 1 type BB in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 13. FIG. The internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means during non-1 type BB are 1 type BB, replay -A, replay -B, replay -C (+1 type BB), replay -D (+1 type BB), replay-E (+1 type BB), replay-F (+1 type BB), replay-G (+1 type BB), replay-H (+1 type BB), replay-I (+1 type BB), Replay-J (+1 type BB), Win-A1, Win-A2, Win-A3, Win-A4, Win-A5, Win-A6, Win-B1, Win-B2, Win-B3, Win -B4, Prize-B5, Prize-B6, Prize-C1, Prize-C2, Prize-C3, Prize-C4, Prize-C5, Prize-C6, Prize-D (+1 type BB), Prize-E (+1 type) BB), Prize-F (+1 type BB), Prize-G (+1 type BB), Prize-H (+1 type BB), Prize-I (+1 type BB), Prize-J (+1 type BB), Prize- Any of K (+1 kind BB) and there is no outlier.

Note that the above description of "replay-C (+1 type BB)" indicates that replay-C and 1 type BB are won simultaneously, and in FIGS. 11, 12 and 13, "bonus conditions This corresponds to the fact that the names are described in both "device" and "winning replay". 11, 12, and 13, the item "internal lottery" indicates whether or not the internal lottery is applicable for each game state. Indicates that it is not covered. 11, 12, and 13 indicates whether or not the advantageous zone transition lottery is executed for each game state. , "x" indicates that the advantageous section transition lottery is not executed. In this embodiment, when the advantageous section transition lottery is executed, a 100% win is made and the advantageous section transition is made. 11, 12, and 13, the items "R1" to "R6" indicate setting 1 to setting 6, respectively, and indicate the winning numbers of the internal lottery corresponding to the set values. 65536 numbers are assigned to each state.

In this embodiment, the internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means inside the 1 type BB are replay-A, replay-B, replay-C, replay-D, replay-E, and replay. -F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Win-A1, Win-A2, Win-A3, Win-A4, Win-A5, Win-A6, Win-B1 , Prize-B2, Prize-B3, Prize-B4, Prize-B5, Prize-B6, Prize-C1, Prize-C2, Prize-C3, Prize-C4, Prize-C5, Prize-C6, Prize-D, Prize -E, Prize-F, Prize-G, Prize-H, Prize-I, Prize-J, Prize-K, and there is no exception.

In the present embodiment, the internal lottery result that can be determined by the internal lottery means in the 1 type BB is any of win-K, win-L, and lose.

In this embodiment, the conditions for shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section are replay-C, replay-D, replay-E, replay-F, replay-G, replay-H, and replay-I. , Replay-J, Win-A1, Win-A2, Win-A3, Win-A4, Win-A5, Win-A6, Win-B1, Win-B2, Win-B3, Win-B4, Win-B5, Prize-B6, Prize-C1, Prize-C2, Prize-C3, Prize-C4, Prize-C5, Prize-C6, Prize-D, Prize-E, Prize-F, Prize-G, Prize-H, Prize- Any one of I, Prize-J, and Prize-K wins, and replay-A and replay-B wins do not shift to the advantageous section. That is, in the normal section, replay-C, replay-D, replay-E, replay-F, replay-G, replay-H, replay-I, replay-J, winning-A1, Prize-A2, Prize-A3, Prize-A4, Prize-A5, Prize-A6, Prize-B1, Prize-B2, Prize-B3, Prize-B4, Prize-B5, Prize-B6, Prize-C1, Prize- C2, Prize-C3, Prize-C4, Prize-C5, Prize-C6, Prize-D, Prize-E, Prize-F, Prize-G, Prize-H, Prize-I, Prize-J, Prize-K If any one of them wins, it becomes an advantageous section from the next game.

In this embodiment, replay-C, replay-D, replay-E, replay-F, replay-G, replay-H, replay-I, replay-J, winning during the normal section -A1, Prize-A2, Prize-A3, Prize-A4, Prize-A5, Prize-A6, Prize-B1, Prize-B2, Prize-B3, Prize-B4, Prize-B5, Prize-B6, Prize-C1 , Prize-C2, Prize-C3, Prize-C4, Prize-C5, Prize-C6, Prize-D, Prize-E, Prize-F, Prize-G, Prize-H, Prize-I, Prize-J, Prize If any of -K wins, it will always shift to the advantageous section. That is, in the normal section, replay-C, replay-D, replay-E, replay-F, replay-G, replay-H, replay-I, replay-J, winning-A1, Prize-A2, Prize-A3, Prize-A4, Prize-A5, Prize-A6, Prize-B1, Prize-B2, Prize-B3, Prize-B4, Prize-B5, Prize-B6, Prize-C1, Prize- C2, Prize-C3, Prize-C4, Prize-C5, Prize-C6, Prize-D, Prize-E, Prize-F, Prize-G, Prize-H, Prize-I, Prize-J, Prize-K If any one of them wins, it becomes an advantageous section from the next game.

In this embodiment, in RT1 (inside 1 type BB), there is no deviation (either the replay role or the winning role will always win), so once it shifts to RT1, the pressing order bell group C (winning - C1 ~C6) It is possible to stop the BB symbol combination in some operation modes at the time of winning. The part of the pressing order bell C group winning is, for example, a partial spot pressing position of the middle reel P18C or the first stop of the right reel P18R at the time of winning-C1 winning. In addition, when winning-C1 wins in the advantageous section, the correct pressing order (in this case, "1, 2, 3") is displayed on the image display device), the winning 38 is stopped and the BB pattern combination does not stop. With such a configuration, the user can maintain RT1 by notifying the user of the operation mode in which the BB symbol combination does not stop. In addition, by setting the number of winnings during RT1 to 4 (because the design minimum winning probability is 1/17500 or more), and by constructing so that the BB symbol combination does not stop in other replay combinations and winning combinations. , the BB symbol combination may be stopped only when the combination is lost. "1, 2, 3" displayed on the image display device indicates that "1" corresponds to the left stop switch P4L, and "2" corresponds to the middle stop switch P4C. "3" indicates that it corresponds to the right stop switch P4R, and "1, 2, 3" displayed on the image display means the left stop switch P4L for the first stop and the middle stop switch P4C for the first stop. 2nd stop, 3rd stop of the right stop switch P4R is the correct order of pressing.

In this embodiment, as the game state (also referred to as main game state) managed by the main control means in the advantageous section, the advantageous section general state (also referred to as normal state), the chance zone (also referred to as CZ), and the state of AT are provided. , and transitions from the advantageous zone general state to CZ, from CZ to AT, from AT to the advantageous zone general state, or to CZ, respectively. In addition, the game state managed by the main control means in the normal section is only the normal section general state, and the game state does not transition until the transition to the advantageous section. In addition, in the advantageous section general state and the normal section general state, the flag related to the game state to be managed by the main control means may be in the same state or in a different state.

The normal state is a state in which an advantageous winning pushing order is not reported when any one of winning-A1 to winning-C6 is won as a result of the internal lottery.

CZ is a state that shifts when winning any of the winning-D to winning-H as an internal lottery result in the normal state, and during CZ, AT depending on the result of the internal lottery during CZ and the lottery at the start of CZ Perform a lottery to move to.

AT is a state that shifts when AT lottery in CZ is won, and is a state in which an advantageous operation mode (winning order) is notified when winning any one of prize-A1 to prize-C6.

In this embodiment, the conditions for always shifting from the advantageous section to the normal section are set when the number of games played in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1500 times) and when MY in the advantageous section exceeds 2400. When the initialization process based on the change is performed, the RAM clear switch becomes effective, and the end condition of AT does not match the end condition of the advantageous section. However, some of the AT end conditions (for example, in the specification that the end condition is that the game has been played 300 times after entering the AT, the number of games played is 300 times (in this case, the effect that the AT will end or when the number of obtained coins reaches a predetermined number (for example, 2300) or more) may be set as conditions for ending the advantageous section. Also, when you hit CZ in the advantageous section, you may shift to the normal section. In this case, it is determined whether or not to end the advantageous section according to the situation of the advantageous section when the CZ is hit in the advantageous section.

A method of calculating MY in an advantageous section will be described. The main control board P15 has an advantageous section MY counter as a storage area. The advantageous interval MY counter is set to "0" as an initial value at the timing of shifting to the advantageous interval, increases or decreases according to the game result, and terminates the advantageous interval when the value of the advantageous interval MY counter exceeds 2400. .

The advantageous interval MY counter is an increment counter, and in the gaming machine when the value of the advantageous interval MY counter is "0", when the input point is "3" and the awarded point is "10", the advantageous interval The value of the MY counter becomes "10-3" and becomes "7".

In addition, since the advantageous section MY counter counts the maximum number of increments during the advantageous section, in a game when the value of the advantageous section MY counter is "0", the entry point is "3" and the awarded point is "0". , the value of the advantageous section MY counter is "0-3", but if the result of the calculation is a negative value, it is corrected to "0" and becomes "0". This is because the carry flag becomes "1" when a carry flag occurs as a result of the operation, and the instruction is used to set "0" if the carry flag is "1".

Further, when a replay is won as a result of a game, the advantageous interval MY counter is not updated, so the value of the advantageous interval MY counter in the game in which the replay is won does not increase or decrease.

CZ is decided by lottery when winning any of the prize-D to prize-H (hereinafter also referred to as rare role), and basically the harder it is to win the internal lottery, the more CZ will be won. It's getting easier. In this embodiment, the order in which CZ is likely to be won is: Winning-G> Winning-E> Winning-H> Winning-F> Winning-D.

In this embodiment, the CZ does not occur immediately after winning, but after hitting the CZ, the CZ is started when the advantageous section transitions to the normal section and again to the advantageous section (that is, the advantageous section transition in RT1 It is a specification that always starts CZ (it can be said that shifting from a normal section to an advantageous section is a condition for CZ to occur), and if you hit CZ in this advantageous section, dare to shift to the normal section and the next advantageous section. will generate CZ). As a result, it is possible to solve the problem that when the AT is hit from the CZ, the number of remaining games in the advantageous section is small and the ball cannot be put out. In particular, the smaller the number of net additions (expected number of coins to be acquired per game, also called slope value), the more effective. For example, in the case of a net increase of 2 cards, the maximum number of cards to be obtained in the advantageous section is about 2400, so 1200 games are required to obtain 2400 cards. However, AT is not always performed in the advantageous section, and various game states such as the above-mentioned normal state and CZ transition, so the number of remaining games in the advantageous section may be small (eg, 500 times) There are many. In this case, even if the game is played 500 times, since the number of net increase is 2, the player ends up getting about 1000 coins, which makes it difficult to meet the user's expectation of winning. Therefore, by ending the advantageous section once with a CZ win and starting the CZ when moving to a new advantageous section, even if the CZ is the number of games played 100 times, the advantageous section can be played the remaining 1400 times. , it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for the user to win 2400 tickets.

In addition, the winning probability of CZ for the second time and later in the same advantageous interval may be varied according to the value of the number of won (cumulative number of payouts-cumulative number of inputs) after the advantageous interval starts. For example, if you start CZ at the time of transition to the advantageous section and hit AT, change the winning probability of CZ in the remaining advantageous section after the end of AT depending on whether you win 50 or 1000 at the AT. Aspects are conceivable. In this case, the CZ winning probability after obtaining 50 cards may be higher or lower than the CZ winning probability after obtaining 1000 cards.

If the CZ winning probability after winning 50 cards is higher than the CZ winning probability after winning 1000 cards, it becomes easier to give the next CZ to users who could not get much at AT, so expectations It is possible to play while maintaining it.

If the CZ winning probability after acquiring 50 cards is lower than the CZ winning probability after acquiring 1000 cards, the remaining advantageous section after acquiring 1000 cards is small (1500 times, which is the end condition of the advantageous section (because the number of games is close to 2400), even if CZ is set to a high probability, the gambling spirit is not remarkably increased due to the design of the ball output, and a new sense of expectation can be created for the user.

When the CZ is won, the game in which the CZ is won or when the game has been played a predetermined number of times (which can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the game machine P), a celebration effect is performed in which characters such as "success" or "win" are displayed. conduct. As a result, the user can understand that some kind of privilege has been granted, so that the user can intuitively understand the progress of the game. Then, from the next game onwards, the message "Preparing for CZ" can be displayed by the image display device or the lighting mode of the lamp, thereby making it possible to create a sense of expectation for the CZ for the user. "Under CZ preparation" corresponds to a state in which, when the CZ winning game is in an advantageous interval, the advantageous interval is ended and the advantageous interval is resumed in the subsequent normal interval. Since "CZ preparation" is internally a normal section, it is in a disadvantageous state for users who do not perform AT lottery or AT addition at all, but the ball output rate during CZ preparation is regarded as AT state. By making a comparison and lowering, it is possible to allocate the balls to the AT and to create a wave of balls. In addition, since the expectations for the CZ are created during the CZ preparation, the user is less likely to feel a loss even if the payout rate is lowered.

Also, although the advantageous interval is ended in the next game after winning the CZ, the game may be executed a predetermined number of times from the game in which the CZ is won until the advantageous interval ends. In this case, in the game in which the CZ is won, it is conceivable that the CZ is not announced, and whether or not the CZ is won is performed over a predetermined number of games by means of an effect (so-called omen effect or continuous performance). Then, the blessing effect is executed at the timing when the game is executed a predetermined number of times, and the CZ is being prepared from the next game. This is because the advantageous section lamp is lit in the advantageous section, and when the advantageous section ends, the advantageous section lamp is turned off, so the advantageous section lamp is turned off from the CZ winning game to the notification that the CZ has been won. This is because it is not possible to know whether or not the player has won the CZ in the lighting mode. It should be noted that during CZ preparation it may be possible to move from the advantageous section to the normal section, in this case it is already notified that CZ is being prepared, so the result depends on the lighting mode of the advantageous section lamp during CZ preparation There is no such thing as knowing ahead of time.

In addition, CZ preparation does not necessarily have to be a normal section, and may be set to an advantageous section. Even in this case, the ratio of executing CZ preparation in the normal section is relatively higher than the ratio of executing CZ preparation in the advantageous section, and as a condition for executing CZ preparation in the advantageous section, the advantageous section The condition is that the number of remaining games of is a predetermined number (for example, 1000 times) or more. By configuring in this way, in order to execute CZ preparation when there is a margin in the number of remaining games in the advantageous section, it is sufficient even if CZ is executed through CZ preparation and as a result AT is executed It is possible to create a feeling of winning. In addition, since the normal section is not used during CZ preparation, it is possible to create a surprise such as starting AT immediately after CZ preparation (in order to initialize information about AT at the end of the advantageous section, normal If the interval is used, AT cannot start because CZ will be executed at the start of the advantageous interval).

Also, when performing CZ preparation in the above-mentioned advantageous section, it may be determined whether or not to give AT by lottery when winning any of winning -D to winning -H during CZ preparation . In this case, the order of rare roles that are likely to be won by AT by AT lottery may be the same as the order that is likely to be won by CZ, or Win-E> Win-G> Win-F> Win-H> Win-D. You may make it partly different like the order of . By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the user expect to win a rare role even during CZ preparation.

Furthermore, in order not to reduce the desire to play, a user who won a rare role but did not win an AT may be given a privilege different from that of the AT. As the privilege, for example, it is possible to display a two-dimensional code that can be read by the user terminal, or display a setting suggesting effect that allows the setting value to be determined. The privilege may be easier to grant as the number of games in the advantageous section is closer to the above-described predetermined number (eg, 1500 times), or the CZ number of times is a specific number (eg, a multiple of 5). You can make it easier.

Processing related to setting change in this embodiment will be described.

When the setting change device is activated, the above-described RAM initialization processing is performed at the timing when the setting change device is activated or at the timing when the set values are determined. If the gaming state immediately before the RAM initialization processing is performed is RT1, the information in RT1 is initialized when the RAM initialization processing is performed, and the gaming state after the RAM initialization processing becomes non-RT. Also, if the game state immediately before the RAM initialization processing is performed is in the 1st type BB, the information in the 1st type BB is initialized when the RAM initialization processing is performed, and the game state after the RAM initialization processing is non-volatile. RT. Note that the total score is not initialized (the input points are initialized) in the RAM initialization process that accompanies the setting change.

Also, if the game state immediately before the RAM initialization process is performed is in the advantageous section, when the RAM initialization process is performed, information on the advantageous section is initialized, and the game state after the RAM initialization process becomes the normal section. In other words, the gaming state during the advantageous section is the normal state, CZ, or AT, but regardless of which state the game is in, when the RAM initialization process is performed, the game shifts to the normal section.

When the RAM initialization process is performed, the game will be started from the non-RT and normal section, but in this embodiment, since it is a specification to start CZ when shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section , After the setting change, it is in an advantageous state (a state in which CZ can be started by shifting to an advantageous section without playing a game to win CZ).

By configuring in this way, since the state is advantageous after the setting change, it is possible to motivate customers to come to the store in the morning, and to increase the effect of attracting customers.

In addition, if a state that is too advantageous (a state in which the game is shifted to CZ after only playing a few times) can be set after the setting change, there is a risk that gambling will be significantly aroused (so-called "morning"). Therefore, it is conceivable to change the contents of CZ according to the situation when shifting to the advantageous section.

In this case, if the RT state of the next game determined to shift to the advantageous section is RT1, CZ is started because it is a basic game flow, and the RT state of the next game determined to shift to the advantageous section is non- If it is RT, CZ is not started because it is after setting change. As the game that has been determined to move to the advantageous section, the above-mentioned replay-C, replay-D, replay-E, replay-F, replay-G, replay-H, replay-I, replay Game-J, Win-A1, Win-A2, Win-A3, Win-A4, Win-A5, Win-A6, Win-B1, Win-B2, Win-B3, Win-B4, Win-B5, Win- B6, Prize-C1, Prize-C2, Prize-C3, Prize-C4, Prize-C5, Prize-C6, Prize-D, Prize-E, Prize-F, Prize-G, Prize-H, Prize-I, Either Win-J or Win-K wins.

Also, Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Winning-D, Winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, Winning-H, Winning-I, Winning-J, Winning-K overlap with 1 type BB, so the RT state of the next game won is RT1, and CZ is started. , Prize-A1, Prize-A2, Prize-A3, Prize-A4, Prize-A5, Prize-A6, Prize-B1, Prize-B2, Prize-B3, Prize-B4, Prize-B5, Prize-B6, Prize -C1, Winning-C2, Winning-C3, Winning-C4, Winning-C5, Winning-C6 do not overlap with 1 type BB, so the next game won is non-RT and CZ does not start.

With such a configuration, since there is a case where the non-RT shifts to the advantageous section, it is possible to suppress the specifications related to morning such as shifting to the CZ only by playing the game several times after the setting change, and the gambling property can be suppressed.

It is also conceivable to reduce the gambling property by changing the game state managed by the main control means in the advantageous section by referring to the RT state of the next game determined to be shifted to the advantageous section. In this case, AT is not performed in the advantageous section shifted to non-RT (1 type BB non-internal), and AT is made possible in the advantageous section shifted to RT1 (1 type BB internal). good too. With such a configuration, when the game is shifted to the non-RT advantageous section after the setting change, it is not possible to win the ball because the AT is not performed, so the gambling nature is suppressed. The end condition of the advantageous section at this time may be until the above-mentioned CZ is won, or the predetermined number of games (for example, 1500 times) have been played.

In addition, the transition of CZ is controlled by referring to the RT state of the next game that wins the advantageous interval transition lottery, but not limited to this, the condition device that is operating in the game that wins the advantageous interval transition lottery is controlled. may be referenced to control the transition of CZ. In this case, when winning-A1 wins inside the 1st class BB in the normal section, CZ should be started at the start of the advantageous section based on the fact that the 1st class BB and winning-A1 condition device is operating. Control. In addition, when Winning-A1 wins during non-inside 1 type BB in the normal section, it controls not to start CZ at the start of the advantageous section based on the fact that the Winning-A1 condition device is operating.

In the present embodiment, only one type of BB is the lottery target, but instead of this, RB or MB may be the lottery target, or two or all of the one type BB, RB, and MB may be the lottery target. .

Telegrams used for communication between the gaming machine P and the lending unit will be described with reference to FIG.

The data configuration of messages used for communication between the gaming machine P and the rental unit is divided into the following five types.
(1) Message length (2) Command (3) Serial number (4) Data part (5) Checksum A data group consisting of the above five items is called a message, and is transmitted in one transmission. (Do not divide and send.)
Each data structure is explained below.

(1) Message length This indicates the length of the data consisting of the message length, command, serial number, data part, and checksum, and consists of 1-byte data. For example, if the message length is 1 byte, the command is 1 byte, the serial number is 1 byte, the data part is 14 bytes, and the checksum is 1 byte, the message will be 18 bytes (1 byte + 1 byte + 1 byte + 14 bytes + 1 byte). The message length is data (12h) corresponding to 18 bytes.

(2) Command The above message is used for any one of game machine information notification, count notification, rental notification, and rental reception result response, which will be described later. With this command, it is possible to notify the type of message.
For example, 01h for game machine information notification, 02h for count notification, 13h for rental notification, and 03h for rental receipt result response are set as commands. The command data length consists of 1-byte data.

(3) Serial number The number included in the gaming machine information notification, counting notification, lending notification, and lending receipt result response, which will be described later, is called a serial number. The serial number included in the gaming machine information notification is called the serial number, the serial number included in the counting notification is called the counting serial number, the serial number included in the lending notice is called the lending serial number, and the serial number included in the lending receipt result response is called the lending serial number. These various serial numbers are numerical values within the range of 0 to 255 and consist of 1-byte data. Various serial numbers will be described later.

(4) Data Section Data corresponding to game machine information notification, counting notification, rental notification, and rental reception result response, which will be described later, is referred to as a data section. The data included in the data portion will be described later, but the data length varies from 1 byte to 53 bytes depending on the content of notification.

(5) Checksum Data consisting of the message length, command, serial number, data part, and checksum are added, and the lower 1 byte of the total is used as the checksum. By using this checksum, the receiving side can grasp the damage of data during communication. It is possible to check the failure status etc. For example, in the gaming machine P, the number of telegrams whose checksums do not match is displayed on the image display device in a predetermined situation (during a setting confirmation mode in which setting values can be confirmed or in a setting change mode in which setting values can be changed). etc. may be displayed.

Of the telegrams output from the gaming machine P to the lending unit, the gaming machine information notification will be described with reference to FIG.

(1) Message length Indicates the length of the data consisting of five data: message length, command, serial number, data part (including game machine type, game machine information type, and game machine information), and checksum. It consists of 1-byte data. The message length changes according to the type of gaming machine information, which will be described later.

(2) Command The command, as described above, plays a role of notifying any of gaming machine information notification, counting notification, rental notification, and rental reception result response. 01h (fixed value) corresponds to the game machine information notification command.

(3) Serial Number The serial number is a numerical value between 0 and 255, and serves as a serial number for notification of gaming machine information. Specific examples will be described below.
a) When the power is turned on, it is controlled so that the serial number "00h(0)" is notified.
b) After the power is turned on, the serial number is updated (+1) each time notification is made.
c) The value next to the serial number "FFh (255)" is updated (+1 twice) to "01h (1)".
As described above, the first serial number after the power is restored is 0, and after that, it is incremented by 1 as gaming machine information notifications are output. When the serial number of the gaming machine information notification becomes 255, the serial number of the next gaming machine information notification becomes 1 (not 0).

(4) Game machine type The game machine type is information constituting the data section, and is information for identifying the type of the game machine P and the like. This information, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 6, is data for notifying the management medium, group classification, and gaming machine type.

(5) Game machine information type The game machine information type is the information that constitutes the data part. This is information for identifying the As the game machine information type, 00h corresponds to the notification of the gaming machine performance information, 01h corresponds to the notification of the gaming machine installation information, and 02h corresponds to the notification of the hole controller/fraud monitoring information. The gaming machine performance information will be described later with reference to FIG. 17, the gaming machine installation information will be described with reference to FIG. 18, and the hall controller/fraud monitoring information will be described later with reference to FIG.

(6) Game machine information The game machine information is information that constitutes the data part, and the game machine information notification to be notified this time is any of the game machine performance information, the game machine installation information, or the hole controller/fraud monitoring information. This information is notified according to the Details of the gaming machine information will be described later.

(7) Checksum Consists of 5 items: message length, command, serial number, data part (including 3 types of gaming machine type, gaming machine information type, gaming machine information), and checksum of the gaming machine information notification to be notified this time. Add the data and use the lower 1 byte of the total as the checksum.

Among the information included in the gaming machine information notification, the gaming machine type will be described with reference to FIG.

The gaming machine type is 1-byte data, with Bits 0 to 3 indicating the type of gaming machine, Bits 4 to 6 indicating the group to which the manufacturer belongs, and Bit 7 indicating whether the machine uses conventional game balls or not. This is game medium information indicating whether the game machine uses medals.

It should be noted that the types of gaming machines listed are the types of gaming machines stipulated by the Law Concerning the Regulation of Adult Entertainment Businesses and the Optimization of Businesses.

Next, using the gaming machine type list shown in FIG. 16, a specific example will be given to explain what the gaming machine types are.

a) Pattern 1
By game model: Pachinko machine P
Group classification: Group A
Management medium: old game ball In this case, 01h is set as the game machine type.

b) Pattern 2
By game model: Pachislot game machine Group classification: Group A
Management medium: old game medal In this case, 82h is set as the game machine type.

c) Pattern 3
By game model: Arrange ball game machine Group classification: Group A
Management medium: old game medal In this case, 83h is set as the game machine type.

D) Pattern 4
By game model: Jiyan ball game machine Group classification: Group A
Management medium: old game medal In this case, 84h is set as the game machine type.

E) Pattern 5
By game model: Pachislot game machine Group classification: Group B
Management medium: old game medal In this case, 92h is set as the game machine type.

Of the game machine information notifications, the game machine information included in the message when the game machine performance information is set will be described with reference to FIG.

a) Total number of inputs The total number of inputs is information on the cumulative number of game media that have been input since the power was turned on. 0 can be output as For example, in a game played 1000 times in total, if the total number of game media inserted is 2000, the total number inserted is 2000, and 2000 can be output as information on the total number inserted. Then, when the power is turned off and then turned on, 0 can be output as information on the total number of turned on. If a replay combination (also referred to as a replay combination) is won by internal lottery and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, the number of inserted gaming media betted on the next game after that game is added to the total number of inserted gaming media. are not included.

b) Total number of grants The total number of grants is the information on the cumulative number of game media granted since the power was turned on. 0 can be output as For example, if the cumulative number of game media awarded is 2000 in a total of 1000 games, the total awarded number is 2000, and 2000 can be output as the total awarded number information. Then, when the power is turned off and then turned on, 0 can be output as the information on the total number of grants. When a replay combination is won by internal lottery and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, the number of given game media in the game is not included in the total number of given.

c) MY
MY is information on the maximum number of differences that can be calculated from the number of game media provided and the number of game media inserted since the power was turned on. 0 can be output as Specifically, based on the point at which the number of game media decreased the most when the game result was obtained, the maximum Call the difference number MY. For example, in a total of 1000 games, the 100th game is the game in which the player loses the most, and the number of game media that the player loses at that time is -200. The 800th game from the beginning is the game in which the player has gained the most, and when the number of game media acquired by the player at that time is 800, 1000, which is the difference between -200 and 800, is MY, and MY is 1000 can be output. When the power is turned off and then turned on, 0 can be output as MY information.

In order to output this MY, the game media number control board uses a calculation MY counter and an output MY counter. Since the MY counter for calculation and the MY counter for output are both initialized (set to 0) when the power is turned on, MY from when the power is turned on to when the power is turned off is output. In other words, since the power supply is turned off at the end of the day's business at the amusement arcade, MY for the day is output.

The calculation MY counter is configured so as to be updateable regardless of the game state or the prescribed number, calculates the awarded points-thrown points in one game, and accumulates and stores the calculation results. For example, if the game started when the value of the MY counter for calculation is "0", the input point is "3" points and the awarded point is "10" points, the result of calculating "10-3" is " 7" is added to the calculation MY counter, and the value of the calculation MY counter is stored as "7". Also, in the next game, if the input point is "3" and the given point is "10", "7", which is the result of calculating "10-3", is added and the value of the MY counter for calculation is " 14” is stored.

Further, for example, if the game started when the value of the calculation MY counter is "0", the input point is "3" points and the awarded point is "0" points, the result of calculating "0-3" is Although "-3", "0" is stored in the calculation MY counter. This is because the carry flag is set to "1" when a carry flag occurs as a result of the operation, and "0" is set when the carry flag is "1".

When the previous game is not a replay (in other words, when 3 points are actually bet), the MY counter for calculation treats the input point of the game that won the replay as "3" and the awarded point as "0". deal. Then, by setting the entry point to "0" in the next game (the game at the time of the replay operation), the actual MY can be corrected. For example, if the previous game was not a replay and the value of the MY counter for calculation was "10" (a game won by the replay), the input point is "3" and the awarded point is "0". ' point, "-3", which is the result of calculating "0-3", is added to the calculation MY counter, and "7" is stored as the value of the calculation MY counter. In addition, when a small winning combination that gives "10" points is won in the game next to the game in which the replay was won, "0" points are given as input points, "10" points are given, and "10-0" is given. is added to the calculation MY counter, and the value of the calculation MY counter is stored as "17".

The output MY counter updates the value of the calculation MY counter to the value of the output MY counter when the value stored in the calculation MY counter is greater than the value stored in the output MY counter. For example, if the game started when the value of the MY counter for calculation is "10" and the value of the MY counter for output is "12", the input point is "3" and the awarded point is "10". "10-3" is added to the result "7", and "17" is stored as the value of the calculation MY counter. Also, "17" of the MY counter for calculation and "12" of the MY counter for output are compared, and since the value of the MY counter for calculation is larger, the value of the MY counter for output is updated to "17".

The game media count control board is configured to transmit the value of the output MY counter to the lending unit.

The MY counter for calculation and the MY counter for output are initialized when the power is turned on, but the advantageous section MY counter is not initialized when the power is turned on. By configuring in this way, it is possible to appropriately protect the value of the advantageous section MY counter, which may cause a disadvantage to the player.

The MY counter for calculation and the MY counter for output can be updated regardless of the game interval (normal interval, advantageous interval). ).

The upper limit of both the calculation MY counter and the output MY counter is set to "917490". By configuring in this way, it is sufficiently higher than the maximum MY that is normally achieved in one day, so the possibility of reaching the upper limit value can be significantly reduced. Further, even if the MY counter for calculation and the MY counter for output are incremented by an illegal act, they do not immediately reach the upper limit value, so that the counter value is made difficult to restart from "0".

d) Total number of bonuses provided The total number of bonuses provided means that the game media are provided by the operation of the bonus (single bonus (SB), regular bonus (RB), challenge bonus (CB)) after the power is turned on. If the power is turned off and then turned back on, 0 can be output as the information on the total number of granted accessories. For example, if the total number of game media obtained by activating a role is 100 in a total of 1000 games, the total number of given roles is 100, and 100 is the information on the total number of given roles. can be output. Then, when the power is turned off and then turned on, 0 can be output as the information on the total number of grants.

E) Total number of continuous bonuses provided The total number of continuous bonuses provided is the cumulative number of provided game media due to the operation of the first class special bonus (regular bonus (RB)) after the power is turned on. , and when the power is turned off and then turned on, 0 can be output as the information of the total number of continuous bonuses to be given. For example, when the total number of game media obtained by the operation of the first class special role is 100 in the cumulative total of 1000 games, the total number of continuous role provided is 100, and the total number of continuous role provided is 100. 100 can be output as the number information. Then, when the power is turned off and then turned on, 0 can be output as the information on the total number of continuous bonuses to be given. In addition, the number of game media provided by the actuation of the first class special role by the first class special role continuous operating device (also referred to as the first type BB) is also accumulated.

f) Role ratio The role ratio is a ratio in which the cumulative number of awards given is the denominator and the cumulative number of awards given when the role (RB, CB, SB) is activated is the numerator. For example, if the cumulative number of games played is a predetermined number (for example, 17500) or more, the cumulative number of grants is 20000, and the cumulative number of grants at the time of activation of the role is 10000, then 50 is used as the role ratio information. can be output. It should be noted that the cumulative total does not have to be the cumulative total of all games. For example, if the cumulative number of grants reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, 65535), or (as a result of adding the number of grants in this game to the cumulative number of grants, the upper limit is exceeded) , and in subsequent games, the cumulative number of grants and the cumulative number of grants upon actuation of the accessory are not updated. In other words, the character product ratio is configured not to change. In addition, when the total number of games played is less than a predetermined number (for example, 17500 times), FFh is output as the role product ratio information.

G) Continuous role ratio The continuous role ratio is a ratio in which the cumulative number of given bonuses is the denominator and the cumulative number of consecutive bonuses provided by the operation of the continuous bonus (RB) is the numerator. For example, when the total number of games played is a predetermined number (for example, 17500 times) or more, the total number of grants is 20000, and the cumulative number of continuous grants at the time of activation is 10000, the information of the role ratio is 50 can be output. It should be noted that the cumulative total does not have to be the cumulative total of all games. For example, if the cumulative number of grants reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, 65535), or (as a result of adding the number of grants in this game to the cumulative number of grants, the upper limit is exceeded) , and in subsequent games, the cumulative award number and the cumulative award number at the time of continuous accessory activation are not updated. In other words, the character product ratio is configured not to change. In addition, when the total number of games played is less than a predetermined number (for example, 17500 times), FFh is output as the consecutive role ratio information.

H) Advantageous section ratio The advantageous section ratio is a ratio in which the cumulative number of games played is the denominator and the cumulative number of advantageous section games played is the numerator. For example, when the total number of games played is 20000 and the total number of games played in the advantageous section is 18000, 90 can be output as the advantageous section ratio information. It should be noted that the cumulative total does not have to be the cumulative total of all games. For example, when the cumulative number of games reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, 65535), the cumulative number of games and the number of advantageous section games are not updated in subsequent games. there is In other words, the advantageous section ratio is configured not to change.
It should be noted that the cumulative total does not have to be the cumulative total of all games. For example, if the cumulative number of games reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, 65535), or (as a result of adding the number of games played this time to the total number of games, the upper limit is exceeded) , and in subsequent games, the cumulative number of games played and the cumulative number of advantageous section games are not updated. In other words, the advantageous section ratio is configured not to change. In addition, when the total number of games played is less than a predetermined number (for example, 17500 times), FFh is output as the advantageous section ratio. Also, the gaming machine P that does not have an advantageous section is configured to output FFh.

i) Indicated role ratio The indicated role ratio is the total number of given roles given by the operation of the role (RB, CB, SB), and the operation of the instruction function. It is a ratio whose numerator is the sum of the cumulative number of given instructions given by (announcement of the operation mode of the stop switch P4). Note that the sum here may be a value derived by calculation based on the number of given when the role is activated and the number of instructions given, or it is added when given when the role is activated or given when the instruction function is activated. It may be one storage area. For example, if the number of times is 175,000 or more, the cumulative number of grants is 200,000, and the sum of the cumulative number of grants when the role product is activated and the cumulative number of instruction grants is 100,000, then 50 can be output as the role ratio information. . It should be noted that the cumulative total does not have to be the cumulative total of all games. For example, if the cumulative number of grants reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, 1677215), or (as a result of adding the number of games played this time to the total number of games, the upper limit is exceeded) , and in subsequent games, the cumulative number of grants, and the sum of the cumulative number of grants when the accessory is activated and the cumulative number of instruction grants are not updated. In other words, the advantageous section ratio is configured not to change. In addition, when the total number of games played is less than a predetermined number (for example, 175000 times), FFh is output as the role product ratio information. In addition, even the gaming machine P that does not have any accessory or instruction function is configured to output FFh.

J) Accessory status ratio Accessory status ratio is the number of games played with the cumulative number of games played as the denominator, and the number of games in which the accessories (RB, CB, SB) are activated, or the continuous operation device (1BB, 1BB, 2BB) is the ratio of the cumulative number of specific games played as the numerator. For example, when the total number of games played is 20000 and the total number of specific games played is 5000, 25 can be output as the information on the state ratio of the accessory. It should be noted that the cumulative total does not have to be the cumulative total of all games. For example, when the cumulative number of games reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, 1677215), in subsequent games, the cumulative number of games and the specific number of games are not updated. there is In other words, the accessory state ratio is configured not to change. When the total number of games played is less than a predetermined number (for example, 175000 times), FFh is output as the role item state ratio. In addition, the gaming machine P that does not have the accessory or the accessory continuous operating device is configured to output FFh.

(c) Number of games played The number of games played is the cumulative number of games played since the power of the gaming machine was turned on. Cleared when the game machine is powered on.

d) Spare A spare is prepared in advance for the possibility of future use. When only the above information from a) to s) is to be output, 00h should be output. ing.

S) Reservation 1
Reservation 1 is not used only on the gaming machine P main body. For example, after transmission from the gaming machine P to the rental unit, the rental unit uses the 3-byte area reserved as a reservation on the unit side to output from the rental unit to an external party such as an A or B organization (for example, a gaming machine information center). used when Examples of usage include outputting the maximum MY calculated by the lending unit to the outside (for example, a game machine information center) in addition to the above-mentioned a) to c).

C) Reservation 2
Reservation 2 is not used only on the main body of the game machine P. For example, after transmitting from the gaming machine P to the rental unit, the rental unit uses the 2-byte area reserved as a reservation on the unit side to output from the rental unit to an external party such as an A or B organization (for example, a gaming machine information center). used when Examples of use include outputting the number of games calculated by the lending unit to an external device (for example, a game machine information center) in addition to the above-mentioned a) to c).

Among the game machine information notifications, the game machine information included in the message when the game machine installation information is set will be described with reference to FIG.

a) Main control chip ID number The main control chip ID number is information including a chip individual number for identifying the main control chip integrated with the CPU, RWM, and ROM provided on the main control board P15. Yes, even if it is the same model, it will be different information. For example, when the chip individual number is 4 bytes of 12345678h and the main control chip is purchased from company A, the main control chip ID number is 000000001234567821h (the lower 1 byte, 21h, is the main control chip of model number X purchased from company A). ) can be output to the lending unit. For example, when the chip individual number is 4 bytes of 23456789h and the main control chip is purchased from company B, the main control chip ID number is 000000002345678941h (41h in the lower 1 byte is the main control chip of model number Y purchased from company B). (indicating that it is a control chip) can be output to the lending unit.

b) Main control chip maker code This is information indicating the gaming machine maker stored in the built-in memory of the main control chip.

c) Main control chip product code This is information indicating the model name of the gaming machine P stored in the built-in memory of the main control chip.

The above-described main control chip ID number, main control chip manufacturer code, and main control chip product code are transmitted from the main control board P15 to the game media number control board in the power-on process when the game machine P is powered on. It is designed to be sent to P16. A main control chip ID number, a main control chip manufacturer code, and a main control chip product code are stored in the RWM areas provided on the game medium number control board P16.

d) Game media count control chip ID number The game media count control chip ID number is for identifying the game media count control chip integrated with the CPU, RWM, and ROM provided on the game media count control board P16. The information includes the individual chip number, and even if the model is the same, the information is different for each.
For example, if the chip individual number is 98765432h, which is 4 bytes, and the chip is a game media count control chip purchased from company A, the game media count control chip ID number is 000000009876543221h (the lower 1 byte, 21h, is the model number X purchased from company A). ) can be output to the lending unit.
For example, if the chip individual number is 4 bytes of 87654321h and it is a game media count control chip purchased from company B, the game media count control chip ID number is 000000008765432141h (the lower 1 byte, 41h, is the model number Y purchased from company B). ) can be output to the lending unit.

In the case of a gaming machine P not equipped with the game medium number control board P16, it is possible to output 000000000000000000h as the game medium number control chip ID number to the lending unit.

E) Game media count control chip maker code Information indicating the game machine maker stored in the built-in memory of the game media count control chip.
In the case of a gaming machine P not equipped with the game medium number control board P16, 000000h can be output to the lending unit as the game medium number control chip maker code.

f) Game media number control chip product code This is information indicating the model name of the game machine P stored in the built-in memory of the main control chip.
In the case of a gaming machine P that does not have the game medium number control board P16, 0000000000000000h can be output to the lending unit as the game medium number control chip product code.

Of the gaming machine information notifications, the gaming machine information included in the telegram when hall controller/fraud monitoring information is set will be described with reference to FIG.

a) Total Score The total score is the value of the current number of game media stored in the game media count control board P16, and can be increased or decreased by inserting game media or winning a prize. The current total score is displayed on the game medium number display portion P9 provided in the gaming machine P. Total score information is sent to the lending unit. For example, if 2000 points are stored as the total score, 0007D0h can be output to the lending unit. The upper limit of the total score that can be stored in the game medium number control board P16 is 16383 points.

b) Entry point The entry point indicates the number of inserted game media. For example, when betting 3 points, 03h can be output to the lending unit. Also, before starting a game from a situation where 3 points have been bet (before the start switch P3 is operated), if 3 points are to be settled on the game medium number control board P16 by operating the settlement switch, FDh is a lending unit. It is possible to output toward In other words, the information of -3 points (FDh) to +3 points (03h) can be output to the rental unit.

C) Assigned Points The awarded points (also called winning points) indicate the number of game media awarded according to the mode of the symbol combination stopped (winning) on the active line after all the reels have stopped. For example, when 8 points are awarded, 08h information can be output, and when 15 points are awarded, 0Fh can be output to the lending unit.

The gaming machine P detects an abnormality in the total score using the total score information managed by the lending unit by transmitting the above-described "total score", "input point", and "given point" to the lending unit. It is possible.

d) Main control state 1
Main control state 1 indicates a state related to the game state. Specifically, in the 1-byte data, each bit is assigned which game state it is. For example, when Bit0 is 1, it is possible to output information indicating the RB state to the lending unit. For example, when Bit1 is 1, information indicating the BB state can be output to the lending unit. For example, when Bit2 is 1, it is possible to output information indicating the AT state to the rental unit. Bit3-Bit6 correspond to gaming machine status signals 1-4. The gaming machine status signals 1 to 4 can be used for different purposes or not used depending on the type of the gaming machine P. For example, every time the score obtained in the AT game reaches 100 points, the gaming machine state signal 1 is output. Bit 7 is unused, and is configured so that 0 can be output regardless of the type of game machine P. FIG. By configuring in this manner, for example, when notifying that the unit is in the AT state, it is possible to output 00000100B to the lending unit.

e) Main control state 2
The main control state 2, like the main control state 1, indicates a state related to the game state. Bit0-Bit2 correspond to gaming machine status signals 5-7. The gaming machine state signals 5 to 7 can be used for different purposes or not used depending on the type of the gaming machine P. For example, outputting the gaming machine state signal 5 when shifting to a specific RT state (replay probability fluctuation state) can be mentioned. Bit3 to Bit7 are unused, and are configured so that 0 can be output regardless of the type of gaming machine P. FIG. By constructing in this way, for example, when a transition is made to a specific RT state, it is possible to output 00000001B to the lending unit.

F) Game machine error state The game machine error state indicates an error state composed of information including an error code or the like indicating an error occurring in the game machine P. FIG.

Specifically, Bit0 to Bit5 indicate an error code. Bit6 indicates whether there is an error in the number-of-game-media control board P16 (in this case, Bit6 is 0) or an error in the main control board P15 (in this case, Bit6 is 1). Bit 7 only reports an error in the rental unit (Bit 7 is 0 in this case), or an error is reported in the rental unit and an error code is also notified to the hall computer (HC) through the rental unit. indicates whether it is true (in this case, Bit7 is 1).

For example, assume that the gaming machine P is capable of detecting random number anomaly and radio wave anomaly as types of errors. At this time, it is possible to define error codes such as 00001B for random number anomaly and 00010B for radio wave anomaly, and to output information including these error codes. Specifically, when the random number abnormality is an error in the main control board P15 and the lending unit only reports the error, 01000001B can be output to the lending unit. Also, if the radio wave abnormality is an error in the game media number control board P16 and the lending unit notifies the error and also notifies the hall computer of the error code, 10000010B can be output to the lending unit. . If no error has occurred or if the gaming machine P does not have an error code, 00000000B can be output to the lending unit.

g) Gaming machine fraud 1 (main control)
The gaming machine fraud 1 (main control) indicates information regarding the detection of fraud related to the main control board P15 and the state related to the main control board P15. The game machine fraud 1 (main control) signal is treated as a hall computer signal. In other words, each signal of game machine fraud 1 (main control) output from the game machine P is output to the hall computer through the lending unit.

Each signal that constitutes gaming machine fraud 1 (main control) is described below.

A setting changing signal is assigned to Bit0. In other words, it indicates that the setting is being changed (during the setting change mode) and that the setting has been changed. Bit 0 of the setting change signal is 1 from the time the setting is being changed to the end of one game after the setting change (for example, when all the reels are stopped and the payout process is finished). Bit 0 becomes 0 in situations other than the end of one game during setting change to after setting change. The setting changing signal is output while the setting changing status is ON. The setting changing status is turned ON after the setting change mode is activated, RAM initialization processing is executed, and setting values are displayed. By turning OFF the setting changing status at the end of one game after the setting change, the output of the setting changing signal is stopped.

In other words, the setting changing signal is not output based on the gaming machine P turning on the setting changing status. When it is time to transmit information, a setting changing signal is output (Bit0 becomes 1) based on the fact that the setting changing status is ON. Similarly, when one game ends and the setting change status is turned OFF, after the setting change status is turned OFF, the setting change status is turned OFF when it is time to send hall controller/fraud monitoring information. The output of the setting changing signal is stopped (Bit0 becomes 0) based on a certain event.

With this configuration, it is possible to control the output information of the setting changing signal included in the hall controller/unauthorized monitoring information by managing ON or OFF of the setting changing status.

Subsequently, a setting confirmation signal is assigned to Bit1. That is, Bit1 is 1 when the setting is being checked (during the setting checking mode), and Bit1 is 0 when the setting is not being checked.

The signal during setting confirmation shows an example in which Bit is 1 only during setting confirmation, but it is not limited to this. may be configured. In other words, when the setting confirmation mode is started in the main control board P15 (for example, when the setting key switch is turned on in the game standby state), the game medium number control board P16 is notified that the setting confirmation mode is in effect. and the gaming machine fraud 1 bit sent from the game media count control board P16 to the lending unit becomes 1, and the main control board P15 sets the timer for setting confirmation, and the main control board P15 confirms the setting. When it is judged that 5 seconds have elapsed as a result of measuring the timer for setting (judgment that the count value of the timer for setting confirmation is "0"), a command related to the fact that 5 seconds have elapsed in the setting confirmation mode is sent to the game media number control board. P16 and having already received a command regarding the end of the setting confirmation mode from the main control board P15, the gaming machine fraud 1 bit sent from the game media count control board P16 to the lending unit becomes 0. configuration can be considered.

In this case, if 5 seconds have elapsed during the setting confirmation mode, a command regarding the lapse of 5 seconds in the setting confirmation mode may or may not be transmitted. Also, if 5 seconds have passed during the setting confirmation mode, the Bit of the game machine fraud 1 remains 1 until the setting confirmation mode ends. Also, even if the setting confirmation mode ends in less than 5 seconds (for example, 2 seconds), for the remaining 3 seconds (a total of 5 seconds), the game machine fraud 1 bit indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress is 1. there is With this configuration, even if the setting confirmation mode ends in a very short time, it is possible to secure sufficient time to transmit the setting confirmation mode information to the lending unit, and to detect an unauthorized setting key switch operation. becomes possible.

Further, when the setting confirmation mode is started in the main control board P15 (for example, when the setting key switch is turned on in the game standby state), the game medium number control board P16 indicates the setting confirmation mode. A command is sent, and the game machine fraud 1 bit sent from the game media number control board P16 to the lending unit becomes 1, and the setting confirmation timer is set in the main control board P15, and the setting confirmation timer is set. every time the main control board P15 updates the setting confirmation timer, the game media number control board P16 transmits a command related to the updating of the setting confirmation timer to the game medium number control board P16, and the game medium number control board P16 transmits from the main control board Based on the setting confirmation timer value (count value), it is determined that 5 seconds have passed in the setting confirmation mode (determining that the timer (count value) of the setting confirmation timer is 0). A configuration is conceivable in which the gaming machine fraud 1 bit transmitted from the control board P16 to the lending unit is set to 0.

In this case, if 5 seconds have passed during the setting confirmation mode, the command regarding the update of the setting confirmation timer will not be transmitted. Also, if 5 seconds have passed during the setting confirmation mode, the Bit of the game machine fraud 1 remains 1 until the setting confirmation mode ends. Also, even if the setting confirmation mode ends in less than 5 seconds (for example, 2 seconds), for the remaining 3 seconds (a total of 5 seconds), the game machine fraud 1 bit indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress is 1. there is With this configuration, even if the setting confirmation mode ends in a very short time, it is possible to secure sufficient time to transmit the setting confirmation mode information to the lending unit, and to detect an unauthorized setting key switch operation. becomes possible.

Further, when the setting confirmation mode is started in the main control board P15 (for example, when the setting key switch is turned on in the game standby state), the game medium number control board P16 indicates the setting confirmation mode. When the command is transmitted, the game machine fraud 1 bit transmitted from the game medium number control board P16 to the lending unit becomes 1, and the game medium number control board P16 sets the timer for setting confirmation, and the game medium number control board P16 determines that 5 seconds have elapsed in the setting confirmation mode based on the value (count value) of the setting confirmation timer (judging that the timer (count value) of the setting confirmation timer is 0), thereby controlling the number of game media A configuration is conceivable in which the gaming machine fraud 1 bit transmitted from the board P16 to the lending unit is set to 0.

In this case, when 5 seconds have passed during the setting confirmation mode, updating of the setting confirmation timer is terminated. Also, if 5 seconds have passed during the setting confirmation mode, the Bit of the game machine fraud 1 remains 1 until the setting confirmation mode ends. Also, even if the setting confirmation mode ends in less than 5 seconds (for example, 2 seconds), for the remaining 3 seconds (a total of 5 seconds), the game machine fraud 1 bit indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress is 1. there is With this configuration, even if the setting confirmation mode ends in a very short time, it is possible to secure sufficient time to transmit the setting confirmation mode information to the lending unit, and to detect an unauthorized setting key switch operation. becomes possible.

The timing for setting the setting confirmation timer may be after the setting confirmation mode is started and the setting values are displayed. Then, when either of the conditions "in the setting confirmation mode" and "the setting confirmation timer is not 0" is satisfied, the setting confirmation status is turned ON, the setting confirmation signal is output, When neither of the conditions "in the setting confirmation mode" and "the timer for setting confirmation is not 0" is satisfied, the setting confirmation status is turned OFF, and the output of the setting confirmation signal is stopped.

Output control of the setting confirmation signal will be described in detail.

When it is determined whether or not the setting key switch has risen during the game standby of the game progress main processing (determines whether or not the setting key switch has changed from OFF to ON), and it is determined that the setting key switch has risen. sets a timer for 5 seconds (exactly 5004.165 ms) as the setting confirmation signal output period (because the interrupt processing interval is 2.235 ms, "2239" is set as the count value).

In the timer measurement processing in the interrupt processing that is executed after setting the timer for the setting confirmation signal output period (setting "2239" as the count value), the timer for the setting confirmation signal output period is decremented (the count value is set to "1" is subtracted), and in the game machine information management process in the interrupt process, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation signal output period has passed for 5 seconds (whether or not the count value is "0"). ), and if 5 seconds have not elapsed (if it is determined that the count value is not "0" (the zero flag is not set)), a setting confirmation signal is set, and if 5 seconds have elapsed ( If it is determined that the count value is "0" (the zero flag is set), the process proceeds to another process without setting the setting confirmation signal. Here, after the setting confirmation signal is set, the setting confirmation signal is output (transmitted to the lending unit side) when the transmission timing of the hall controller/unauthorized monitoring information notification arrives.

Whether or not the setting confirmation signal output period has passed for 5 seconds is determined by whether or not the zero flag is set. As a result of the subtraction by the timer measurement processing, if the timer for the setting confirmation signal output period is 0, the zero flag is set, so it is determined that 5 seconds have elapsed, and as a result of the subtraction by the timer measurement processing, the setting confirmation signal is output. If the period timer has not reached 0, it is determined that 5 seconds have not elapsed since the zero flag is not set. Note that the timer is set to 0 after 5 seconds or more have passed after the end of the setting confirmation mode and the output of the setting confirmation signal is completed. Since the zero flag is set, after 5 seconds have passed since the end of the setting confirmation mode, the setting confirmation signal is not set unless the setting confirmation mode is entered again.

In addition, during the game standby of the game progress main processing, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch has risen, and when it is determined that the setting key switch has risen, a timer of 5 seconds is set as a setting confirmation signal output period. After that, it is determined whether or not there is a fall of the setting key switch signal (the fall of the setting key switch) by the processing immediately after (determining whether or not the setting key switch has changed from ON to OFF). If it is determined that there is no setting confirmation signal output period, the timer is set again for 5 seconds, and the process returns to the process of determining whether or not the setting key switch has fallen.

After judging that the setting key switch rises in this way, the timer continues to be set for 5 seconds as the setting confirmation signal output period until it judges that the setting key switch has fallen. A setting confirming signal will be sent. In addition, even if it is determined that the setting key switch has fallen and the setting confirmation mode ends, the setting confirmation signal is transmitted until the timer for the setting confirmation signal output period reaches 0. Even if it ends within seconds, the setting confirmation signal can be transmitted for 5 seconds after the setting confirmation mode ends, and the setting confirmation signal can be reliably transmitted to the lending unit side.

In addition, even if a fraudulent act such as switching to the normal mode is performed after switching to the setting confirmation mode and spying on the setting value, since the setting confirmation signal is transmitted for 5 seconds, no trace of the fraud can be left. It becomes possible.

In addition, since the processing for setting the timer for the setting confirmation signal output period is executed using the loop processing of the game progress main processing, after the timer measurement processing in the interrupt processing is executed and the timer is subtracted, the game progresses. When setting the timer for the setting checking signal output period again in the loop processing of the main processing, the processing for setting the setting checking signal output period timer can be executed multiple times. A timer can be set to an initial value (5 seconds). In other words, in order to allow the process of setting the timer during the setting confirmation signal output period to be executed a plurality of times (at least twice), the time for executing the timer setting process once during the setting confirmation signal output period is set to 2. It is configured to be less than .235ms/2 (half the time between interrupt processing).

Further, according to such a configuration, the output period of the setting confirmation signal can be controlled by the process of setting the timer, so that the output of the setting confirmation signal can be accurately controlled with a simple program. Note that the output period of the setting confirmation signal is an example, and if the output of the setting confirmation signal is not stopped immediately after the setting confirmation mode ends, the output period of the setting confirmation signal may be an arbitrary period (for example, 1 second, 3 seconds). seconds, or 10 seconds, etc.).

Further, when it is determined that the setting key switch has risen during the game standby of the game progress main processing, a sub-control command including at least a command based on the setting key switch rising is set. Further, when it is determined in the game progress main process that the set key switch has fallen, a sub-control command including at least a command based on the fall of the set key switch is set. In the sub-control command transmission processing in the interrupt processing, the set sub-control command is transmitted to the sub-control board P12, and when the sub-control command is received by the sub-control board P12, the sub-control command is analyzed. Execute the processing according to the result of the operation. For example, when a command based on the rise of the setting key switch is received, an effect corresponding to the setting confirmation mode is executed, and when a command based on the fall of the setting key switch is received, the setting confirmation mode is terminated and the normal mode or A production corresponding to the standby state is executed.

The effect corresponding to the setting confirmation mode does not directly correspond to the output period of the setting confirmation signal. For example, immediately after the setting confirmation mode ends, the setting confirming signal is continuously output for 5 seconds, but a command based on the falling edge of the setting key switch is sent to the sub control board P12, When the command is received, the effect corresponding to the setting confirmation mode is terminated immediately. If the performance corresponding to the setting confirmation mode is executed even though the setting confirmation mode is finished, the player will be under the illusion that the game cannot be progressed. By doing so, it is possible to immediately switch the effect state when the setting confirmation mode ends, and it is possible to prevent the player from being hindered in progressing the game. Furthermore, since the setting confirmation signal is output for 5 seconds even after the setting confirmation mode ends, it is possible to reliably transmit the setting confirmation signal to the lending unit side.

Subsequently, fraud detection signal 1 is assigned to Bit2, fraud detection signal 2 is assigned to Bit3, and fraud detection signal 3 is assigned to Bit4. For example, in a game machine P in which random number abnormality is detected as fraud, when detection of random number abnormality is assigned to fraud detection signal 1, Bit 2 becomes 1 when random number abnormality is detected, and random number abnormality is not detected. Bit2 becomes 0 in this case.

Subsequently, Bit5 is assigned a security signal. Specifically, Bit5 becomes 1 when the fraud detection signal is being output, the setting change signal is being output, or the setting confirmation signal is being output. Bit5 is 0 in this situation.

Subsequently, Bit6 and Bit7 are unused, Bit6 is 0, and Bit7 is 0.

Here, focusing on the setting changing signal, the setting checking signal, and the security signal, the output of the signals will be described with examples. Although fraud detection signal 1, fraud detection signal 2, and fraud detection signal 3 are not mentioned here, fraud detection signal 1, fraud detection signal 2, and fraud detection signal 3 are also output as "0" or "1." ing. Also, the first game refers to the first game after the setting change mode is performed.

(Case 1) For example, after changing the settings, the first game ends (the end of the game means that all the reels have stopped or the point giving process corresponding to the symbol combination has ended. , the same.). In this case, "1" (ON) is output as the setting change signal from a predetermined timing when the setting change mode is started, and "0" (OFF) is output as the setting change signal after the first game is completed. be. In this case, if the setting confirmation mode has not been entered, "0" (off) continues to be output as the setting confirmation signal. In addition, even when "0" (off) is output as the fraud detection signal 1, fraud detection signal 2, and fraud detection signal 3, the setting change signal "1" is output. The signal outputs "1" (on), and at the timing of outputting "0" as the setting change signal, any one of fraud detection signal 1, fraud detection signal 2, and fraud detection signal 3 is set to " If "1" is not output, "0" is output as a security signal. Note that if any one of the fraud detection signal 1, fraud detection signal 2, and fraud detection signal 3 outputs "1" as the fraud detection signal at the timing of outputting "0" as the setting change signal, the security Output "1" as a signal.

(Case 2) For example, after changing the settings, it is assumed that the power switch is turned off (the power is cut off) before the first game ends, and then turned on (the power is restored). After that, the first game is executed and the first game is finished. In this case, "1" (on) is output as a setting change signal from a predetermined timing when the setting change mode is started, and while the power is off, the output process is not performed, and the setting is changed from a specific timing after the power is restored. "1" (ON) is output as a medium signal, and "0" (OFF) is output as a setting change signal after the first game is completed. In this case, if the setting confirmation mode has not been entered, "0" (off) continues to be output as the setting confirmation signal. In addition, even when "0" (off) is output as the fraud detection signal 1, fraud detection signal 2, and fraud detection signal 3, the setting change signal "1" is output. The signal outputs "1" (on), and at the timing of outputting "0" as the setting change signal, any one of fraud detection signal 1, fraud detection signal 2, and fraud detection signal 3 is set to " If "1" is not output, "0" is output as a security signal. Note that if any one of the fraud detection signal 1, fraud detection signal 2, and fraud detection signal 3 outputs "1" as the fraud detection signal at the timing of outputting "0" as the setting change signal, the security Output "1" as a signal.

(Case 3) For example, it is assumed that after changing the setting, the setting confirmation mode is entered before the first game is started, and then the setting confirmation mode is terminated. After that, the first game is executed and the first game is finished. In this case, "1" (on) is output as the setting change signal from a predetermined timing when the setting change mode is started, and "1" (on) is output as the setting change signal even during the setting confirmation mode. After the first game is finished, "0" (off) is output as a setting change signal. In this case, in the setting confirmation mode, "1" (ON) is continuously output as the setting confirmation signal. In addition, even when "0" (off) is output as the fraud detection signal 1, fraud detection signal 2, and fraud detection signal 3, the setting change signal "1" is output. The signal outputs "1" (on), and at the timing of outputting "0" as the setting change signal, any one of fraud detection signal 1, fraud detection signal 2, and fraud detection signal 3 is set to " If "1" is not output, "0" is output as a security signal. Note that if any one of the fraud detection signal 1, fraud detection signal 2, and fraud detection signal 3 outputs "1" as the fraud detection signal at the timing of outputting "0" as the setting change signal, the security Output "1" as a signal.

H) Gaming machine fraud 2 (main control or game media count control)
The gaming machine fraud 2 (main control or game media count control) refers to the detection of fraud related to the main control board P15 or the game media count control board P16, and information related to the state of the main control board P15 or the game media count control board P16. show. The game machine fraud 2 (main control or game medium count control) signal is treated as a hall computer signal. In other words, each signal of game machine fraud 1 (main control) output from the game machine P is output to the hall computer through the lending unit.

Each signal constituting gaming machine fraud 2 (main control or game medium number control) is described below.

A setting door open signal is assigned to Bit0. The setting door open signal is a signal indicating whether or not the setting key switch cover member for covering the setting key switch for changing the setting is open. When the setting key switch cover member is open, Bit0 becomes 1 and information indicating that the setting key switch cover member is open is included in the game machine fraud 2, and the setting key switch cover member is closed. When it is on, Bit 0 becomes 0 and information indicating that the setting key switch cover member is closed is included in game machine fraud 2 . Bit0 is 0 in a game machine P that is not provided with a setting key switch cover member or a game machine P that does not have a function of detecting the opening of the setting key switch cover member.

Next, Bit1 is assigned a door open signal (also referred to as a door switch signal). The door open signal is a signal indicating whether or not the front door P2 of the gaming machine P is open. When the front door P2 of the gaming machine P is open, Bit0 becomes 1 and information indicating that the front door P2 is open is included in the gaming machine fraud 2, and the front door P2 of the gaming machine P is opened. When it is closed, Bit0 becomes 0 and information indicating that the front door P2 is closed is included in the game machine fraud 2.例文帳に追加

The door open signal performs output control according to the opening/closing mode of the front door P2 depending on the detection status of ON or OFF of the door switch by the input port reading process in the interrupt process described above.

When it is determined that the front door P2 is open by the input port read processing in the interrupt processing, a timer of 5 seconds (exactly 5001.93 ms) is set (interrupt processing interval is 2.235 ms). Therefore, "2239" is set as the count value). Then, the timer is measured (the count value is decremented by "1") by timer measurement processing within the same interrupt processing. Then, the game machine information management process in the same interrupt process determines that the output time of the door open signal has not passed 5 seconds (as a result of subtracting the count value, the count value is not 0 (the zero flag is set). ), the door open signal is set, and it is determined that the output time of the door open signal has passed 5 seconds (as a result of subtracting the count value, the count value is 0 (the zero flag is set). If it is determined that the game machine has been set), a signal setting process relating to other game machine information is executed without setting the door open signal.

Then, when it is determined that the front door P2 is open by the input port read processing in the next interrupt processing, the timer for 5 seconds is set again (because the interval between interrupt processing is 2.235 ms, the count value to "2239" again). In other words, when the front door P2 is open, the 5-second timer is repeatedly set (the timer setting process is executed multiple times).

In this way, when the front door P2 is open, the timer for 5 seconds is set continuously for each interrupt process, so even if the timer is subtracted (the count value is subtracted), the zero flag is not raised. In other words, the process of subtracting "1" from the count value "2239" is repeated each time the timer measurement process in the interrupt process is executed. According to such a configuration, the door open signal is always output under the condition that the front door P2 is open.

Further, when the front door P2 is closed, it is determined that the front door P2 is closed by detecting that the door switch is ON by the input port reading process in the interrupt process, and the front door P2 is closed. If so, do not reset the 5 second timer. Then, the timer is measured (the count value is decremented by "1") by timer measurement processing within the same interrupt processing. Then, it is determined whether the output time of the door open signal has passed 5 seconds by the game machine information management process in the same interrupt process. Here, when the front door P2 is closed, the 5-second timer is not reset. The value is decremented and the timer (count value) approaches "0".

In this embodiment, the timer setting process and the timer subtraction process are executed in the same interrupt process. ' is set, the number of interrupts until it becomes '0' is 2237, which is less than 5 seconds (4999.7 ms to be exact). Therefore, the preset initial value is set to "2238+1 (2239)". In other words, the count value becomes "2238" by the timer measurement processing in the interrupt processing in which the initial value "2239" is set, and the number of interrupts can be set to 2238 times.

When the count value becomes "0" by the timer measurement processing, the output of the door open signal can be stopped because the zero flag is set. In other words, the door open signal is output for 5 seconds after the front door P2 is closed, and the output of the door open signal is stopped after 5 seconds. Note that the timer is set to 0 after 5 seconds or more have passed since the door was closed and the output of the door open signal is finished. When the timer is set to 0, the result of subtraction by the timer measurement process is also set to 0, and the zero flag is set. Therefore, after 5 seconds have passed since the door was closed, the door open signal is not set unless the door is opened again. In other words, five seconds after the front door P2 is closed, Bit1 is set to 1 and the information indicating that the front door P2 is open is included in the gaming machine fraud 2, and after five seconds have passed, Bit1 is 0, and information indicating that the front door P2 is closed is included in the gaming machine fraud 2, and in a situation where the front door P2 is closed, the front door P2 is opened to the gaming machine fraud 2. There are cases where the gaming machine fraud 2 includes information indicating that the front door P2 is closed.

According to such a configuration, the output period of the door open signal can be controlled by setting the timer, so that the output of the door open signal can be accurately controlled with a simple program. The output period of the door open signal is an example, and if the output of the door open signal is not stopped immediately after the door is closed, the output period of the door open signal may be any period (for example, 1 second, 3 seconds, or 10 seconds). etc.) may be set.

Further, in the sub notification data output process in the interrupt process, a door switch signal is transmitted to the sub control board P12 according to whether the door switch is ON or OFF, and the sub control board P12 outputs the door switch signal. When the OFF signal is received, it is determined that the door is open, and control is performed such that door opening notification performance such as door opening sound and door opening message display is executed.

The door open effect does not directly correspond to the output period of the door open signal. For example, immediately after the door is closed, the door open signal is continuously output for 5 seconds, but the door switch signal becomes an ON signal and is transmitted to the sub-control board P12. However, by configuring the sub control board P12 side to execute the door opening effect for five seconds after detecting that the door switch signal has changed from OFF to ON, the output period of the door open signal and the door opening effect can be made similar. This makes it possible to visually recognize the output period of the door open signal, and makes it easier for the administrator to grasp the signal output period.

In the present embodiment, the output period of the door open signal and the execution period of the door opening effect are made similar, but the execution period of the door opening effect may be longer than the output period of the door open signal. You can shorten it.

In this embodiment, the timer is set for each interrupt process. However, the timer may be set for each predetermined number of interrupts, which is two or more. However, in order to prevent the timer value (count value) from becoming 0 after setting the timer until the next timer is set, the interrupt interval for executing timer set processing is shorter than the time indicated by the timer (count value). need to be

Subsequently, Bit2 is unused and Bit2 becomes 0.

Bit 3 is assigned to detect the number of game media cleared. Clearing the number of game media means that the total score stored in the number-of-game-media control board P16 is cleared when the total score clear switch provided on the number-of-game-media control board P16 is operated. For example, when the bet score is "3" and the total score stored in the game media count control board P16 is "1000", the bet score is reduced to "1000" by operating the total score clear switch. 3", and the total score stored in the number-of-game-media control board P16 is "0". In other words, the bet score is not cleared when the total score clear switch is operated. Bit3 becomes "1" when the operation of the total score clear switch is detected, and Bit3 becomes "0" when the operation of the total score clear switch is not detected. Bit 3 becomes "0" in the case of the gaming machine P that does not have a total score clear switch. When the total score is initialized, Bit3 is kept at "1" until the end of the game after the total score is initialized.

Subsequently, Bit4 to Bit7 are unused, and Bit4 to Bit7 are 0.

i) Gaming machine fraud 3 (main control or game media count control)
The gaming machine fraud 3 indicates information regarding the detection of fraud related to the main control board P15 or the game medium number control board P16 provided as a spare and the state related to the main control board P15 or the game medium number control board P16.
In the gaming machine P of this embodiment, it is unused because it is not used. In other words, Bit0 to Bit7 are 0.

Bit2, Bit4, and Bit5 of gaming machine fraud 2 and Bit0 and Bit1 of gaming machine fraud 3 are not used, so they are basically set to "0". When the bit is "1", it is transmitted to the lending unit and received by the SC board in the lending unit, the lending operation is prohibited (invalidate even if the lending switch is operated, etc.).

This is because in the event of an illegal program or malicious data being installed in an unused storage area, if the unused area is used, the lending operation will be prohibited. This is to prevent it from happening.

In addition, it is also assumed that a management gaming machine (also referred to as an enclosed gaming machine) that plays games using game balls and a medal-less gaming machine in this embodiment use a common lending unit. Bit 2 of fraud 2 is used for fraudulent radio wave detection, Bit 4 of gaming machine fraud 2 is used to detect winning ball number abnormality 1, Gaming machine fraud 2 Bit 5 is used to detect winning ball number abnormality 2, Gaming machine fraud 3 Bit 0 of is used for small ball detection, and Bit 1 of gaming machine fraud 3 is used for iron ball detection. is configured to By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the burden on the hall regarding the introduction of the management game machine and the medalless game machine. Note that once the rental unit is prohibited from being rented, the reset switch mounted on the gaming machine P is operated, and an error release signal is received, thereby allowing the rental unit to be rented.

Fraud detection means for detecting fraud may be provided in the main control board P15 and/or the game media number control board P16. Hereinafter, the behavior of the game machine P when, for example, radio wave abnormality is detected by the fraud detection means will be illustrated.

As a first behavior, when the game machine P (main control board P15 or game medium number control board P16) detects an abnormality in radio waves, the game in the main control means is stopped (an error state is established). . At this time, the communication between the game media number control board P16 and the lending unit (outputting and receiving various messages) may be continued, or the communication between the game medium number control board P16 and the lending unit may be stopped. You can Further, the communication between the main control board P15 and the game medium number control board P16 may be continued, or the communication between the main control board P15 and the game medium number control board P16 may be stopped. Furthermore, the communication between the main control board P15 and the effect control board may be continued, or the communication between the main control board P15 and the effect control board may be stopped. It should be noted that the error notification using a lamp, an image display device, or an amplifier (sound) may be executed under the control of the effect control board.

As a second behavior, when the game machine P (the main control board P15 or the game medium number control board P16) detects a radio wave abnormality, it is possible to play games in the main control means. At this time, the communication between the game media number control board P16 and the lending unit (outputting and receiving various messages) may be continued, or the communication between the game medium number control board P16 and the lending unit may be stopped. You can Further, the communication between the main control board P15 and the game medium number control board P16 may be continued, or the communication between the main control board P15 and the game medium number control board P16 may be stopped. Furthermore, the communication between the main control board P15 and the effect control board may be continued, or the communication between the main control board P15 and the effect control board may be stopped. Although the game can be executed under the control of the main control board P15, error notification using a lamp, an image display, or an amplifier (sound) may be executed under the control of the performance control board.

Although the radio wave anomaly has been explained as an example, the behavior described above is not limited to the radio wave anomaly. Detected by fraud detection means for detecting fraud, such as a set value abnormality that is determined to be abnormal when it is not, and an RWM abnormality that is determined to be abnormal when the data stored in the RWM of the main control board P15 is not normal when the power is restored Other possible anomalies are also applicable.

Furthermore, when a plurality of abnormalities can be detected by the fraud detection means for detecting fraud, the above-described first behavior is performed for the first abnormality (for example, random number abnormality), and the second abnormality is detected. (For example, radio wave anomaly) may be configured to behave differently according to the type of anomaly, such as performing the second behavior described above.

Next, a) number of game information, c) type information 1, c) count information 1, c) type information 2, and c) count information 2, which are game information in hall control/fraud monitoring information to be described later, will be described.

Information composed of type information 1 and count information 1 may be referred to as game information 1, type information 2, and count information 2 as game information 2 in some cases. This game information 1 or game information 2 consists of a total of 2 bytes of type information (upper 1 byte) and count information (lower 1 byte).

The type information consists of a data type (upper 4 bits) and a data number (lower 4 bits). When the data type is "0001B", it is information indicating the specified number (the number of bets). Further, when the data type is "0010B", it is information indicating the number of grants. Note that data types "0" and "3" to "15" are unused. The data number is fixed to "0001B" depending on whether the data type is "0001B" indicating the prescribed number or "0010B" indicating the assigned number. That is, data numbers "0" and "2" to "15" are unused.

In addition, the setting contents of the count information are different for each data type, and when the data type is "0001B" indicating the specified number, the count information can take values from "00000001B" to "00000011B". there is In other words, Bits 4-7 are unused and Bits 0-3 are used. In addition, when the data type is "0010B" indicating the number of grants, the count information can take values from "00000001B" to "00001111B" (values up to the maximum number of grants for each gaming machine can be taken). (they are supposed to be obtained). In other words, Bits 4-7 are unused and Bits 0-3 are used.

Also, when the number of game information is 0, the type information and the count information are not transmitted. This game information is treated as a hall computer signal. In other words, the game information output from the game machine P is output to the hall computer through the lending unit.

J) Number of game information This is information indicating the number of pieces of game information composed of type information and count information. For example, when the number of game information is 0, type information 1, count information 1, type information 2, and count information 2 are not output. Further, for example, when the number of game information is 1, the type information 1 and the count information 1 are output. Further, for example, when the number of game information is 2, type information 1 and count information 1 are output, and type information 2 and count information 2 are output.

S) Type information 1, and S) Type information 2
The type information is information constituting the game information described above. When indicating the number of bets (throwing points) used in a game, the type information is "00010001B" as the type information 1. FIG. Further, in the case of indicating the given number (given points) given as a result of the game, the type information as type information 1 or type information 2 is "00100001B".

c) count information 1 and c) count information 2
The count information is information constituting the game information described above. When the number of bets (throwing points) used in the game is output as the count information 1, a value corresponding to the number of bets (throwing points) used in the game is set. When outputting the given number (given points) as a result of the game as the count information 1 or the count information 2, a value corresponding to the given number (given points) given in the game is set. As a game result of the game, if a replay combination is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, a value corresponding to the number of bets (input points) used in the game is given according to the game result. It is set as the given number (given points).

For example, when the start switch is operated after betting three cards, "00000001B" is output as the number of game information based on the reception of the start switch acceptance command, and the number of bets used in the game is output as the game information. "0001000100000011B (1103h)" is output, in which the type information indicating (throwing point) is the upper 1 byte and the count information, which is the value corresponding to the number of bets (throwing point) used in the game, is the lower 1 byte.

Further, for example, as a result of the internal lottery for determining the winning combination, if a lottery result that can award 10 points is won and all the reels are stopped and the symbol combination to award 10 points is stopped and displayed, the game ends. When (when a command to stop all reels is received), as the number of game information, the upper 1 byte of the type information indicating the number of awarded points (points awarded) given as a result of the game, "00000001B" is output with the count information corresponding to the point) as the lower 1 byte, and "0010000100001010B (210Ah)" is output as the game information.

Further, for example, when a start switch acceptance command is received in the case of using 3 points as the entry point immediately after receiving a command to stop all reels in the case of giving 10 points as the number of points to be given, the number of game information is "00000010B". is output, and as game information 1, the type information indicating the number of bets (throwing points) used in the game is the upper 1 byte, and the count information, which is the value corresponding to the number of bets (throwing points) used in the game, is the lower 1 byte. "0001000100000011B (1103h)" is output as a byte, and as the game information 2, the upper 1 byte of the type information indicating the number of awarded points (points awarded) given as a result of the game, "0010000100001010B (210Ah)" is output with the count information, which is the value corresponding to the point), as the lower 1 byte.

The input point uses the information stored in (_WK_MDL_IN) described above, and the given point uses the information stored in (_WK_MDL_OUT) described above. The entry point storage area for outputting the entry point of game machine information for hall control/fraud monitoring information is stored in a storage area different from the entry point storage area for outputting the entry point of game information. there is Similarly, the memory area for the points to be awarded for outputting the points for the gaming machine information of hall control/fraud monitoring information is stored in a storage area different from the storage area for the points for outputting the points for the game information. there is A storage area (_WK_MDL_IN) capable of storing game information input points and a storage area (_WK_MDL_OUT) capable of storing game information points are initialized after transmission.

<Notification of counting>
The above-mentioned count notification (see FIG. 20) is composed of a 7-byte message length, and is a signal transmitted from the game machine P to the lending unit when the game machine P accepts the operation of the count switch P7. be.

The information that constitutes the count notification includes the message length (1 byte), command (1 byte), count serial number (1 byte), count point (1 byte), count cumulative point (2 bytes), checksum (1 byte). ).

The telegram length indicates the length of the telegram of the counting notification, and since it is 7 bytes, it is "0x07".

The command is "0x02" indicating a count notification.

The counting serial number is a serial number dedicated to counting, and is a dedicated serial number that is different from the serial number described above and the lending serial number described later. The count serial number ranges from "0x00" to "0xFF", and is incremented by the game machine P each time the game machine P transmits a count notification. "0x00" of the count serial number is a count serial number that is transmitted only when the power is turned on, and the value following "0xFF" is "0x01".

The counting points are the points related to the counting transmitted in one gaming machine information notification out of the gaming machine information notifications transmitted by the gaming machine P every 300 ms. Since the count points range from "0x00" to "0x32", a maximum of 50 points are sent to the lending unit in one gaming machine information notification. Further, when the total score stored in the game media number control board P16 is 50 points or more, the data "0x32" indicating 50 points is transmitted. If the score is less than 50 points, data corresponding to the current total score stored in the game media number control board P16 is transmitted (for example, if the total score stored in the game medium number control board P16 is 30). In the case of points, "0x1E" data indicating 30 points is transmitted).

The above-described example of counting points is an example in which 50 points are counted when the operation of the counting switch P7 is accepted only once (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a short-press operation). When the pressing operation is accepted, 1 point may be counted, and when the long-pressing operation of the counting switch P7 is accepted, 50 points may be counted.

In this case, accepting the short-pressing operation of the counting switch P7 means that the game medium number control board P16 has a value indicating that the level data regarding the acceptance of the operation of the counting switch P7 is ON (operation of the counting switch P7 in interrupt processing). A case can be exemplified in which the period during which the reception has a value indicating ON is less than a predetermined period (for example, less than 500 ms). That is, when the operation of the counting switch P7 is accepted during the first period less than the predetermined period, it is assumed that the short-press operation of the counting switch P7 has been accepted, and one point is counted.

Further, when the long-pressing operation of the counting switch P7 is accepted, the level data regarding the operation acceptance of the counting switch P7 of the game medium number control board P16 is a value indicating ON (operation acceptance of the counting switch P7 in interrupt processing). is a value indicating ON) is longer than or equal to a predetermined period (for example, 500 ms or longer). That is, when the operation of the counting switch P7 is accepted for a second period longer than the predetermined period, it is assumed that the long pressing operation of the counting switch P7 is accepted and 50 points are counted. If the counting switch P7 is still pressed long at the timing of sending the counting notification after the counting point "50" is sent to the lending unit as the counting notification, the counting point "50" is sent to the lending unit as the counting notification. do. In other words, after the long-press determination is made, the count point "50" is sent to the rental unit as a count notification until the count switch P7 is no longer operated (until the level data regarding the reception of the operation of the count switch P7 becomes a value indicating OFF). Continue (however, if the total score is less than 50, count that value). In this case, counting is not performed until it is determined that the counting switch P7 is being pressed for a long time (for example, 500 ms).

In addition, after accepting the operation of the counting switch, the game medium number control board P16 increments the value of the counting switch timer for each interrupt processing (every 1 ms) in order to measure the pressing time of the counting switch (the initial value is " 0"). When the value of the count switch timer reaches 500 (when the count switch is pressed for 50 ms), the increment processing is not executed in the next interrupt processing. In other words, the value of the counting switch timer maintains 500 even if the time during which the counting switch is actually pressed exceeds 500 ms, such as 1000 ms.

This is because the value of the counting switch timer continues to be incremented, the value of the counting switch timer exceeds the storage upper limit, the value of the counting switch timer is counted again from 0, and the value of the counting switch timer is changed to the second week. This is to prevent the count point from becoming "1" when the count switch is released when the count is between 0 and 499.

Therefore, when the count switch timer value is incremented, it is determined whether the count switch timer value is 500 or not. is configured to execute the next process without executing the increment process.

If the counting switch is released while the counting switch timer value is being counted, the counting switch timer value is initialized to 0, and the counting switch timer value is counted from 0 when the counting switch is pressed again. It becomes possible to

Moreover, although the count of the counting switch timer has been described as being incremented, it may be decremented. In this case, the count switch timer value is set to 501 when the count switch operation is accepted, and the decrement processing is not executed when the count switch timer value is 1, thereby providing the same effect as the increment mode. can be obtained.

The count accumulation point is a value obtained by accumulating count points from when the game machine P is powered on. The count accumulation point is in the range from "0x0000" to "0xFFFF", and the count point is added each time the count is performed. When the count accumulation point exceeds "0xFFFF", the value next to "0xFFFF" is set to "0x0000". Also, when the gaming machine P is powered on, the count accumulation point is cleared to zero.

The checksum is a value obtained by adding the values of message length (1 byte), command (1 byte), count serial number (1 byte), count point (1 byte), and count accumulation point (2 bytes). The checksum is used for judging whether or not the count notification received by the lending unit against the count notification transmitted from the gaming machine P is correct.

<Rental Notice>
The lending notification consists of a message length of 5 bytes, and is a signal transmitted from the lending unit to the game machine P when the lending unit accepts the operation of the lending switch. When the lending unit receives the count notification from the game machine P, it transmits the lending notification to the game machine P. - 特許庁However, if the gaming machine information notification has not been received, or if the gaming machine information type of the gaming machine information notification is other than "0x02" (notified other than hall control/fraud monitoring information), the count notification will be counted. When the point is notified in the range of 1 to 50 (value other than 0), the lending point is set to 0 and notified to the game machine P.

The information that constitutes the rental notification consists of a message length (1 byte), a command (1 byte), a rental serial number (1 byte), the number of rental game media (1 byte), and a checksum (1 byte). .

The telegram length indicates the length of the rental notification telegram, and since it is 5 bytes, it is "0x05".

The command is "0x13" indicating a rental notice.

The lending serial number is a serial number dedicated to lending, and is a serial number dedicated to lending that is different from the serial numbers and counting serial numbers described above. The lending serial number ranges from "0x00" to "0xFF" and is incremented each time a lending receipt result response, which will be described later, is transmitted from the gaming machine P. Among the rental serial numbers, "0x00" is a rental serial number that is transmitted only when communication with the gaming machine P is started, and the value following "0xFF" is "0x01".

The lending points are points related to lending transmitted to the game machine P by operating a lending switch provided in the lending unit. Since the lending points range from "0x00" to "0x32", a maximum of 50 points are transmitted to the gaming machine P in one gaming machine information notification. In addition, when the number of points that can be borrowed stored in the storage medium (member card, visitor card, etc.) inserted in the lending unit is 50 points or more, the data "0x32" indicating 50 points is transmitted to the game machine P. However, if the number of points that can be borrowed stored in the storage medium is less than 50, data corresponding to the current number of points that can be borrowed stored in the storage medium is transmitted (for example, If there are 20 points available for rent, the data "0x14" indicating 20 points is transmitted).

The checksum is a value obtained by adding the message length (1 byte), command (1 byte), lending serial number (1 byte), and lending point (1 byte). The checksum is used to determine whether or not the rental notification received by the gaming machine P is correct for the rental notification transmitted to the gaming machine P.

<Rental Receipt Result Response>
The lending receipt result response consists of a message length of 5 bytes, and is a signal transmitted from the gaming machine P to the lending unit based on the gaming machine P receiving the lending notification. When the gaming machine P receives the lending notification from the lending unit, it transmits a lending reception result response to the lending unit. However, if the lending serial numbers notified from the lending unit are not consecutive, or if the game machine P cannot be rented due to a RAM error in the main control board P15 or the game medium number control board P16, etc., the game medium number control If the value obtained by adding the total score and the loaned points stored in the board P16 exceeds the total score memory upper limit value (for example, 16383 described above) stored in the game medium number control board P16, or the game medium number control board P16 If the stored total score is a value (15000 or more) equal to or greater than the threshold value, it responds with a value indicating an abnormality as a loan point acceptance result. The information that constitutes the lending acceptance result response consists of a message length (1 byte), a command (1 byte), a lending serial number (1 byte), a lending point acceptance result (1 byte), and a checksum (1 byte). ing.

The telegram length indicates the length of the rental notification telegram, and since it is 5 bytes, it is "0x05".

The command is "0x03" indicating a loan receipt result response.

As the lending serial number, the lending serial number stored in the lending notice received from the lending unit is used as it is. For example, if the lending serial number of the lending notification is 0x01, the lending serial number of the lending reception result response sent to the lending unit is set to 0x01. However, when the lending point receipt result is not normal (abnormal), the lending serial number received from the lending unit when the lending point receipt result was normal is returned as the lending serial number. In other words, the gaming machine P stores the lending notification transmitted from the lending unit (for example, message length, command, lending serial number, number of lending game media, all or part of the checksum), and returns the lending point receipt result. When is abnormal, it is prepared to respond with the loan point receipt result when it is normal. In addition, the lending notice to be stored may be only the immediately preceding one, and when the lending point reception result is abnormal, the newest lending notice can be transmitted to the lending unit in a normal state by preventing new storage. It should be noted that a plurality of lending notices may be stored in addition to the immediately preceding one. The lending serial number is cleared to 0 when the game machine P is powered on.

The lending point reception result is "0x00" when normal, and "0x01" when abnormal. If the value is abnormal, the lending serial number notified from the lending unit is not continuous, or the game machine P is in a state where lending is impossible due to a RAM error of the game medium number control board P16, etc. If the value obtained by adding the total score stored in the control board P16 and the lending points exceeds the storage upper limit of the total score stored in the game medium number control board P16, or the total stored in the game medium number control board P16 The score may be a value equal to or higher than the threshold (15000 or higher). Also, when the value is other than "0x00" and "0x01" due to some other factor, the rented unit is determined to be abnormal.

The checksum is a value obtained by adding the message length (1 byte), command (1 byte), lending serial number (1 byte), and lending point receipt result (1 byte). The checksum is used to determine whether or not the lending receipt response received by the lending unit is correct for the lending receipt response sent to the lending unit.

Also, when a command is transmitted from the game medium number control board P16 to the lending unit side, a lending control command set process is executed. In the lending control command set process, the command set in the A register is set in the transmission data register.

Also, when a plurality of commands are continuously transmitted from the game medium number control board P16 toward the lending unit, the lending control command continuous setting process is executed. In the continuous lending control command set process, after the lending control command set process is executed, the address is updated and the lending control command set process is executed again. The number of times the lending control command set process is executed is based on the value set in the B register. In other words, the number of commands is set in the B register before the lending control command continuous setting process is executed.

Further, when transmitting a command with a value of 0 as information to be transmitted to the lending unit side, lending control command zero set processing is executed. In the lending control command zero set process, a command with a value of 0 is set in the A register, and the lending control command set process is executed a predetermined number of times.

The lending control command zero set process is used to align the digits to 9 bytes when transmitting the game media number control chip ID to the lending unit side. For example, if the game media count control chip ID number of the game media count control board P16 is 21876543, the lending control command set processing within the lending control command zero set processing is executed four times to set the upper 4 bytes to 0. is sent four times, then the lending control command set processing in the lending control command continuous set processing is executed four times to transmit 21h, 87h, 65h, 43h, and finally the identification code is sent in the lending control command set processing 41h is sent.

Since the main control chip ID number is previously transmitted from the main control board P15 as 9-byte data and stored in the game medium number control board P16, the lending control command zero set process is not used. In other words, the game media number control board P16 transmits the main control chip ID number of the 9-byte data transmitted from the main control board P15 to the lending unit as it is.

In addition, since 0 data is also transmitted for the reserve, reservation 1, and reservation 2 in the gaming machine performance information, a command with a value of 0 is transmitted to the rental unit using the rental control command zero set process.

A basic communication sequence between the gaming machine P and the lending unit will be described with reference to FIG.

<Basic communication sequence>
The game machine P transmits the game machine installation information, the game machine performance information, and the hole controller/fraud monitoring information as the above-described game machine information notification to the rental unit.

The gaming machine installation information is transmitted to the lending unit every 60 s (60,000 ms) from the time the gaming machine P is completely activated. The gaming machine performance information is transmitted to the lending unit every 180 s (180,000 ms) from the time the gaming machine P is completely activated. Hall control/fraud monitoring information is transmitted to the lending unit every 300 ms after the gaming machine P is completely activated.

Gaming machine installation information, gaming machine performance information, hall controller/fraud monitoring information may be sent to the rental unit at the same timing. For example, after 60 seconds have elapsed from the completion of activation of the game machine P, the game machine installation information and hall control/fraud monitoring information can be at the same timing. In this case, the gaming machine installation information is preferentially transmitted, and after 300 ms has passed, the hole controller/fraud monitoring information is transmitted.

Further, for example, after 180 seconds have passed since the activation of the game machine P is completed, the game machine installation information, the game machine performance information, and the hall control/fraud monitoring information can be at the same timing. In this case, the gaming machine installation information is preferentially transmitted, then the gaming machine performance information is transmitted after 300 ms has elapsed, and the hall controller/fraud monitoring information is transmitted after 300 ms has elapsed.

In this way, regarding the priority of information transmission, the gaming machine installation information has the highest priority, followed by the gaming machine performance information, and finally the hole controller/fraud monitoring information. Therefore, the transmission timing of the hall control/fraud monitoring information is delayed by 600 ms at maximum.

However, if any information of the main control state 1 and the main control state 2 is updated (if it is determined that there is an update of the main control state), or the game When there is information, the transmission priority of whole control/unauthorized monitoring information is the highest.

Specifically, Bit 0 indicating RB in main control state 1, Bit 1 indicating BB, Bit 2 indicating AT, Bit 3 indicating gaming machine status signal 1, Bit 4 indicating gaming machine status signal 2, and gaming machine status signal 3 When one of Bit 5 and Bit 6 indicating the gaming machine state signal 4 is updated from "0" to "1" (corresponding to the case where the game state shifts to the game state corresponding to each Bit), the main Determine that there is an update of the control state. In this way, when it is determined that there is an update of the main control state, it is possible to transmit the hall controller/fraud monitoring information to the lending unit with the first priority.

Bit 0 indicating RB in main control state 1, Bit 1 indicating BB, Bit 2 indicating AT, Bit 3 indicating gaming machine state signal 1, Bit 4 indicating gaming machine state signal 2, Bit 5 indicating gaming machine state signal 3, game The main control state is updated when any one of the Bits 6 indicating the machine state signal 4 is updated from "1" to "0" (corresponding to the end of the game state corresponding to each Bit). I judge. In this way, when it is determined that there is an update of the main control state, it is possible to transmit the hall controller/fraud monitoring information to the lending unit with the first priority.

Bit 7 of the main control state 1 is unused, but if Bit 7 is updated from "0" to "1" or from "1" to "0", it is determined that the main control state is not updated. ing. By configuring in this way, even if unused Bit 7 is updated by noise or the like, the transmission priority of the hall controller/unauthorized monitoring information does not change, so normal communication with the rental unit can be realized.

However, it is not limited to this mode, and if the unused Bit 7 is updated from "0" to "1" or from "1" to "0", it is determined that there is an update of the main control state. may In this case, there is no need to check the update for each bit (it is checked by whether or not the RAM value in main control state 1 has changed), reducing the program capacity and speeding up the program related to the update checking process. can. It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether the RAM value is greater than "40h (01000000B)" or "7Fh (01111111B)", and if it is greater than that, branch so as not to change the priority of transmission. Well, according to this configuration, normal communication with the rental unit can be realized by checking the value of the RAM and not changing the transmission priority even if the unused bit changes from "0" to "1".

Subsequently, one of Bit 0 indicating gaming machine status signal 5 in main control status 2, Bit 1 indicating gaming machine status signal 6, and Bit 2 indicating gaming machine status signal 7 is updated from "0" to "1". It is determined that there is an update of the main control state when it is (corresponding to the case where the game state has shifted to the game state corresponding to each Bit).

Further, any one of Bit0 indicating the gaming machine state signal 5 in the main control state 2, Bit1 indicating the gaming machine state signal 6, and Bit2 indicating the gaming machine state signal 7 is updated from "1" to "0". When (corresponding to the game state corresponding to each Bit has ended), it is determined that there is an update of the main control state.

Bit3 to Bit7 of the main control state 2 are unused, but if any of Bit3 to Bit7 is updated from "0" to "1" or from "1" to "0", the main It is judged that there is no update of the control state. With this configuration, even if unused Bits 3 to 7 are updated due to noise or the like, the transmission priority of whole controller/unauthorized monitoring information does not change, so normal communication with the rental unit can be realized.

However, it is not limited to this aspect, and when unused Bit3 to Bit7 are updated from "0" to "1" or from "1" to "0", an aspect in which it is determined that there is an update of the main control state may be In this case, there is no need to check the update for each bit (check whether the value of the RAM in main control state 2 has changed), reducing the program capacity and speeding up the program related to the update checking process. can. It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether or not the RAM value is greater than "04h (00000100B)" or "07h (00000111B)", and if so, branch so as not to change the priority of transmission. Well, according to this configuration, normal communication with the rental unit can be realized by checking the value of the RAM and not changing the transmission priority even if the unused bit changes from "0" to "1".

Subsequently, as a mode in which it is determined that there is game information, in the input point storage area (_WK_MDL_IN) and the given point storage area (_WK_MDL_OUT) stored for outputting game information among the information constituting the hole contest/fraud monitoring information It judges whether or not the stored information is "0".

The closing point information stored in the closing point storage area is stored when the start switch acceptance command transmitted from the main control board P15 is received. Further, the given point information stored in the given point storage area is stored when the all reel stop command transmitted from the main control board P15 is received. This command reception processing is executed in the interruption processing, and within the interruption processing, after execution of the command reception processing, the gaming machine information management processing (game medium number control) is executed in order.

In the game machine information management process (game medium count control), processing for transmitting hall control/fraud monitoring information to the lending unit is executed. Judging whether the entry point information stored in the area and the provision point information stored in the provision point storage area are respectively "0", and if the entry point or the provision point is not 0, immediately hole It is possible to transmit the connection/fraud monitoring information to the lending unit with the first priority. In other words, it becomes possible to transmit the whole control/fraud monitoring information to the lending unit with the first priority in the interrupt process that stores the entry point or the given point.

It was determined that the entry point information stored in the entry point storage area and the award point information stored in the award point storage area were both "0", and that the main control state was not updated. In this case, the information to be output is selected based on the gaming machine installation information notification request flag and the gaming machine performance information notification request flag. In other words, the priority of the gaming machine installation information is the first priority, the priority of the gaming machine performance information is the second priority, and the priority of the hall controller/fraud monitoring information is the third priority.

Further, as a mode in which it is determined that there is game information, it may be determined whether or not the number of game information is "0". The number of game information is stored in the game information number storage area ( _WK_INF_GAM) can be '1' or '2'. Then, in the game machine information management (game media number control) of the interrupt process, before transmitting the hole control/fraud monitoring information, the number of game information is generated from the information in the entry point storage area and the given number storage area (game information number storage area), and when the number of game information is "1" or "2", it is possible to transmit hall control/fraud monitoring information to the lending unit as the first priority.

In this way, by changing the priority of the hole control/fraud monitoring information according to the situation, when the gaming machine information notification is transmitted, it is possible to insert the information at the time of transition to the game state (start or end of the game state). If the points or assigned points are not 0, hall controllers and fraud monitoring information can be transmitted preferentially even at the timing of transmission of gaming machine installation information and gaming machine performance information. , it is possible to accurately manage in which game state the input point and the payout point are.

In addition, in order to associate the gaming machine state signal of the hole control/fraud monitoring information with the game information (input point or grant point) of the hall control/fraud monitoring information, a end) is executing a freeze.

For example, as the Nth game in the normal state, the game is started with 3 pieces (the operation of the start lever is accepted), the BB is won, the BB symbol combination is stopped by the stop operation, and the BB state signal is output. When it is turned ON, in order to ensure that the period from the start of the game until the BB state signal turns ON exceeds 300 ms, there is a predetermined period of time after the BB symbol combination is stopped and before the BB state signal is turned ON. Perform freeze over X.

FIG. 35 shows an unfavorable example in which the input number signal and the BB status signal are simultaneously transmitted in the hall controller/unauthorized monitoring information notification. FIG. 36 shows a preferable example in which the input number signal and the BB status signal are accurately transmitted in the hall controller/unauthorized monitoring information notification.

The "insertion number information" is information for transmitting the insertion number signal of the type information 1 or 2 of the game information shown in FIG. is. "0" in the input number information means that 0 is stored in the input number information, and "n" in the input number information means that any one of 1 to 3 is stored in the input number information. means that The number-of-throws-in information is any of information "1" to "3" as a prescribed number of the game when the main control board P15 transmits a command indicating the number of puts-in to the game-medium-number control board P16 when the start lever is accepted. is stored in the game media count control board P16, and after transmitting the hall controller/fraud monitoring information notification including the inserted count signal, the game media count control board P16 stores "0" in the inserted count information.

"BB state information" is information for transmitting the BB state signal of the main control state 1 of the gaming machine information shown in FIG. 19, and is information stored in a certain area of the RAM of the main control board P15. "0" in the BB state information means that 0 is stored in the BB state information, and "1" in the BB state information means that 1 is stored in the BB state information. As for the BB state information, when the BB symbol combination is stopped after all the reels are stopped, "1" is stored in the operating state setting process in the operating state management process, and the BB gaming state is set after all the reels are stopped. When finished, "0" is stored in the operating state setting process in the operating state management process. In other words, the hall control/fraud monitoring information notification including the BB status signal is transmitted from the start of the BB to the end of the BB. Further, when "1" is stored in the BB state information, a main control state command is transmitted to the game medium number control board P16 by interrupt processing of the main control board P15, and the game medium number control board P16 receives the received main control. BB signal information is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the game medium number control board P16 for acquiring the state command and storing the main control state for transmitting hall console fraud monitoring information notification if the main control state is the BB state. Remember.

"Freeze information" is information indicating that the freeze is being executed, and is stored in a certain area of the RAM of the main control board P15. It should be noted that instead of the information indicating that the freeze is being executed, the timer information related to the execution of the freeze may be used. may be judged.

FIG. 35 shows that the operation of the start lever is accepted immediately after the notification of hall control/fraud monitoring information is transmitted, "n (n is a numerical value)" is stored in the number of inputs information, and the notification of hall controller/fraud monitoring information is transmitted. It shows a case where all the stop switches are operated and the BB symbol combination is stopped within 300 ms after the BB state information and "1" is stored. In this case, at the timing of transmitting the Hall control/fraud monitoring information notification after the BB symbol combination is stopped, the input count signal and the BB status signal may be turned ON and transmitted to the lending unit side.

In FIG. 35, the input number signal and the BB status signal are transmitted at the same time. Since the information in the normal game state before entering the BB game state is correct, the insertion number signal here is transmitted as erroneous information (information on the number of insertions in the BB game state).

Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 36, when the BB symbol combination is displayed, freezing is executed for a predetermined period X ("X" in FIG. 36), and "1" is stored in the BB state information after the freezing is completed. configured to The value of X should be (300 ms) - (the shortest time Y from accepting the start lever operation (game start) to storing 1 in the BB state information), and if it is designed as Y = 200 ms, X = 100 ms. It will be designed with a value exceeding Also, since the time required for playing the game varies depending on the skill of the player, X may be set to 300 ms in order to ensure transmission. Since the interval between hall control/fraud monitoring information notifications is 300 ms, if the freeze is executed for 300 ms or more, it becomes possible to reliably transmit an accurate number-of-insertions signal under any circumstances.

Further, the timing of executing the freeze may be any period from when the BB symbol combination is stopped to when "1" is stored in the BB state information. It is conceivable to store "X" in the RAM as a (count value), and store "1" in the BB state information RAM after it is determined that X has become 0.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to match the consistency of the number-of-insertions information and the main control state information for each game, so that accurate information can be transmitted to the lending unit side.

Further, for example, as the N-th game in the BB state, the game is started with three pieces (the operation of the start lever is accepted), a small winning combination is won, and the small winning combination is stopped by a stop operation, and a predetermined number of symbols are played. When the BB state ends due to the payout of , and the BB state signal turns OFF, the BB state After the end of and until the BB state signal is turned OFF, the freeze is executed for a predetermined period X.

FIG. 37 shows an unfavorable example in which the number-of-payouts signal and the BB status signal are not simultaneously transmitted in the hall control/fraud monitoring information notification. FIG. 38 shows a preferred example in which the payout number signal and the BB status signal are accurately transmitted in the hall control/fraud monitoring information notification.

"Payout number information" is information for transmitting a payout number signal of type information 1 or 2 of game information shown in FIG. is. "0" in the payout amount information means that 0 is stored in the payout amount information, and "m" in the payout amount information means that any one of 1 to 15 is stored in the payout amount information. means that When the main control board P15 transmits a command indicating the number of payouts to the game medium number control board P16 when all the reels are stopped, the number of payouts information is any of the number of payouts "1" to "15" as the number of payouts for the game. is stored in the game medium number control board P16, and after transmitting the hall controller/fraud monitoring information notification including the payout number signal, the game medium number control board P16 stores "0" in the payout number information.

Other information is the same as the description of FIGS. 35 and 36. FIG.

In FIG. 37, all reels are stopped after transmitting the hole control/fraud monitoring information notification, "m (m is a numerical value)" is stored in the payout number information, and within 300 ms after transmitting the hole control/fraud monitoring information notification shows the case where the BB game state ends and "0" is stored in the BB state information. In this case, the number-of-payouts signal may be ON and the BB state signal may be OFF at the timing of transmitting the hall control/fraud monitoring information notification after the BB game state is completed.

In FIG. 37, the number-of-payouts signal and the BB status signal are not transmitted at the same time. Since the payout number signal here is correct information in the BB game state, it is transmitted as erroneous information (payout number information in the normal game state).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 38, in this embodiment, when the payout process ends, the freeze is executed for a predetermined period X ("X" in FIG. 38), and after the freeze ends, the BB state information is set to "0". Configure to remember. The value of X may be (300 ms)-(the shortest time Z from the end of the payout process until 0 is stored in the BB status information), and if Z=250 ms, the value of X exceeds 50 ms. Also, since the time required for the payout process varies depending on the setting of the maximum number of payouts for each gaming machine, X may be set to 300 ms in order to ensure transmission. Since the interval between hall control/fraud monitoring information notifications is 300 ms, if freezing is executed for 300 ms or more, it is possible to reliably transmit an accurate payout number signal in any situation.

Also, the timing of executing the freeze may be between the end of the payout process and the storage of "0" in the BB state information. For example, the freeze timer value ( It is conceivable to store "X" in the RAM as the count value) and store "0" in the RAM for the BB state information after it is determined that X has become 0.

With this configuration, the consistency between the number-of-payouts information and the main control state information for each game can be matched, so accurate information can be transmitted to the lending unit side.

Although the relationship between the input number signal and the BB status signal, and the payout number signal and the BB status signal has been described above, the BB status signal can be replaced with another status signal. For example, an RB state signal for determining whether it is in the RB state, an AT state signal for determining whether it is in the AT state, or a specific main game for determining whether it is in another specific main game state A status signal and the like are included.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, it has been explained that the freeze is executed for the predetermined period X until "1" or "0" is stored in the BB state information. You may set to the period which assumed until the end. For example, the response time of each device such as the SC board until the input number information or the payout number information transmitted by the game machine P reaches the hall computer is 1000 ms, and the output time of 1 pulse received by the hall computer 100 ms, when the maximum number of pulses received by the hall computer is 15 (because the maximum number of payouts of the reel-type game machine is 15), 1000 ms + 100 ms x 15 = 2500 ms, and the value of the predetermined period X is set to 2500 ms or more. It is desirable to

The gaming machine P transmits the gaming machine information notification to the lending unit at a period of 300 ms, and then transmits the counting notification 100 ms later. Then, the lending unit transmits the lending notification to the gaming machine P within 170 ms after receiving the counting notification. Then, the gaming machine P transmits a lending reception result response within 10 ms after receiving the lending notification. Since the next gaming machine information notification is sent 300 ms after the next gaming machine information notification is sent, it takes 20 ms or longer to transmit the next gaming machine information notification after the lending reception result response is sent.

The activation sequence of the gaming machine P and the lending unit will be described with reference to FIG.

<Startup sequence>
A case where the game machine P is started before the rental unit is explained.

When the gaming machine P and the rental unit are powered off, the VL signal and the PSI signal of the gaming machine P and the rental unit are OFF. The VL signal is an I/F signal shared power source and is a power source supplied from the lending unit, so it remains OFF until the lending unit is activated. Also, since the PSI signal is a connection signal between the gaming machine P and the lending unit, it remains OFF until the lending unit is activated.

Subsequently, in a situation where activation of the game machine P is completed and activation of the rented unit is not yet completed, a game machine information notification is transmitted to the rented unit when the activation of the game machine P is completed, After that, it sends a count notification. However, since the lending unit has not yet started, it cannot receive the transmitted game machine information notification and counting notification. Furthermore, since the lending unit does not receive the counting notification even though the gaming machine P transmits the counting notification, the lending unit does not transmit the lending notification, and the gaming machine P transmits the lending reception result response. Nor.

Note that the serial number of the gaming machine information notification and the counting serial number of the counting notification that are transmitted first after the activation of the gaming machine P is completed transmit "0x00". In addition, since the serial number and counting serial number are updated regardless of whether or not the gaming machine P is connected to the lending unit, the next transmission timing (300 ms after the game machine information notification first transmitted after the game machine P has been activated) 0x01 is transmitted as the serial number and the counting serial number at the later transmission timing).

In other words, regardless of whether or not the game machine P is connected to the rented unit, the electronic message is transmitted and the serial number is updated.

Subsequently, when the start-up of the lending unit is completed, the VL signal and the PSI signal are turned ON, and the operation of the bet switch P5 and the counting switch P7 of the game machine P becomes valid. In addition, the rental unit can receive the information transmitted from the game machine P.

As described above, since the gaming machine P transmits the gaming machine information notification and the counting notification regardless of whether or not the lending unit is activated, the lending unit is sent to the gaming machine P after the activation of the lending unit is completed. It manages from the serial number of the gaming machine information notification sent from and the counting serial number of the counting notification. With this configuration, the game machine P can transmit information without judging the situation of the rented unit, so that the program capacity for judging the situation of the rented unit can be reduced.

The activation sequence of the gaming machine P and the lending unit will be described with reference to FIG.

A case where the lending unit is activated before the gaming machine P will be described.

When the lending unit is activated before the gaming machine P, it waits until the gaming machine P is activated. Here, the VL signal and the PSI signal of the gaming machine P are OFF until the gaming machine P is activated, but when the activation of the lending unit is completed, the VL signal and the PSI signal of the lending unit are ON. Become. In this state, the lending unit waits until the gaming machine P is completely activated.

Subsequently, when the game machine P is completely activated, the VL signal and the PSI signal of the game machine P and the lending unit are turned ON, and the game machine P sends the game machine information notification serial number "0x00" and the counting notification serial number "0x00". , respectively. Here, since the rental unit has already been activated, it receives the gaming machine information notification with the serial number “0x00” and the counting notification with the counting serial number “0x00”, and starts management. With this configuration, the game machine P can transmit information without judging the situation of the rented unit, so that the program capacity for judging the situation of the rented unit can be reduced.

A count notification sequence between the game machine P and the rented unit will be described with reference to FIG.

<Counting notification sequence>
A case where the gaming machine P transmits a count notification to the rented unit will be described. In this description, the situation before accepting the operation of the count switch P7 is the situation where the total score managed by the game medium number control board P16 is "200" and the lendable points managed by the lending unit is "20". do.

The gaming machine immediately after accepting the operation of the counting switch P7 provided in the gaming machine P under the condition that the gaming machine P and the lending unit have been started and the gaming machine P and the lending unit can communicate with each other. At the timing of transmitting the information notification to the rental unit, the serial number “n (n is a numerical value)” and the total score “200” are transmitted as the gaming machine information notification, and the counting serial number “m (m is a numerical value)” and the total score are transmitted as the counting notification. Since the score is 200 and the total score stored in the number-of-game-media control board P16 is 50 or more, the count "50" is transmitted as described above. In addition, when the processing related to the counting is the first processing related to counting after the game machine P is completely activated, the counting cumulative point “50” is transmitted as the counting notification. Note that the gaming machine P subtracts the count points from the total score stored in the total score storage area before executing the process of transmitting the count notification.

Subsequently, when the lending unit receives the count notification, it updates the lendable points to "70" and transmits the lending serial number "k (k is a numerical value)" and the lending points "0" to the game machine P as the lending notification. (Because the loan button is not operated). Also, when the gaming machine P receives a rental notification from the rental unit, it checks the consistency between the information indicated by the rental notification and the information indicated by the previous rental notification.

Subsequently, after the gaming machine P receives the lending notification, it sends the lending serial number “k” and the lending point receipt result “normal” to the lending unit as a lending receipt result response (the information indicated by the lending notice and the previous lending notice are If the result of checking the consistency with the indicated information is normal).

Subsequently, at the next timing when the game machine P transmits the game machine information notification to the lending unit, if the operation of the counting switch P7 has not already been accepted (when the counting switch P7 is released), the game machine information notification Transmit serial number "n+1" and total score "150". In addition, as a count notification, the count serial number “m+1”, the count point “0”, and the count cumulative point “50” are transmitted. Also, the lending unit transmits a lending serial number “k+1” and a lending point “0” to the gaming machine P as a lending notification to the gaming machine P. Further, the game machine P transmits a lending serial number "k+1" and a lending point receipt result "normal" as a lending reception result response to the lending unit.

Further, when the operation of the counting switch P7 is accepted at the timing of transmitting the second game machine information notification after the operation of the counting switch P7 is accepted (when the counting switch P7 is long pressed), the game machine information notification , the serial number "n+1" and the total score "150" are transmitted. In addition, as a count notification, the count serial number “m+1”, the count point “50”, and the count cumulative point “100” are transmitted. In addition, the lending unit transmits a lending serial number “k+1” and a lending point “0” to the gaming machine P as a lending notification to the gaming machine P. Further, the game machine P transmits a lending serial number "k+1" and a lending point receipt result "normal" as a lending reception result response to the lending unit.

In this way, during the period from when the operation of the counting switch P7 is accepted until when the operation of the counting switch P7 is no longer accepted (while the counting switch P7 is long pressed), the game machine P counts the rented units every 300 ms. Keep sending notifications. With this configuration, a certain amount of counting points (50) can be sent to the rental unit every 300 ms without requiring complicated operations (only a long press), reducing the user's burden of counting operations. can do.

Since the count switch P7 is connected to the game medium number control board P16, the input port is checked for each interrupt processing of the game medium number control board P16, and information indicating ON is input to the input port indicating the count switch P7. If so, it is assumed that the operation of the counting switch P7 has been accepted, and if the information indicating OFF is inputted to the input port indicating the counting switch P7 after that, it is assumed that the operation of the counting switch P7 has not been accepted.

A lending notification sequence between the gaming machine P and the lending unit will be described with reference to FIG.

<Rental notification sequence>
A case where the rental unit transmits a rental notification to the gaming machine P will be described. In this description, it is assumed that the total score managed by the game medium number control board P16 is "10" and the lendable points managed by the lending unit is "100" as the situation before accepting the operation of the lending button. . Since the total score stored in the game media number control board P16 is less than "50", it can be said that "10" is counted when the counting switch is operated.

When the gaming machine P and the lending unit have been activated and the gaming machine P and the lending unit can communicate with each other, when the operation of the lending button provided on the lending unit is accepted, the gaming machine P , a serial number "n (n is a numerical value)" and a total score of "10" are transmitted as a game machine information notification, and a counting serial number "m (m is a numerical value)" and a count point "0" are transmitted as a counting notification. Then, at the timing of transmitting the lending notification to the game machine P when the counting point included in the counting notification is "0", the lending serial number "k" and the lending point "50" are transmitted as the lending notification.

Subsequently, the lending unit updates the lendable points to "50" when sending the lending notification. The timing at which the lending unit updates the lendable points may be the timing at which the lending acceptance result response is received.

Subsequently, after the gaming machine P receives the lending notification, it sends the lending serial number “k” and the lending point receipt result “normal” to the lending unit as a lending receipt result response (the information indicated by the lending notice and the previous lending notice are If the result of checking the consistency with the indicated information is normal).

Subsequently, the gaming machine P updates the total score to "60" during the period from receiving the rental notification to transmitting the rental reception result response.

Subsequently, when the operation of the lending button provided on the lending unit is continuously accepted, at the next timing when the gaming machine P transmits the gaming machine information notification to the lending unit, the serial number " n+1" and total score "60".

Subsequently, the game machine P transmits the count number "m+1", the count point "0", and the count accumulation point "0" as a count notification. , the lending point "50" is transmitted to the game machine P, and the lendable point is updated to "0". Further, the game machine P transmits a lending serial number "k+1" and a lending point receipt result "normal" as a lending reception result response to the lending unit.

In this example, the lending unit determines the operation level and accepts the operation of the lending button when the lending button is continuously operated. may In this case, even if the lending button is continuously operated, the lending operation will be accepted only at the timing when the lending button is operated for the first time, so even if the lending button is continuously operated, the second and subsequent times At the timing of transmitting the rental notification, the rental point is transmitted as "0".

In addition, when the count notification transmitted from the gaming machine P when the lending button is accepted has a counting point of 1 or more, the lending point of the lending notification to be sent to the gaming machine P next is transmitted as "0". The lending button accepted at this time may be invalidated, or the lending unit may store the operation acceptance flag of the lending button, and the lending unit may store the lending button in the lending notification sent after the counting point of the counting notification becomes "0". may be sent as "50". Further, in the case where the lending unit stores the operation acceptance flag of the lending button, when the lending button is operated again while the flag relating to accepting the operation of the lending button is stored, the flag may be rewritten to the flag indicating that the lending button has been operated twice. and the second and subsequent operations may be invalidated.

Further, when the lending unit transmits the lending notification to the game machine P and the gaming machine P receives the lending notification, all the information of the lending notification is stored in the lending notification information storage area provided in the game machine P. As a result, when the gaming machine P transmits a lending receipt result response, it can be determined whether the information of the lending point receipt result is "normal" or "abnormal".

Specifically, "k" is stored as the rental serial number information in the rental notification information storage area provided in the gaming machine P, and when the rental serial number of the rental notification transmitted from the rental unit is "k+1", it is stored. is incremented to "k" to generate "k+1" and then compared with the received lending serial number "k+1". ” is stored in the lending notification information storage area provided in the game machine P.

In addition, "k" is stored as the rental serial number information in the rental notification information storage area provided in the gaming machine P, and when the rental serial number of the rental notification transmitted from the rental unit is "k+2", the stored " increment to k" to generate "k+1" and then compare it with the received lending serial number "k+2". Since the generated lending serial number and the received lending serial number do not match, the received lending serial number "k+2" is stored. No (the lending serial number of the lending notification information storage area provided in the game machine P is "k").

Also, since the upper limit of the lending serial number is 255, if the lending serial number is 255 and the lending serial number is incremented, the lending serial number becomes 0. However, since the lending serial number 0 is a lending serial number that can be transmitted to the gaming machine only immediately after the lending unit is activated, it is incremented again to make the lending serial number 1. In other words, when the lending serial number is 255 and the gaming machine updates the lending serial number, the next lending serial number becomes 1 by incrementing twice.

In the above example, as a comparison method, the lending serial number stored in the game machine P is incremented and then it is determined whether or not it matches the lending serial number received from the lending unit. , a method of decrementing the lending serial number received from the lending unit and then comparing it with the lending serial number stored in the gaming machine P to see if it matches, or a method in which the gaming machine P stores the lending serial number received from the lending unit. It is also possible to use a method of subtracting the borrowed serial number from the borrowed amount and determining whether or not the result is "1".

The lending notification information storage area provided in the game machine P is composed of a lending notice receiving buffer 1, a lending notice receiving buffer 2, a lending notice receiving buffer 3, a lending notice receiving buffer 4, and a lending notice receiving buffer 5.

The lending notice receiving buffer 1 stores the message length, the lending notice receiving buffer 2 stores the command, the lending notice receiving buffer 3 stores the lending serial number, the lending notice receiving buffer 4 stores the lending point, and receives the lending notice. A buffer 5 stores a checksum.

For example, if the rental notification received by the gaming machine P has a message length of “0x05”, a command of “0x13”, a rental serial number of “0x01”, a rental point of “0x32”, and a checksum of “0x4B”, the corresponding rental notification reception buffer memorize to The game machine P subtracts the rental point "0x32" stored in the rental notification reception buffer 4 from the checksum "0x4B" stored in the rental notification reception buffer 5, calculates "0x19", and calculates the rental notification reception buffer from "0x19". Subtract the lending serial number "0x01" stored in 3 to calculate "0x18", subtract the command "0x13" stored in the lending notification reception buffer 2 from "0x18" to calculate "0x05", and calculate "0x05" The message length "0x05" stored in the lending notification reception buffer 1 is subtracted from this to calculate "0x00".

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the calculation result is "0x00", and if it is "0x00" as described above, it is determined that the checksum is normal. If the calculation result is not "0x00", it is determined that the checksum is abnormal, all the storage areas of the lending notification reception buffers 1 to 5 are cleared (for example, rewritten to "0x00"), and the lending receipt result As a response, a message length of "0x05", a command of "0x03", a lending sequence number of "0x00", a lending point receipt result of "0x01 (abnormal)", and a checksum of "0x09" are transmitted. A communication error during lending will be described later.

Subsequently, when it is determined that the checksum is normal, it is determined whether or not the command information stored in the lending notice receiving buffer 2 is "0x13". If the command information stored in the lending notification reception buffer 2 is "0x13", it is determined to be normal. If the command information stored in the lending notice receiving buffer 2 is not "0x13", it is judged to be abnormal, and all the storage areas of the lending notice receiving buffers 1 to 5 are cleared (for example, rewritten to "0x00"). etc.), a message length of "0x05", a command of "0x03", a lending sequence number of "0x00", a lending point receipt result of "0x01 (abnormal)", and a checksum of "0x09" are sent as a lending receipt result response.

Subsequently, when it is determined that the command is normal, it is determined whether or not the message length information stored in the lending notification reception buffer 1 is "0x05". If the telegram length information stored in the lending notification reception buffer 1 is "0x05", it is determined to be normal. If the telegram length information stored in the rental notification reception buffer 1 is not "0x05", it is judged to be abnormal, and all the storage areas of the rental notification reception buffers 1 to 5 are cleared (for example, set to "0x00"). rewriting, etc.), and as a loan receipt result response, the message length "0x05", the command "0x03", the lending sequence number "0x00", the lending point receipt result as "0x01 (abnormal)", and the checksum "0x09" are sent.

Since the message length information stored in the rental notification reception buffer 1 and the command information stored in the rental notification reception buffer 2 are fixed values, they do not change if they are normal. In addition, since the checksum is an abnormal value due to its nature, it may match the normal value. It is possible to bring the probability of determining to be infinitely close to 0.

In order to determine whether or not the rental notification information is normal, determination was made in the order of checksum, command, and message length, but the determination order is not limited to this, and any combination may be used. Also, if it is determined to be abnormal at any timing during the process of normality determination of the checksum, command, and message length, all the storage areas of the rental notification reception buffers 1 to 5 are cleared, and the subsequent determination processing is performed. However, it is not limited to this, and even if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the checksum, command, or message length determination process, all the storage areas of the rental notification reception buffers 1 to 5 are not cleared, It may be configured to clear all the storage areas of the lending notification receiving buffers 1 to 5 when any of the determination results is determined to be abnormal after all determinations are completed.

Note that when error detection is performed using only the checksum, since the checksum is 1-byte data, the reliability is (1-(1/256))×100=99.609375000%, but the fixed value ( 1-byte data) is included, the reliability is (1-((1/256) x (1/256))) x 100 = 99.998474121%, and the fixed value (1-byte data) is 2 The reliability when one is included is (1−((1/256)×(1/256)×(1/256)))×100=99.999999977%. Therefore, if the fixed value of 1-byte data is determined by two fixed values in addition to the checksum, the reliability becomes almost 100%, making it easier to detect fraud and abnormality.

A recovery sequence from disconnection of the exclusive interface between the gaming machine P and the lending unit will be described with reference to FIG.

<Recovery sequence from dedicated interface disconnection>
A description will be given of the flow of various notification information when the communication is restored after the communication between the game machine P and the rental unit is disabled due to disconnection. In this description, it is assumed that the total score managed by the game media number control board P16 is "100".

When the gaming machine P and the lending unit have been activated and communication between the gaming machine P and the lending unit is possible, at the timing of transmitting the gaming machine information notification to the lending unit, the serial number " n (n is a numerical value)” and the total score of “100” are transmitted, and as a count notification, a counting serial number “m (m is a numerical value)” and a counting point of “0” are transmitted. Further, when the processing related to the counting is the processing related to the first counting after the game machine P is completely activated, the counting cumulative point “0” is transmitted as the counting notification. Note that the gaming machine P subtracts the count points from the total score stored in the total score storage area before executing the process of transmitting the count notification.

Subsequently, when the lending unit receives the counting notification, the lending unit transmits the lending serial number “k (k is a numerical value)” and the lending point “0” to the gaming machine P as the lending notification. Also, when the gaming machine P receives a rental notification from the rental unit, it checks the consistency between the information indicated by the rental notification and the information indicated by the previous rental notification.

Subsequently, after the gaming machine P receives the lending notification, it transmits the lending sequence number "k" and the lending point receipt result "normal" to the lending unit as a lending reception result response.

Next, as a game machine information notification, the line is disconnected immediately after the game machine P transmits the serial number “n+1” and the total score “100” (the VL signal on the game machine P side is OFF and the VL signal on the lending unit side When the PSI signal is both OFF and the power of the gaming machine P and the rental unit is ON), the counting notification transmitted by the gaming machine P includes the counting serial number "m+1", the counting point "0", and the counting accumulation. Send the point '0'. Note that even if the operation of the counting switch P7 was accepted before the disconnection, counting processing is performed when the VL signal on the gaming machine P side is turned OFF, and the acceptance of the counting switch P7 is invalidated. In order to cancel the count, the counting point is set to "0" in the count notification after disconnection. Further, when the VL signal on the gaming machine P side is turned OFF, acceptance of betting operations is also disabled.

After that, the lending unit side does not receive the count notification and therefore does not transmit the lending notification, and the gaming machine P side does not transmit the lending reception result response. Then, after 300 ms have passed since the transmission of the previous gaming machine information notification, the next gaming machine information notification is transmitted, but the gaming machine P in the case where the communication between the gaming machine P and the lending unit has not yet been restored A serial number of "n+2" and a total score of "100" are transmitted as a machine information notification, and a count serial number of "m+2", a count point of "0", and a cumulative count point of "0" are transmitted as a count notification.

That is, in a situation where the communication between the gaming machine P and the lending unit is disconnected, the gaming machine P continues to transmit only the gaming machine information notification and the counting notification. At this time, the serial number and counting serial number are updated and transmitted.

Subsequently, when the communication between the gaming machine P and the lending unit is restored immediately before the gaming machine P transmits the next gaming machine information notification, the serial number "n+3" and the total score "100" are transmitted as the gaming machine information notification. Then, as a count notification, the count serial number “m+3”, the count point “0”, and the count cumulative point “0” are transmitted.

Subsequently, the lending unit that has received the counting notification transmits the lending serial number “0” and the lending point “0” to the gaming machine P as the lending notification. As a result, the rental serial number "0" is transmitted when the disconnection is restored, so that the game machine P can determine whether or not it is the first rental notification after the disconnection.

Subsequently, after the game machine P receives the lending notification, it transmits a lending serial number "k" as a lending receipt result response and a lending point receipt result response "abnormal" to the lending unit. Here, as the lending serial number, the lending serial number "k" that was received normally last time is sent, and the lending point reception result response is "0", which is the lending serial number sent from the lending unit, and " Since it is different from "k+1" obtained by incrementing "k", it is judged as "abnormal". Also, when the lending unit receives the lending serial number "k", it stores "k" in the lending serial number storage area of the lending unit. It should be noted that other methods described above may be used to determine whether the loan serial number is abnormal.

Subsequently, when 300 ms have passed since the previous gaming machine information notification, the serial number “n+4” and the total score “100” are transmitted as the gaming machine information notification, and the counting serial number “m+4” and the counting point “0” are transmitted as the counting notification. Transmit the count accumulation point "0".

Subsequently, the lending unit that has received the counting notification transmits the lending serial number "k+1" and the lending point "0" to the gaming machine P as the lending notification. As a result, when the gaming machine P receives the lending notification, the lending point reception result becomes "normal".

Subsequently, after the gaming machine P receives the lending notification, it transmits the lending serial number "k+1" as the lending reception result response and the lending point receipt result response "normal" to the lending unit. At this timing, recovery from disconnection is completed, and subsequent communication proceeds according to the normal sequence.

In the above example, when the lending unit transmits the lending serial number "0", the lending point as the lending notice transmits "0" even if the operation of the lending button is accepted. In other words, even if the operation of the lending button is accepted after the VL signal and the PSI signal of the lending unit are both turned ON and before the first lending notification is sent, the lending point with the lending sequence number of "0" is Although it is configured to transmit "0", it is not limited to this, and if the operation of the lending button is accepted when the lending serial number is "0", the lending point is "50" even if the lending serial number is "0". may be sent.

Further, in the above example, if the dedicated interface recovers from the disconnection immediately after the gaming machine P transmits the gaming machine information notification after the dedicated interface is disconnected and the rental unit does not receive the gaming machine information notification, The lending unit may transmit the lending notification due to receiving the count notification transmitted from the gaming machine P, or the lending unit may transmit from the gaming machine P because it has not received the gaming machine information notification. The rental notification may be transmitted after receiving the counting notification after receiving the next game machine information notification without transmitting the rental notification after the counting notification.

A communication error during counting between the game machine P and the rented unit will be described with reference to FIG.

<Communication error during counting>
A case will be described in which the rented unit does not receive the count notification sent from the gaming machine P to the rented unit. In this description, the situation before accepting the operation of the count switch P7 is the situation where the total score managed by the game medium number control board P16 is "200" and the lendable points managed by the lending unit is "20". do.

The gaming machine immediately after accepting the operation of the counting switch P7 provided in the gaming machine P under the condition that the gaming machine P and the lending unit have been started and the gaming machine P and the lending unit can communicate with each other. At the timing of transmitting the information notification to the lending unit, the serial number "n" and the total score "200" are transmitted as the gaming machine information notification, and the count serial number "m" and the count point "50" are transmitted as the counting notification. In addition, when the processing related to the counting is the first processing related to counting after the game machine P is completely activated, the counting cumulative point “50” is transmitted as the counting notification. Note that the gaming machine P subtracts the count points from the total score stored in the total score storage area before executing the process of transmitting the count notification.

Subsequently, when the lending unit receives the count notification, it updates the lendable points to "70" and transmits the lending serial number "k" and the lending point "0" to the game machine P as the lending notification (when the lending button is operated). (because it is not). Also, when the gaming machine P receives a rental notification from the rental unit, it checks the consistency between the information indicated by the rental notification and the information indicated by the previous rental notification.

Subsequently, after the gaming machine P receives the lending notification, it sends the lending serial number “k” and the lending point receipt result “normal” to the lending unit as a lending receipt result response (the information indicated by the lending notice and the previous lending notice are If the result of checking the consistency with the indicated information is normal).

Subsequently, the gaming machine P transmits the serial number “n+1” and the total score “150” as the gaming machine information notification, and then the gaming machine P transmits the counting serial number “m+1”, the counting point “50”, and the cumulative counting point “150” as the counting notification. 100” but the lending unit does not receive the count notification, the lending unit does not send the lending notification. When the lending unit does not receive the count notification even after 300 ms have passed since the game machine information notification was received, the VL signal and the PSI signal are turned OFF. In this case, the lending unit determines that an error has occurred in communication with the game machine P, and the same operation as the recovery sequence described above is performed. In order to recover from the disconnected state, it is conceivable that the hall clerk operates the error release switch of the rental unit or the initialization switch of the rental unit.

Further, even after the lending unit determines that an error has occurred in the communication with the gaming machine P and the lending unit turns off the VL signal and the PSI signal, the gaming machine P repeats transmission of the gaming machine information notification and the counting notification. . In this case, the serial number as the gaming machine information notification and the counting serial number as the counting notification are updated and then transmitted to the rented unit (the rented unit cannot receive them). If the counting switch P7 continues to be pressed even after the lending unit has turned off the VL signal and the PSI signal, the gaming machine P will also Since the operation of the counting switch P7 is invalidated due to the VL signal being turned OFF, 0 is sent as the counting point as a counting notification.

A communication error between the gaming machine P and the rental unit during rental will be described with reference to FIG.

<Communication error during rental>
A case where the rental unit transmits a rental notification to the gaming machine P will be described. In this description, it is assumed that the total score managed by the game medium number control board P16 is "10" and the lendable points managed by the lending unit is "100" as the situation before accepting the operation of the lending button. .

When the gaming machine P and the lending unit have been activated and the gaming machine P and the lending unit can communicate with each other, when the operation of the lending button provided on the lending unit is accepted, the gaming machine P A serial number "n" and a total score of "10" are transmitted as the gaming machine information notification, and a counting serial number "m" and a counting point "0" are transmitted as the counting notification. Then, at the timing of transmitting the lending notification to the game machine P when the counting point included in the counting notification is "0", the lending serial number "k" and the lending point "50" are transmitted as the lending notification.

Subsequently, the lending unit updates the lendable points to "50" when sending the lending notification. The timing at which the lending unit updates the lendable points may be the timing at which the lending acceptance result response is received.

Subsequently, after the gaming machine P receives the lending notification, it sends the lending serial number “k” and the lending point receipt result “normal” to the lending unit as a lending receipt result response (the information indicated by the lending notice and the previous lending notice are If the result of checking the consistency with the indicated information is normal).

Subsequently, the gaming machine P updates the total score to "60" during the period from receiving the rental notification to transmitting the rental reception result response.

Subsequently, when the gaming machine P has transmitted the lending receipt result response but the lending unit has not received the lending receipt result response, the lending unit has not received the lending receipt result response after 10 ms or more have passed since the lending notification was sent. If so, it is determined that the rental is incomplete, and a value indicating that the rental is incomplete is stored in the rental information storage area provided in the rental unit.

Subsequently, the game machine P transmits the game machine information notification of the serial number “n+1” and the total score “60”, and transmits the count serial number “m+1” and the count point “0” as the count notification. Then, when the lending unit determines that the lending has not been completed in response to the previous lending notification, the lending serial number "k" and the lending point "50" are sent as the lending notification at the timing of transmitting the lending notification to the game machine P. to send. This lending notice has the same information as the lending notice sent last time.

Subsequently, when the gaming machine P receives the lending notification, if it is normal, it should have received the information of "k+1" as the lending serial number. As the lending receipt result response sent by P, the lending serial number "k" and the lending point receipt result response "abnormal" are sent to the lending unit.

Subsequently, since the lending serial number "k" of the lending notification sent when the lending unit received the lending receipt result response matches the lending serial number "k" of the lending receipt result response received, the lending unit It is determined that the notification has normally arrived at the game machine P, and a value indicating the completion of lending is stored in the lending information storage area provided in the lending unit.

<Error type>
Errors and states of the gaming machine P that can be determined in the present embodiment include input abnormality, settlement abnormality, payout abnormality, communication abnormality, total score upper limit abnormality, total score threshold reaching state, rental device connection abnormality, rental serial number There are anomaly, rented device communication error 1, rented device communication error 2, rented device communication error 3, rented device communication error 4, rented device communication error 5, rented device communication error 6, and rented device communication error 7.

Insertion abnormality is an abnormality detected by the main control board P15, and is an insertion request command sent by the main control board P15 to the game medium number control board P16 (managed by the game medium number control board P16 when the bet switch is operated). A command for confirming whether or not the number of bets from the total score can be given to the entry point managed by the main control board P15) and a reply waiting command (insertion request acceptance command) received by the main control board P15 from the game medium number control board P16 , or input request unacceptable command) do not match, it is determined as an E1 error, and a display corresponding to "E1" is displayed in the number display section. If an E1 error occurs, it can be canceled when the setting/reset switch operation is accepted. Even if the E1 error is cleared, the input request command is not resent. When an E1 error occurs, as processing for stopping the progress of the game, invalidation of the bet, invalidation of the operation of the start switch P3, invalidation of the operation of the stop switch P4, and invalidation of the settlement are all or partially performed.

Further, when an E1 error occurs, the main control board P15 transmits an E1 error command to the sub control board P12, thereby notifying the error by means of an image display device or a lamp. When the E1 error is canceled, the main control board P15 transmits an error cancellation command to the sub-control board P12, and when the sub-control board P12 receives the error cancellation command, the E1 error notification is terminated. When the sub-control board P12 receives the error cancellation command, the E1 error notification may not be terminated immediately, but may be terminated after a predetermined period of time.

The settlement abnormality is an abnormality detected by the main control board P15, and includes a settlement request command transmitted by the main control board P15 to the game medium number control board P16 and a reply waiting command received by the main control board P15 from the game medium number control board P16. If the (settlement request acceptance command or settlement request unacceptable command) do not match, it is determined as an E2 error, and a display corresponding to "E2" is made in the given number display section. If an E2 error occurs, it can be canceled when the setting/reset switch operation is accepted. Even if the E2 error is cleared, the settlement request command is not resent. When the E2 error occurs, as a process for stopping the progress of the game, some or all of invalidating the bet, invalidating the operation of the start switch P3, invalidating the operation of the stop switch P4, and invalidating the settlement is performed.

Also, when an E2 error occurs, the main control board P15 transmits an E2 error command to the sub-control board P12, thereby notifying the error by means of an image display device or a lamp. When the E2 error is canceled, the main control board P15 transmits an error cancellation command to the sub-control board P12, and when the sub-control board P12 receives the error cancellation command, the E2 error notification is terminated. When the sub-control board P12 receives the error cancellation command, the E2 error notification may not be terminated immediately, but may be terminated after a predetermined period of time.

The payout abnormality is an abnormality detected by the main control board P15, and includes a payout request command sent by the main control board P15 to the game medium number control board P16 and a reply waiting command received by the main control board P15 from the game medium number control board P16. If the (payout request acceptance command or payout request unacceptable command) do not match, an E3 error is assumed, and a display corresponding to "E3" is made in the given number display section. If an E3 error occurs, it can be canceled when the setting/reset switch operation is accepted. Even if the E3 error is canceled, the payout request command is not resent. Then, when the E3 error occurs, some or all of bet invalidation, invalidation of start switch P3 operation, invalidation of stop switch P4 operation, and invalidation of settlement are performed as processing for stopping the progress of the game.

Further, when an E3 error occurs, the main control board P15 transmits an E3 error command to the sub control board P12, thereby notifying the error by means of an image display device or a lamp. When the E3 error is canceled, the main control board P15 transmits an error cancellation command to the sub-control board P12, and when the sub-control board P12 receives the error cancellation command, the E3 error notification is terminated. When the sub-control board P12 receives the error cancellation command, the E3 error notification may not be terminated immediately, but may be terminated after a predetermined period of time.

In the event of an insertion error, an adjustment error, or a payout error, the game medium number control board P16 outputs an insertion request unacceptable command, an adjustment request unacceptable command, or a payout request unacceptable command to the main control board P15, respectively. Although the above example has been described above, the same command may be used as the input request unacceptable command, the settlement request unacceptable command, or the payout request unacceptable command. For example, the game medium number control board P16 outputs the same unacceptable command regardless of whether the insertion abnormality, settlement abnormality, or payout abnormality occurs.

The communication abnormality is an abnormality detected by the main control board P15, and when the game media number control board P16 transmits a communication abnormality command to the main control board P15 and the main control board P15 receives the communication abnormality command, the communication abnormality is determined. . Communication error does not display an error on the number display unit. It is possible to automatically release the communication error without any operation to release it. Then, when a communication abnormality occurs, the progress of the game is not stopped.

Also, when a communication error occurs, the main control board P15 transmits a command for controlling the number of game media to the sub control board P12, thereby notifying the error by means of an image display device or a lamp. Even after the communication abnormality is automatically canceled, the notification of the communication abnormality is not terminated immediately, but is terminated after a predetermined period of time. The game media count control notification command is a command that the main control board P15 sends to the sub control board P12 for each interrupt. This command notifies the sub-control board P12 of the state of the gaming machine.

The total score upper limit abnormality is an abnormality detected by the game medium number control board P16. When the total score managed by the game medium number control board P16 reaches the upper limit value (16383), the total score upper limit abnormality is detected. Total score upper limit abnormality does not perform error display on the number display part of giving. In order to cancel the total score upper limit abnormality, the counter switch P7 provided in the game machine P is operated to perform counting processing, and the total score can be canceled when the total score falls below the upper limit value of 16383. . When the total score upper limit is abnormal, as a process for stopping the progress of the game, the bet invalidation, the operation of the start switch P3 invalidation, the operation of the stop switch P4 invalidation, and the settlement invalidity are partially or entirely disabled. conduct. When the total score reaches the upper limit, the score exceeding the upper limit is not stored.

Next, a method for preventing the game media number control board P16 from storing the total score exceeding the upper limit value will be described using the score giving process (also referred to as payout process) in the main control board P15 shown in FIG. do.

Note that the score giving process is a process executed after judging the combination of symbols stopped on the activated line and determining the points to be given based on the judgment result. For example, this processing is executed after it is determined that a predetermined symbol combination capable of giving 8 points has been stopped and displayed on the activated line, and after 8 is stored in the given point storage area, which will be described later.

In "Give points?", the main control board P15 determines whether or not there are points to be given (whether or not the combination of symbols to which points can be given is stopped and displayed). becomes NO. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the assigned point storage area, which is a storage area capable of storing assigned points provided in the RWM area of the main control board P15, is "0". If it is determined that the value in the given point storage area is "0", the answer to the question "Score given?" is NO, and the score given process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value in the given point storage area is not "0", the answer to "Score given?" is YES.

In the "score giving time elapsed?", it is determined whether or not the value stored in the score giving timer area, which will be described later, is "0". If the value stored in the score giving timer area is "0", the result is YES, and if the value stored in the score giving timer area is not "0", the result is NO. This is a process of looping until the value stored in the score award timer area becomes "0" (in other words, delaying the "set of the award request command", which will be described later). Note that an initial value (“27” in this embodiment) is stored in the score giving timer area by “saving score giving time”, which will be described later.

In "save point giving time", "27" is stored in the point giving timer area provided in the RWM area of the main control board P15. Here, the value stored in the score giving timer area is configured to be updated according to the execution of a timer interrupt on the main control board P15 side (for example, when one timer interrupt process is executed). is configured to decrement by 1 when the Note that the timer interrupt on the main control board P15 side is configured to be executed at a period of about 2.235 ms. Therefore, storing "27" in the score giving timer area is synonymous with storing a time corresponding to approximately 60 ms. Further, even if timer interrupt processing is executed when "0" is stored in the score giving timer area, the value of the score giving timer area maintains "0".

In this way, by setting the processing order of “score grant time passed?”→“score grant time save”, the “grant request command set” process, which will be described later, is executed at predetermined intervals when a plurality of points are awarded. The Rukoto. For example, when the number of points to be given is "8", the (first) "arrangement request command set" corresponding to the first point is before "27" is stored in the score provision timer area. This is done in a situation where "0" is stored in the timer area. Therefore, standby processing based on the score giving timer is not executed. Therefore, the main control board P15 can cause the game medium number control board P16 to quickly execute the processing for adding the first point to the total score.

On the other hand, for the ``grant request command set'' corresponding to the 2nd to 8th points, ``27'' is stored in the scoring timer area by ``saving scoring time'', and ``0'' is stored in the ``scoring timer area?''. It becomes executable after In other words, the “addition request command set” corresponding to the second to eighth points can be executed at a rate of about once every 60 ms. In other words, updating of the total score in the game media count control board P16 based on the "grant request command set" can be executed approximately every 60 ms, and updating of the display of the game media count display section P9 capable of displaying the total score can also be performed approximately It can be updated every 60ms. By configuring in this manner, the player can visually recognize how the total score displayed in the game medium number display portion P9 is updated by "1".

It should be noted that, unlike the above-described embodiment, the order may be set to "save point giving time"→"score giving time passed?". In this case, the main control board P15 executes standby processing for a time period corresponding to the score giving time (score giving timer), and then the game media number control board P16 reaches the total score. 1 point will be added. Further, in the present embodiment, "27" is stored in the score award timer area as "save score award time", but the total score displayed in the game medium number display portion P9 is updated by "1". An arbitrary numerical value (for example, a numerical value within the range of "10" to "200") may be stored so that the player can visually recognize the progress.

In the "grant request command set", a command for transmitting a grant request command indicating that one point is awarded from the main control board P15 to the game media number control board P16 is stored in the command buffer of the main control board P15. do. Commands stored in the command buffer of the main control board P15 are configured to be transmitted to the game medium number control board P16 by timer interrupt processing on the main control board P15 side. Therefore, the "set of award request command" is synonymous with transmission of an award request command indicating awarding of 1 point from the main control board P15 to the game medium number control board P16.

For example, when a symbol combination capable of awarding 8 points is stopped and displayed, an award request command indicating awarding of 1 point is transmitted eight times to the game medium number control board P16, thereby increasing the total score. Configured for updates. By configuring to update the total score one by one in this way, even if the total score exceeds the upper limit value (16383) when all the given points are added to the total score, the total score Points can be awarded up to the upper limit of points.

"Command reception" refers to receiving a response command from the game media count control board P16 after the main control board P15 has transmitted a grant request command indicating that one point of game media is to be awarded.

In this embodiment, at least the following two commands are provided as response commands from the game media count control board P16.
a) Giving permission command A command indicating that one point is to be added.
Specifically, when adding 1 point to the total score after the game media count control board P16 receives the award request command indicating that 1 point is to be awarded, the total score before addition exceeds the upper limit value. If the game media count control board P16 determines that there is no such, it transmits to the main control board P15 a grant permission command indicating that one point is to be added to the total score.
b) Giving refusal command Refers to a command indicating not to add 1 point.
Specifically, when adding one point to the total score after the game media number control board P16 receives the award request command indicating that one point is to be awarded, the total score before addition is the upper limit value. When the game media count control board P16 makes the determination, it transmits to the main control board P15 a grant refusal command indicating that one point cannot be added to the total score.

At "cannot be granted?", it is determined whether or not the command received from the game media number control board P16 is a grant refusal command. It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether or not the command received from the game media number control board P16 is the grant permission command, and if it is not the grant permission command, it may be determined as NO.

With this configuration, even if the game media number control board P16 receives the award request command indicating that one point is to be awarded in a situation where the total score has reached the upper limit, the game medium number control board P16 can be prevented from updating the total score. In addition, when the main control board P15 determines that "cannot be given (YES)" in the "cannot be given?" until all are counted), ``Score giving time passed?'', ``Score giving time saved'', ``Grant request command set'', ``Command received'', ``Cannot be given?'' It is not possible to make a bet, etc. to start. Even when such a loop situation occurs, the counting process is executed by the game media number control board P16 (the counting switch is operated to execute the counting process), and the total score is no longer the upper limit value. In this case, even in a loop situation, it becomes "NO" in the determination of "Is not possible?" In other words, even in a situation where the total score reaches the upper limit value "16383" during the score giving process (situation where some of the points to be given still remain), the score giving process does not end and the loop situation continues. will occur. Further, even in this loop situation, the counting process is executed by the operation of the counting switch by the player, so that the total score can be reduced below the upper limit "16383". That is, when the total score falls below the upper limit "16383", the score giving process can be exited from the loop state (NO at "Cannot be given?"), and the score giving process is restarted. With this configuration, even if the total score reaches the upper limit value "16383" in the middle of the score giving process, the score to be given will not be discarded, so that the player will not be disadvantaged. can be prevented.

Note that the loop situation described above is not limited to this. You can loop.

With "scoring data -1", 1 is subtracted from the value of the score storage area. For example, when "8" is stored as the value of the given point storage area, the value of the given point storage area becomes "7" by the processing. Also, when the value of the given point storage area is "1", the value of the given point storage area becomes "0" by the processing.

In the case of "end of giving points?", it is determined whether or not the value of the given point storage area is "0". If the value in the given point storage area is not "0", the process returns to "Time to give points?" and repeats the same processing as above. Then, when the value of the assigned point storage area is "0", the process ends.

By executing such a score giving process, it is possible to control the number-of-game-media control board P16 so as not to store the total score exceeding the upper limit value.

Also, if the process of awarding points one by one is performed at a high speed, the player will not be able to recognize that one point has been awarded one by one. Therefore, after giving 1 point, the score giving timer is set for 60.35 ms (for 27 interrupt processes), and every time 1 point is given, the timer is updated (the count value is decremented by "1"), and 60.35 ms has elapsed. 1 point is given again later. By configuring in this way, the player can recognize that one point has been paid out one by one, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In the above-described embodiment, the main control board P15 gives one score to the game media number control board P16, but the present invention is not limited to this, and they may be given all at once.

For example, when the main control board P15 gives 8 points as a score, it requests the game medium number control board P16 as an award request command whether or not 8 points can be added to the total score. The game media number control board P16 determines whether or not the total score plus 8 points exceeds the upper limit value (determines whether or not "total score + awarded points>16383" is YES), and determines whether or not the upper limit value is If it exceeds (if determined as YES), a command to the effect that 8 points cannot be added to the total score (equivalent to a grant refusal command) is sent to the main control board P15, and the main control board P15 adds 8 points to the total score. When a command to the effect that points cannot be added is received, a grant request command is sent to the game medium number control board P16 again to request whether or not 8 points can be added to the total score. Since there is no change in the total score, a command indicating that 8 points cannot be added to the total score is sent again. will do. That is, it is configured to loop until 8 points are added. By configuring in this way, the points to be given are not discarded, so that the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged.

Further, for example, when the main control board P15 gives 8 points as a score, it requests the game medium number control board P16 as an award request command whether or not 8 points can be added to the total score. The game media number control board P16 determines whether or not the total score plus 8 points exceeds the upper limit value (determines whether or not "total score + awarded points>16383" is YES), and determines whether or not the upper limit value is If not (determined as NO), a command to the effect that 8 points can be added to the total score (equivalent to a grant permission command) is transmitted to the main control board P15, and the game media number control board P16 controls the total score. 8 points are added to end the score giving process.

Further, when the total score upper limit abnormality occurs, the game media number control board P16 transmits information indicating that the total score upper limit abnormality has occurred to the main control board P15, and the main control board P15 transmits a game medium number control notification command to the sub control board P12. By doing so, an error is notified by an image display device or a lamp. Then, when the total score upper limit abnormality is canceled by the counting operation, the main control board P15 changes the bit corresponding to the total score upper limit abnormality of the game medium number control notification command to a normal value (for example, "0"). and transmits it to the sub-control board P12, so that the sub-control board P12 ends the notification. Incidentally, when the sub control board P12 receives the game media number control notification command, if the bit corresponding to the total score upper limit abnormality has been changed to a normal value, the notification is not stopped immediately, and after a predetermined time has been notified, Notification may be stopped.

The total score threshold reached state is a state detected by the game media count control board P16, and when the total score managed by the game media count control board P16 reaches a threshold before the upper limit (16383), the total score threshold is reached. state. An example of the threshold value is 15000, and any value (less than 16333) can be set as long as it is less than the upper limit of the total score (16383) minus the count value (50) for one run. The state of reaching the total score threshold value is not displayed in the number display section. In order to cancel the state of reaching the total score threshold value, the count switch P7 provided in the gaming machine P is operated to perform counting processing, and the total score can be canceled when the total score falls below the threshold value of 15000. .

When the total score reaches the threshold value of 15000 or more, the game medium number control board P16 turns on the overflow signal (the overflow signal rises). The overflow signal is kept ON until the total score falls below 15,000, and when the total score falls below 15,000, the game media count control board P16 turns the overflow signal OFF (the overflow signal falls). The game media count control board P16 transmits an overflow signal to the main control board P15, and when the main control board P15 determines that the overflow signal is ON, it outputs an overflow test signal to the test IF board. process for

When the overflow test signal is turned ON and output to the test IF board, the counter switch P7 connected to the test IF board is operated, so the overflow test signal is output ON. At the same time, the counting switch signal is ON and output (the counting switch is operated), and the counting process is executed.

As processing for outputting the overflow test signal, the main control board P15 turns ON the overflow test signal to be output to the test IF board, and stores the overflow test signal timer value (count value) in a predetermined storage area. The overflow test signal timer value is for managing the time to turn ON the overflow test signal, and the overflow test signal is maintained ON until the overflow test signal timer value is determined to be zero. Also, the main control board P15 stores the overflow test signal timer value when turning ON the overflow test signal. When the game media number control board P16 executes counting processing and the overflow signal turns OFF, and when the main control board P15 determines that the overflow signal has turned OFF (detects the fall of the overflow signal), The main control board P15 starts subtracting the stored overflow test signal timer value. That is, the overflow test signal remains ON until the overflow test signal timer value becomes 0 even after the overflow signal is turned OFF, and when the overflow test signal timer value becomes 0, the overflow test signal is turned OFF. Since the overflow test signal timer value is stored in the main control board P15 when the overflow signal is turned ON, it is determined that the overflow test signal timer value is not 0 even when the overflow signal is turned ON. Thus, the overflow test signal is turned ON. In other words, the overflow test signal is never turned OFF while the overflow signal is ON.

Further, the main control board P15 determines whether or not the overflow test signal timer value before subtraction is 0, and when determining that the overflow test signal timer value before subtraction is not 0, turns on the overflow test signal, When it is determined that the overflow test signal timer value before subtraction is 0, the overflow test signal is turned OFF. The main control board P15 sets the overflow test signal timer value when the overflow test signal is turned ON (it may be determined that the overflow signal is turned ON), and the timer value is set while the overflow signal is being output. is not subtracted, the counting switch signal is not turned OFF while the overflow signal is being output during the gaming machine test.

In the above example, the main control board P15 determines whether or not the overflow test signal timer value before subtraction is 0, and outputs the overflow test signal when determining that the overflow test signal timer value before subtraction is not 0. Although the embodiment in which it is ON has been described, this is not the only option, and it is determined whether or not the overflow test signal timer value after subtraction is 0, and when it is determined that the overflow test signal timer value after subtraction is not 0 The overflow test signal may be turned ON.

The main control board P15 stores, for example, 1209 (2702.115 ms) as the overflow test signal timer value stored when the overflow test signal is turned ON. This is because the interrupt processing interval of the main control board P15 is 2.235 ms, and 2702.115 ms elapses when the interrupt processing is executed 1209 times. Further, 2702.115 ms is the time required to transmit the gaming machine information notification nine times since the gaming medium number control board P16 transmits the gaming machine information notification to the lending unit at intervals of 300 ms. That is, when the game media number control board P16 turns on the overflow signal and the main control board P15 turns on the overflow test signal, the count switch signal turns on and 50 is counted as the count point, and then the game media number control board P16. After the total score fell below the threshold value of 15000 and the overflow signal was turned OFF by the game media count control board P16, the overflow test signal was turned ON for 1209 interrupt processing times of the main control board P15. , the count switch can be maintained ON for 2702.115 ms, so that 450 points are counted with the gaming machine information notification being counted for 9 times. Therefore, when the test IF board and the main control board P15 are connected (when the game machine test is being performed), when the game media number control board P16 turns ON the overflow signal once, the count switch signal is also turned ON. By turning ON, in addition to one counting process (50 count points) that is executed when the overflow signal is turned ON, the counting process can be executed nine times even after the overflow signal is turned OFF. 500 points will be counted. As a result, 500 points can be subtracted from the total score after the total score reaches 15000 points or more during the game machine test, thereby preventing the overflow signal from turning ON immediately after the overflow signal has turned OFF. Even if the gaming machine under test is in an advantageous state such as AT, the frequency of performing counting processing due to the total score reaching 15000 points or more is reduced, so malfunction of the gaming machine P It is possible to reduce the output frequency of error sounds during the machine test.

Note that the overflow test signal timer value is not limited to the value described above, and may be any value longer than or equal to the time (300 ms or longer) for transmitting the gaming machine information notification once. In other words, when updating (subtracting) the interrupt overflow test signal timer value, any value of 135 or more may be stored as the overflow test signal timer value.

In the above example, the main control board P15 updates the timer value of the overflow test signal every interrupt, but the present invention is not limited to this. Timer values may be updated. In this embodiment, the overflow test signal timer value can be reduced. For example, when the main control board P15 updates the overflow test signal timer value once every 5 interrupts, 242 is stored as the overflow test signal timer value. In this case, it is possible to set the overflow test signal ON time to 2704.35 ms while keeping the overflow test signal timer value within 1 byte.

In addition, since the game machine P is capable of progressing the game (bet processing, internal lottery processing based on the operation of the start switch P3, stop control processing based on the operation of the stop switch P4, etc.) even during the counting process, A game machine test is not interrupted even if counting processing is executed in a total score threshold reached state during the test. Therefore, the gaming machine test can be executed smoothly.

Further, when the total score threshold reached state occurs, the game media count control board P16 transmits information indicating that the total score threshold reached state is reached to the main control board P15, and the main control board P15 sends a game media count control notification command to the sub control board P12. is transmitted, the status is notified by the image display device or the lamp. Then, when the total score threshold reached state is canceled by the counting operation, the main control board P15 sets the bit corresponding to the total score threshold reached state of the game media count control notification command to a value (for example, "0") that is normal. , and transmits it to the sub-control board P12, thereby ending the status notification of the sub-control board P12. When the sub-control board P12 receives the game media number control notification command, if the bit corresponding to the total score threshold reached state is changed to a normal value, the notification is not stopped immediately but is notified for a predetermined time. You may stop alerting|reporting later.

In the above-described embodiment, the bit positions of the total score upper limit abnormality and the total score threshold reached state of the game media count control notification command transmitted from the main control board P15 to the sub control board P12 are different, but the same bit positions are used. can be managed by In this case, the sub-control board P12 cannot change the effect based on the received game media number control notification command even if the total score upper limit is abnormal or the total score threshold is reached (the same mode of effect is executed). is done). However, regarding the effect of prompting the operation of the counting switch P7 regardless of whether the total score upper limit is abnormal or the total score threshold reached state, the sub control board P12 distinguishes between the total score upper limit abnormality and the total score threshold reached state. It is possible to run without it. Also, since the number of information transmitted by the main control board P15 is reduced, the program capacity can be reduced.

The notification mode by the sub control board P12 in the above-described total score upper limit abnormality and the total score threshold reached state is the same mode (specifically, the bit position of the total score upper limit abnormality and the total score threshold reached state in the game media number control notification command is It may be the same case, or even if it is a different bit position, the same mode may be notified by the judgment of the sub control board P12), or a different mode (specifically, the total score upper limit abnormality in the game media number control notification command). The bit position of the total score threshold reaching state is a different bit position, and a different mode of notification is performed depending on the judgment of the sub control board P12. In the case of reaching the score threshold value, the number of game media control notification command 2 may be transmitted, etc.). If the reporting mode is the same mode, for example, "Please operate the counting switch" may be displayed on the image display device. The value has been reached. Please operate the counting switch." is displayed on the image display device, and when the total score threshold is reached, the upper limit is reached in XX points. Please operate the counting switch. ” may be displayed on the image display device. When displaying the score up to the total score upper limit in the total score threshold reached state, the main control board P15 or the game medium number control board P16 calculates the total score upper limit minus the current total score and transmits it to the sub control board P12. Alternatively, the current total score information received by the sub control board P12 may be used to calculate the total score upper limit minus the current total score.

In addition, when the notification mode by the sub control board P12 in the total score upper limit abnormality and the total score threshold reached state is the same mode, the same notification mode is used from the total score reaching the threshold value (15000) to the upper limit value reaching (16383). Since the total score is notified in advance from reaching the threshold value to reaching the upper limit value, the notification mode does not suddenly change or the notification is not given when the upper limit value is reached. As a result, the player is notified in advance and the notification mode does not change even after reaching the upper limit value, so that even if points exceeding the upper limit value are given as a result of winning, the players are not thought to have lost the excess. (makes it look like there is no urgency).

It should be noted that although the game can be progressed when the total score threshold is reached, the game cannot be progressed when the total score upper limit is abnormal (because the score giving process is looped).

Also, when the total score reaches the threshold value (15000) to the upper limit value (16383), the lending reception result response sent to the lending unit is abnormal.

The rental device connection abnormality is an abnormality detected by the game medium number control board P16. When the VL signal between the game medium number control board P16 and the rental unit is turned OFF, the rental device connection abnormality is determined. No error display is made on the number display section for the connection error of the rented device. In order to cancel the rental device connection abnormality, the connection with the rental unit becomes normal and the VL signal is turned ON. Then, when the lending device connection abnormality occurs, the progress of the game is not stopped. However, since communication with the rented unit is not possible, the counting process based on the acceptance of the counting operation may be invalidated by the gaming machine P, the acceptance of the counting operation itself may be invalidated, or the counting may not be invalidated. may

In addition, when a rented device connection abnormality occurs, the game medium number control board P16 transmits information indicating that the rented device connection is abnormal to the main control board P15, and the main control board P15 transmits a game medium number control notification command to the sub control board P12. By doing so, an error is notified by an image display device or a lamp. Then, when the lending device connection abnormality is canceled due to the VL signal turning ON, the main control board P15 sets the bit corresponding to the communication abnormality of the game medium number control notification command to a value (for example, "0 ”) and transmits it to the sub-control board P12, so that the sub-control board P12 terminates the notification. When the sub-control board P12 receives the command for controlling the number of game media, if the bit corresponding to the communication abnormality has been changed to a normal value, the notification is not stopped immediately, but after a predetermined period of time, the notification is started. You can stop.

The lending serial number abnormality is an abnormality detected by the game medium number control board P16, and if the lending serial number received from the lending unit is not a value obtained by adding 1 to the previously received lending serial number, it is regarded as a lending serial number abnormality. If there is an abnormality in the lending serial number, no error is displayed in the assigned number display section. In order to cancel the lending serial number abnormality, it is possible to cancel by receiving a normal lending notice from the lending unit. The progress of the game is not stopped when the lending serial number abnormality occurs, but the progress of the game may be stopped when the lending serial number abnormality is detected more than a predetermined number of times. When stopping the progress of the game, some or all of bet invalidation, invalidation of the operation of the start switch P3, invalidation of the operation of the stop switch P4, and invalidation of the settlement are performed.

Further, when an abnormality in the lending serial number occurs, the game medium number control board P16 transmits information indicating that the lending serial number is abnormal to the main control board P15, and the main control board P15 transmits a game medium number control notification command to the sub control board P12. , an error is reported by an image display device or a lamp. Then, when the lending serial number abnormality is canceled by transmitting a normal lending notification from the lending unit, the main control board P15 sets a value (for example, , "0") and transmits it to the sub-control board P12, so that the sub-control board P12 terminates the notification. When the sub-control board P12 receives the command for controlling the number of game media, if the bit corresponding to the communication abnormality has been changed to a normal value, the notification is not stopped immediately, but after a predetermined period of time, the notification is started. You can stop.

Rental device communication error 1 is an abnormality detected by the game media number control board P16. Communication error 1 is assumed. In the case of rental device communication error 1, an error display is not performed on the number display section. In order to cancel the rental device communication error 1, it can be canceled by receiving the rental serial number "0" from the rental unit. The progress of the game is not stopped when the rented device communication abnormality 1 occurs, but the progress of the game may be stopped when the rented device communication abnormality 1 is detected more than a predetermined number of times. When stopping the progress of the game, some or all of bet invalidation, invalidation of the operation of the start switch P3, invalidation of the operation of the stop switch P4, and invalidation of the settlement are performed.

Further, when the rented device communication error 1 occurs, the game media number control board P16 transmits the information indicating that the rented device communication error 1 has occurred to the main control board P15, and the main control board P15 sends the game media number control notification command to the sub control board P12. is transmitted, the error is notified by the image display device or the lamp. Then, when the lending device communication error 1 is canceled by transmitting the lending serial number "0" from the lending unit, the main control board P15 sets the bit corresponding to the communication error in the game medium number control notification command to normal. By changing it to a value (for example, "0") and transmitting it to the sub-control board P12, the sub-control board P12 terminates the notification. When the sub-control board P12 receives the command for controlling the number of game media, if the bit corresponding to the communication abnormality has been changed to a normal value, the notification is not stopped immediately, but after a predetermined period of time, the notification is started. You can stop.

The rental device communication error 2 is an abnormality detected by the game media number control board P16, and is regarded as the rental device communication error 2 when the rental notification is received within 100 ms from the previous reception of the rental notification. In case of rental device communication error 2, an error is not displayed in the given number display section. In order to cancel the rental device communication error 2, it is possible to cancel by receiving the rental serial number "0" from the rental unit or by receiving the rental notification within 100 ms or more and less than 500 ms from the previous reception of the rental notification. It's becoming The progress of the game is not stopped when the rented device communication abnormality 2 occurs, but the progress of the game may be stopped when the rented device communication abnormality 2 is detected more than a predetermined number of times. When stopping the progress of the game, some or all of bet invalidation, invalidation of the operation of the start switch P3, invalidation of the operation of the stop switch P4, and invalidation of the settlement are performed.

In addition, when the rented device communication error 2 occurs, the game media number control board P16 transmits the information that the rented device communication error 2 has occurred to the main control board P15, and the main control board P15 sends the game media number control notification command to the sub control board P12. is transmitted, the error is notified by the image display device or the lamp. Then, if the lending device communication error 2 is canceled by receiving the lending serial number "0" from the lending unit or by receiving the lending notification within 100 ms or more and less than 500 ms from the previous receipt of the lending notification, By the main control board P15 changing the bit corresponding to the communication abnormality of the game media number control notification command to a value (for example, "0") that becomes normal and transmitting it to the sub control board P12, the sub control board P12 notifies terminate. When the sub-control board P12 receives the command for controlling the number of game media, if the bit corresponding to the communication abnormality has been changed to a normal value, the notification is not stopped immediately, but after a predetermined period of time, the notification is started. You can stop.

The rental device communication error 3 is an abnormality detected by the game media number control board P16, and is regarded as the rental device communication error 3 when 500 ms have elapsed since the previous rental notification was received when the rental notification was received. In case of rental device communication error 3, an error is not displayed in the given number display section. In order to cancel the rental device communication error 3, it is possible to cancel by receiving the rental serial number "0" from the rental unit or by receiving the rental notification within 100 ms or more and less than 500 ms from the previous reception of the rental notification. It's becoming The progress of the game is not stopped when the rental device communication error 3 occurs, but the progress of the game may be stopped when the rental device communication error 3 is detected more than a predetermined number of times. When stopping the progress of the game, some or all of bet invalidation, invalidation of the operation of the start switch P3, invalidation of the operation of the stop switch P4, and invalidation of the settlement are performed.

Also, when the rented device communication error 3 occurs, the game media number control board P16 transmits the information indicating that the rented device communication error 3 has occurred to the main control board P15. is transmitted, the error is notified by the image display device or the lamp. Then, when the lending device communication error 3 is canceled because the lending serial number "0" is received from the lending unit or the lending notification is received within 100 ms or more and less than 500 ms from the previous receipt of the lending notification, By the main control board P15 changing the bit corresponding to the communication abnormality of the game media number control notification command to a value (for example, "0") that becomes normal and transmitting it to the sub control board P12, the sub control board P12 notifies terminate. When the sub-control board P12 receives the command for controlling the number of game media, if the bit corresponding to the communication abnormality has been changed to a normal value, the notification is not stopped immediately, but after a predetermined period of time, the notification is started. You can stop.

The rental device communication error 4 is an abnormality detected by the game medium number control board P16, and is regarded as the rental device communication error 4 when the rental notification is received within 100 ms from the gaming machine information notification transmission. In case of rental device communication error 4, an error is not displayed in the given number display section. In order to cancel the rental device communication error 4, it is possible to cancel by receiving the rental serial number "0" from the rental unit or by receiving the rental notification within 100 ms or more and less than 300 ms from the transmission of the game machine information notification. It's becoming The progress of the game is not stopped when the rental device communication abnormality 4 occurs, but the progress of the game may be stopped when the rental device communication abnormality 4 is detected more than a predetermined number of times. When stopping the progress of the game, some or all of bet invalidation, invalidation of the operation of the start switch P3, invalidation of the operation of the stop switch P4, and invalidation of the settlement are performed.

Further, when the rented device communication error 4 occurs, the game media number control board P16 transmits information indicating that the rented device communication error 4 has occurred to the main control board P15. is transmitted, the error is notified by the image display device or the lamp. Then, when the rental device communication error 4 is canceled by receiving the rental serial number "0" from the rental unit or by receiving the rental notification within 100 ms or more and less than 300 ms from the transmission of the game machine information notification, By the main control board P15 changing the bit corresponding to the communication abnormality of the game media number control notification command to a value (for example, "0") that becomes normal and transmitting it to the sub control board P12, the sub control board P12 notifies terminate. When the sub-control board P12 receives the command for controlling the number of game media, if the bit corresponding to the communication abnormality has been changed to a normal value, the notification is not stopped immediately, but after a predetermined period of time, the notification is started. You can stop.

The rental device communication error 5 is an abnormality detected by the game medium number control board P16, and is regarded as the rental device communication error 5 when 300 ms has elapsed since the gaming machine information notification was sent when the rental notification was received. In the case of rental device communication error 5, no error display is performed on the display of the number of grants. In order to cancel the rental device communication error 5, it is possible to cancel by receiving the rental serial number "0" from the rental unit, or by receiving the rental notification within 100 ms or more and less than 300 ms from the transmission of the game machine information notification. It's becoming The progress of the game is not stopped when the rented device communication error 5 occurs, but the progress of the game may be stopped when the rented device communication error 5 is detected more than a predetermined number of times. When stopping the progress of the game, some or all of bet invalidation, invalidation of the operation of the start switch P3, invalidation of the operation of the stop switch P4, and invalidation of the settlement are performed.

In addition, when the rented device communication error 5 occurs, the game media number control board P16 transmits information indicating that the rented device communication error 5 has occurred to the main control board P15, and the main control board P15 sends a game medium number control notification command to the sub control board P12. is transmitted, the error is notified by the image display device or the lamp. Then, if the rental device communication error 5 is canceled by receiving the rental serial number "0" from the rental unit or by receiving the rental notification within 100 ms or more and less than 300 ms from the transmission of the gaming machine information notification, By the main control board P15 changing the bit corresponding to the communication abnormality of the game media number control notification command to a value (for example, "0") that becomes normal and transmitting it to the sub control board P12, the sub control board P12 notifies terminate. When the sub-control board P12 receives the command for controlling the number of game media, if the bit corresponding to the communication abnormality has been changed to a normal value, the notification is not stopped immediately, but after a predetermined period of time, the notification is started. You can stop.

The rented device communication error 6 is an abnormality detected by the game media number control board P16. In case of rental device communication error 6, no error display is performed on the number display unit. In order to cancel the lending device communication error 6, it is possible to cancel by receiving the lending serial number "0" from the lending unit or by receiving a value of 50 or less for the lending point when the lending notice is received. . The progress of the game is not stopped when the rented device communication abnormality 6 occurs, but the progress of the game may be stopped when the rented device communication abnormality 6 is detected more than a predetermined number of times. When stopping the progress of the game, some or all of bet invalidation, invalidation of the operation of the start switch P3, invalidation of the operation of the stop switch P4, and invalidation of the settlement are performed.

Also, when the rented device communication error 6 occurs, the game media number control board P16 transmits information indicating that the rented device communication error 6 has occurred to the main control board P15, and the main control board P15 sends a game medium number control notification command to the sub control board P12. is transmitted, the error is notified by the image display device or the lamp. Then, when the lending device communication error 6 is canceled by receiving a lending serial number "0" from the lending unit or by receiving a value of 50 or less for the lending point when the lending notification is received, the main control board P15 changes the bit corresponding to the communication abnormality of the game media number control notification command to a normal value (for example, "0") and transmits it to the sub control board P12, and the sub control board P12 terminates the notification. When the sub-control board P12 receives the command for controlling the number of game media, if the bit corresponding to the communication abnormality has been changed to a normal value, the notification is not stopped immediately, but after a predetermined period of time, the notification is started. You can stop.

The rented device communication error 7 is an abnormality detected by the game medium number control board P16. Communication error 7 is assumed. The lending device communication error 7 does not display an error in the given number display section. In order to cancel the rental device communication error 7, it is possible to cancel by receiving the rental serial number "0" from the rental unit or by transmitting the gaming machine information notification. The progress of the game is not stopped when the rented device communication abnormality 7 occurs, but the progress of the game may be stopped when the rented device communication abnormality 7 is detected more than a predetermined number of times. When stopping the progress of the game, some or all of bet invalidation, invalidation of the operation of the start switch P3, invalidation of the operation of the stop switch P4, and invalidation of the settlement are performed.

Also, when the rented device communication error 7 occurs, the game media number control board P16 transmits information indicating that the rented device communication error 7 has occurred to the main control board P15. is transmitted, the error is notified by the image display device or the lamp. When the lending device communication error 7 is canceled by receiving the lending serial number "0" from the lending unit or by transmitting the game machine information notification, the main control board P15 communicates the game medium number control notification command. By changing the bit corresponding to the abnormality to a normal value (for example, "0") and transmitting it to the sub-control board P12, the sub-control board P12 terminates the notification. When the sub-control board P12 receives the command for controlling the number of game media, if the bit corresponding to the communication abnormality has been changed to a normal value, the notification is not stopped immediately, but after a predetermined period of time, the notification is started. You can stop.

In the present embodiment, the above-described rental device connection abnormality, rental serial number abnormality, rental device communication abnormality 1, rental device communication abnormality 2, rental device communication abnormality 3, rental device communication abnormality 4, rental device communication abnormality 5, rental device communication Regarding the abnormality 6 and the rental device communication abnormality 7, information indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the sub control board P12 is transmitted, but information that can specify the type of abnormality is not transmitted. In addition, for rented device communication error 1, rented device communication error 2, rented device communication error 3, rented device communication error 4, rented device communication error 5, rented device communication error 6, and rented device communication error 7, the status display lamp There is one type of lighting mode, and it is configured so that the type of rental apparatus communication abnormality cannot be determined from the lighting mode of the status display lamp.

By configuring in this way, due to fraud, rental device connection abnormality, rental serial number abnormality, rental device communication abnormality 1, rental device communication abnormality 2, rental device communication abnormality 3, rental device communication abnormality 4, rental device communication abnormality 5, rental device communication abnormality 5 It is possible to make it difficult to confirm under what conditions the device communication error 6 and the rented device communication error 7 occur.

In addition, lending device connection error, lending serial number error, lending device communication error 1, lending device communication error 2, lending device communication error 3, lending device communication error 4, lending device communication error 5, lending device communication error 6, lending device communication Regarding the abnormality 7, information that can specify the type of abnormality may be transmitted to the sub-control board P12. With such a configuration, it is possible to manage the error history in the sub-control board P12.

In addition to the above-described abnormalities, the abnormalities detected by the game machine P include radio wave abnormalities (for example, abnormalities when the radio waves received by the game machine P are determined to be abnormal), random number abnormalities (for example, game machine P Abnormality when P determines that the random number used in internal lottery or AT lottery is abnormal), or setting value abnormality (for example, abnormality when the set value used in internal lottery or AT lottery is determined to be abnormal), etc. There is no problem even if anomalies are prepared.

Among the errors that can be detected by the main control board P15, there is an unrecoverable error that cannot be recovered even by operating the reset switch (can be recovered by initialization processing such as setting change). Unrecoverable errors are "when the power supply cannot be restored normally", "when the symbol combination display is abnormal when all reels are stopped", "when the set value is out of range", and "RCK for random number update". This occurs when an abnormality in the frequency of the clock input to the pin is detected, and when an abnormality in the internal random number update state is detected.

In addition, although an example has been described in which a command is sent to the sub control board P12 via the main control board P15 when an abnormality is detected in the game medium number control board P16, the game medium number control board P16 is not limited to this. and the sub control board P12 may be directly connected with a communication cable (harness, etc.), and commands may be transmitted from the game medium number control board P16 to the sub control board P12 without going through the main control board P15.

In addition, although a mode has been described in which notification of an error is performed by the given number display section, notification of an error may be performed by the game medium number display section P9.

Further, when an error command is received from the main control board P15 due to an error occurring in the main control board P15 or the game medium number control board P16, the sub control board P12 receives the received time and the contents of the error. It may be configured to store in a predetermined storage area in association with the game state.

When storing the time, since an RTC (real time clock) is mounted on the sub control board P12, the time is stored in a predetermined storage area based on information from the RTC. A predetermined storage area is backed up by a backup power source and is configured not to be initialized when the power is turned off or turned on. Also, it is configured not to be initialized even when the settings are changed.

When the game state is stored, the content based on the command regarding the main game state (CZ, AT, etc.) from the main control board P15 and the content indicating that the game is being played based on the start start command or game end command are stored in a predetermined manner. store in the area. A predetermined storage area is backed up by a backup power source and is configured not to be initialized when the power is turned off or turned on. Also, it is configured not to be initialized even when the settings are changed.

The "receiving time", "error content", and "game status" stored in this way can be browsed by the operation of the gaming facility manager. For example, by pressing the reset button (reset switch) once while changing settings or checking settings, the administrator menu screen is displayed, and among the multiple items in the administrator menu screen, the "error history" item is selected. A mode of browsing by selection is conceivable. It should be noted that it is possible to accumulate and display a plurality of error contents in the error history item. In addition, if there are many error histories, the administrator can narrow down the viewing range by selecting the date range, error type, etc. so that the administrator can easily check the desired error history. configured as possible. Furthermore, if there are many error histories, even if it is configured to display one latest error history based on the current time, or a plurality of error histories out of the latest error histories based on the current time. good.

The method for displaying the administrator menu screen is not limited to pressing the reset button once during setting change or setting confirmation. It is conceivable that In other words, it is sufficient that the player is configured not to be able to display the administrator menu screen (so that it is difficult) and the administrator is configured to be able to display the administrator menu screen.

By configuring in this way, for example, it is possible to store information such as "an abnormal insertion occurred during game standby at XX year XX month XX day XX hour XX minutes XX seconds" in the sub control board P12. By selecting an error history item, the user can check the desired error history. In addition, you may display to "millisecond" as a display mode.

Further, the sub control board P12 may store the information related to the total score stored in the number-of-game-media control board P16 when storing the above-described error details. For example, the error content is an error related to rental notification, rental device connection error, rental serial number error, rental device communication error 1, rental device communication error 2, rental device communication error 3, rental device communication error 4, rental device communication error 5. , rental device communication error 6, and rental device communication error 7, a command related to the total score is transmitted to the main control board P15, and further transmitted from the main control board P15 to the sub control board P12. It is conceivable to associate and store errors and total score information.

With this configuration, the increase or decrease in the total score at the time of lending notification is stored, so even when the lending notification is fraudulent, the history can be stored in the sub-control board P12. It becomes possible. The errors to be stored in association with the total score are not limited to the errors described above, and all errors may be associated with information on the total score.

Further, the sub control board P12 may be configured to store history information not only when an error occurs but also when counting processing is performed. possible to remember. For example, when a counting switch is pressed and counting processing is executed, the counting points and the total score are associated and stored. Also, when the count switch is pressed for a long time and counting is performed continuously every 300 ms, all count information for every 300 ms is stored.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to store the entire history of the counting process, so when an abnormal numerical value is counted, it becomes possible to indicate the material for determining whether or not it is fraudulent.

Further, the sub control board P12 may be configured to store history information not only when an error occurs but also when a lending notice is received. can be considered. For example, upon receiving a lending notification, the lending points and the total score may be associated and stored. In other words, even if rental notifications are continuously received every 300 ms, all the rental notification information for each 300 ms may be stored.

Further, the sub control board P12 may be configured to store history information not only when an error occurs but also periodically. be done. For example, the game media number control board P16 periodically (for example, every 60 seconds, every 180 seconds, etc.) transmits the total score information to the main control board P15, and the main control board P15 transmits the received total score information to the sub control board P15. It is transmitted to the substrate P12, and the sub-control substrate P12 stores the received total score information and time information in association with each other.

With this configuration, the sub-control board P12 can periodically store the total score information, the time information, etc. in association with each other even when there is no event that triggers the storage of the history information, such as when an error occurs. , history information can be stored against frauds that do not use the counting switch or the lending switch, and the presence or absence of fraud can be determined based on this history information.

Further, the sub-control board P12 may independently determine an error even when it does not receive an error command. For example, it may be determined that an error occurs when a command related to rental notification or a command related to counting notification is received twice within 300 ms. This is because the communication between the game media number control board P16 and the lending unit is configured such that the lending notification or counting notification is received or sent once every 300 ms, and twice within 300 ms. This is because it can be said that the communication is not normal when it is received or transmitted twice.

In this case, the sub control board P12 sets a timer corresponding to 300 ms when it receives a command related to rental notification or a command related to counting notification from the main control board P15. If it is determined that the timing of receiving the command related to the notification is within 300ms, an error-suggesting notification (for example, "Please check the total score" is displayed on the LCD, or the lamp is changed to a lighting pattern corresponding to the abnormality. light it up, output an audio message saying "Abnormality detected", etc.). As a method for judging this abnormality, a timer corresponding to 300 ms is set for each command reception (if the interval of interrupt processing of the sub-control board P12 is 1 ms, the timer corresponding to 300 ms is set to a count value "299"), Periodically (for example, each interrupt) the timer is decremented and it is determined whether the timer is 0 when a command is received. It is conceivable that the state is determined to be abnormal at times. However, it is not limited to this mode, and a method of setting the initial value of the timer to 0 and adding the timer may be used.

By configuration in this way, for example, information such as "○ years ○ month ○ Sunday ○ hour ○ minutes ○ seconds, an abnormal number notifications occur during the game waiting, and the total number is 50 and the total score is 2000." can be stored in the sub control board P12, and even if the game media number control board P16 cannot transmit an error command due to fraud, the sub control board P12 can determine the error, so fraud can be prevented. machine can be provided.

Further, it is conceivable that the sub-control board P12 determines that there is an abnormality when it receives rental notifications a plurality of times (for example, 10 times) consecutively every 300 ms. If it is determined to be abnormal, a notification that suggests an abnormality (for example, "Please check the total score" is displayed on the liquid crystal, the lamp is lit in a lighting pattern corresponding to the abnormality, or "abnormality detected done”, etc.). By configuring in this way, even if the main control board P15 and the game medium number control board P16 do not determine that there is an abnormality, there is a possibility that the rental notification is being transmitted to the game machine P by an illegal method. Since the abnormality can be determined by the sub-control board P12, it is possible to prevent fraud and provide a safer gaming machine.

Next, counting processing will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

The count control start processing (synonymous with the count control processing described above) in FIG. 28 is mainly processing for outputting a count notification from the gaming machine to the lending unit. Specifically, it is one of the processes executed by the timer interrupt process of the game media number control board P16. The period of the timer interrupt processing of the game medium number control board P16 is 1 ms.

"Count notification timing?" determines whether or not it is time to output the count notification to the lending unit. Specifically, it is determined based on the value of a storage area (_TM_INF_CTL_A) for measuring gaming machine information notification timer A, which will be described later. When the value stored in the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer A is "200" (in other words, when 100 ms have passed since the gaming machine information notification was output), the count notification is sent to the lending unit. If the value stored in the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer A is not "200", it is determined to be NO.

"Clear medal count" clears (sets to 0) a count point storage area (_CT_CAL_VAL) which is an RWM area of the game medium number control board P16 and can store count points to be counted. Data stored in the count accumulation point storage area (_CT_CAL_ALL) capable of storing count accumulation points is not cleared at this timing.

“Clear counting flag” clears (sets to 0) a counting flag (_FL_CAL_EXE) indicating whether counting is in progress, which is the RWM area of the game medium number control board P16.

"VL abnormality flag ≠ 0?" determines whether or not the connection between the gaming machine and the rental unit is abnormal. Specifically, when the VL abnormality flag (_FL_VL_ABN), which is the RWM area of the game media number control board P16, is a value indicating normality (for example, "0"), NO is determined, and the VL abnormality flag indicates abnormality. If it is a value (for example, "FFh"), YES is determined. The VL abnormality flag is a flag that is updated by execution of timer interrupt processing of the game medium number control board P16, and when there is input data of the VL signal from the lending unit (the gaming machine and the lending unit are electrically connected). ), a value indicating normality is stored in the VL abnormality flag, and when there is no input data of the VL signal from the lending unit (when the gaming machine and the lending unit are not electrically connected), the VL A value indicating an abnormality is stored in the abnormality flag.

"Total score = 0?" determines whether or not the total score (total score) is 0 based on the total score storage area (_NB_MEDAL), which is the RWM area of the game media number control board P16 and can store the total score. . If the total score is 0 as a result of this determination, YES is determined. Also, when the total score is not 0 by this determination, it is determined as NO. Note that if it is determined that a value indicating an abnormality is stored in the VL abnormality flag, a count notification is output without determining the total score.

“Count execution flag=1?” determines whether the count execution flag is “1”. As described above, the counting execution flag is a flag for managing whether a short-pressing operation is accepted as the operation of the counting switch P7 or a long-pressing operation is accepted as the operation of the counting switch P7. For example, if a counting execution flag storage area (_FL_CAL_ACT) for managing the counting execution flag is provided in the RWM area of the game media number control board P16, and the value stored in the counting execution flag storage area is "0" (counting execution If the flag is 0), it indicates a situation in which it is not yet determined whether the short-pressing operation is accepted as the operation of the counting switch P7 or the long-pressing operation is accepted as the operation of the counting switch P7. ing. When the value stored in the counting execution flag storage area is "1" (when the counting execution flag is 1), it indicates a situation in which it is determined that a short press operation has been accepted as the operation of the counting switch P7. there is When the value stored in the counting execution flag storage area is "2" (when the counting execution flag is 2), it indicates a situation in which it is determined that a long press operation has been accepted as the operation of the counting switch P7. there is Therefore, if YES in the "counting execution flag=1?" is. Specifically, in order to determine whether the count execution flag is "1", the value stored in the count execution flag storage area is stored in the A register, and the value of the A register is compared with "1". As a result, if the values are the same, YES is determined. A detailed method of generating the counting execution flag will be described later in "Counting execution flag set".

“Count execution flag=0?” determines whether the count execution flag is “0”. Specifically, when the counting execution flag storage area is "0" (whether a short-pressing operation is accepted as the operation of the counting switch P7 or a long-pressing operation is accepted as the operation of the counting switch P7). If not determined), YES is determined.

"Counting point = 50 set" sets 50 as the counting point (specifically, stores 50 in the A register).

"Total score≧counting point?" performs an arithmetic process (subtraction arithmetic process) of comparing the total score with 50 (the value stored in the A register).

"Get Total Score" stores the total score in the A register. That is, this is the process of updating the value of the A register from "50" to "total score". This process is executed when it is determined NO by "total score≧counting point?", in other words, when it is determined that 50 is greater than the total score (when the total score is less than 50).

“Save count points” is a process of storing count points in a count point storage area (_CT_CAL_VAL), which is the RWM area of the game media number control board P16 and can store count points to be counted. Specifically, it is a process of storing the value of the A register in the counting point storage area. For example, if "counting execution flag=1?" is YES, the value of the A register is "1", so "1" is stored in the counting point storage area. Also, if the answer to "total score≧counting point?" is YES, the value of the A register is "50", so "50" is stored in the counting point storage area. Furthermore, if the result of "total score≧counting point?" is NO, the value of register A is "total score", so "total score" is stored in the counting point storage area. In this way, when a short press operation is accepted as an operation of the count switch P7, the count point can be derived using the value of the count execution flag storage area, thereby simplifying the processing ("1" as the count point). ”). Incidentally, when a short press operation is accepted as the operation of the count switch P7, a process of setting "1" as a count point may be executed without using the value of the count execution flag storage area.

As described above, when the short-press operation is accepted as the operation of the counting switch P7, the count point is "1", and when the long-press operation is accepted as the operation of the counting switch P7, the total score is 50 or more. When the count point is "50" and a long-press operation is accepted as the operation of the count switch P7, and the total score is less than 50, the count point becomes "total score". That is, the maximum number of points that can be counted at one time (with one count notification) is 50.

In the counting process, it is first determined whether or not the counting switch P7 has been operated (whether the counting execution flag is other than 0). It is also possible to determine whether or not the total score is 0, and not to determine whether or not the total score is 0 when the counting switch P7 is not operated.

In such a configuration, the situation where the total score is 0 is more likely to occur than the situation where the counting switch P7 is operated (the time period of occurrence is longer), so counting is performed first. By determining whether the switch P7 is operated or not, the processing time is shortened compared to determining whether or not the total score is 0 at the beginning.

"Total score update" stores the value obtained by subtracting the count points from the total score in the total score storage area. In other words, the total score is updated according to the counting points before outputting the counting notification.

"Update accumulated count points" is a count accumulated point storage area (_CT_CAL_ALL) which is an RWM area of the game medium number control board P16 and can store count accumulated points. Update the point storage area (_CT_CAL_ALL).

After that, the "counting flag set" sets the counting flag (_FL_CAL_EXE) (stores "FF") because it is decided that the counting point will be "1" or more. In other words, when the count point is "0", the counting flag is not set.

"Count notification output" outputs the count notification to the lending unit. Specifically, 0x07 is output as the message length, 0x02 is output as the command, and the count serial number is stored in the count serial number storage area (_NB_CAL_NUM) that stores the count serial number, which is the RWM area of the game media number control board P16. output the count serial number stored in the count point storage area (_CT_CAL_VAL) as the count point, and output the count point stored in the count point storage area (_CT_CAL_VAL) as the count point; Outputs the count accumulation points stored in the point storage area (_CT_CAL_ALL), and outputs the checksum value (1 byte) of the output various data.

"Update counting number" executes processing for updating the counting serial number (processing for adding 1). When the counting serial number is 255, the result of adding +1 is 0. Therefore, when it becomes 0 (when it is determined as 0), the processing of updating the counting serial number again (processing of adding 1) to run. In other words, when the counting serial number is 255, the counting serial number is updated to 1 by executing the processing for updating the counting serial number twice. Also, when the counting serial number is a value less than 255 (for example, 10), the result of executing the counting serial number updating process (adding +1) does not become 0, so the counting serial number updating process is executed only once. By doing so, the counting serial number can be updated (eg, 11).

"Counting execution flag clear" is a process of clearing (for example, 0) the value stored in the counting execution flag storage area. With this configuration, the value stored in the counting execution flag storage area can be set to an initial value (eg, 0) each time the counting control start process is executed (every 300 ms cycle). In other words, even when "0" is output as the count point of the count notification, such as when the VL abnormality flag is not 0 or when the total score is 0, it is stored in the count execution flag storage area. The value can be an initial value (eg 0). Note that in the counting control start process, the value of a timer area (counting execution timer storage area (_TM_CAL_ACT) described later) for measuring the time during which the counting switch is operated is not cleared.

Although each storage area is described as being provided in the RWM of the game medium number control board P16, in the case of a gaming machine P or the like that does not have the game medium number control board P16, the main control board A configuration that is provided for the RWM of P15 may be used.

Also, information based on the counting flag (_FL_CAL_EXE) is transmitted to the main control board P15. This allows the main control board P15 to know that counting is in progress. Further, for example, by transmitting information indicating that counting is in progress from the main control board P15 to the effect control board, the effect corresponding to the counting can be performed by the effect control board.

40 to 43, the mode of counting points depending on the timing of depression and separation of the counting switch will be described. Note that T1, T2, T3, T4, and T5 shown in FIGS. 40 to 43 all indicate count notification timings, and count notifications are transmitted to the lending unit every 300 ms. Also, in FIGS. 40 to 43, the count value for the long press is "50", but when the total score is less than 50 points, the total score value becomes the count value (for example, when the total score is 30 points). count value is "30").

FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the counting process executed when the counting switch is released from the state in which the counting switch is long pressed by the player before the counting notification timing.

In FIG. 40, the counting switch is pressed at the timing of S1, and the counting switch is released at the timing of S2 after 500 ms or more (after 700 ms have passed) for judging the long press. The counting execution flag becomes 2 at timing F1, 500 ms after S1, and becomes 0 at timing F2 (T4), which is the counting notification timing after timing S2.

In FIG. 40, the timing of T4 has not yet been reached at the timing of S2 when the count switch that has been pressed and held for 500 ms or more is released. Since counting processing (counting processing with a count value of "50") can be executed, it is possible to reflect the player's operation without wasting the pressing time from T3 to S2.

FIG. 41 illustrates the counting process executed when the counting switch is released from the state in which the counting switch is long-pressed by the player, and the counting switch is pressed and released again before the next count notification timing. It is a figure to do.

In FIG. 41, the counting switch is pressed at the timing of S1, and the counting switch is released at the timing of S2 after 500 ms or more (after 700 ms have passed) for judging the long press, before the next count notification timing T4. Then, the counting switch is pressed again at the timing of S3, and the counting switch is released at the timing of S4 before reaching T4. The counting execution flag is set to 2 at timing F1, 500 ms after S1, and is set to 0 at timing F2 (T4), which is the counting notification timing after timing S2.

In FIG. 41, the counting switch is briefly pressed (counting The switch is pressed at the timing of S3 and released at the timing of S4 after 50 ms), but the counting execution flag does not become 1 even at the timings of S3 and S4. 2 is maintained, and "50" is counted as the count value at the timing of T4. In this way, even if there is a short press after a long press, the count process by long press can be executed, so even if there is an erroneous operation or noise after the long press, the count value by long press can be sent to the rental unit at the count notification timing. becomes possible.

At timing T3 in FIG. 41, since the counting execution flag is set to 2 due to the long depression of the counting switch, "50" is counted as the count value. Then, since the counting switch continues to be pressed, the counting execution flag is temporarily set to 0 after outputting "50" as the counting value to the lending unit side at the timing of T3, and in the next interrupt process, the counting execution timer is set to " 500", the count execution flag is set to 2 again.

FIG. 42 illustrates the counting process executed when the counting switch is released from the state in which the counting switch is long-pressed by the player, and the counting switch is pressed and released again before the next count notification timing. It is a figure to do.

In FIG. 42, the count switch is pressed at the timing of S1, and the count switch is released at the timing of S2 after 500 ms or more (after 700 ms have passed) for judging the long press, and before the next count notification timing T4. At the timing of S3, the counting switch is pressed again at the timing of S3, and the counting switch is separated at the timing of S4 before reaching T5 across T4. The counting execution flag is set to 2 at timing F1, 500 ms after S1, and is set to 0 at timing F2 (T4), which is the counting notification timing after timing S2. In addition, the counting execution flag becomes 1 at the timing S4 when the counting switch is separated before 500 ms has elapsed from the timing S3, and the counting execution flag is set at the timing F4 (T5) which is the counting notification timing after the timing S4. = 0.

In FIG. 42, the counting switch is pressed briefly (counting The switch is pressed at the timing of S3 and released at the timing of S4 after 200 ms), but the counting execution flag maintains the counting execution flag=2 even at the timing of S3, and the counting is performed at the timing of T4. "50" is counted as a numerical value. Also, when the counting switch is released at timing S4, which is between timing T4 and timing T5, and 500 ms has not elapsed from S3, the counting switch that was pressed at timing S3 is briefly pressed. is satisfied, the count execution flag is set to 1 at the timing of S4 (F3), and "1" is counted as the count value at T5 of the count notification timing. In this way, even if there is a short press after a long press, the counting process by the long press can be executed, and if the time of the short press straddles the count notification timing, the counting process by the short press can be executed. Even when the player performs a short press after a long press, it is possible to execute counting processing of long presses and short presses, and control can be executed in accordance with the player's operation intention.

At timing T3 in FIG. 42, since the counting execution flag is set to 2 due to the long depression of the counting switch, "50" is counted as the count value. Then, since the counting switch continues to be pressed, the counting execution flag is temporarily set to 0 after outputting "50" as the counting value to the lending unit side at the timing of T3, and in the next interrupt process, the counting execution timer is set to " 500", the count execution flag is set to 2 again.

FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the counting process executed when the counting switch is released by the player at the timing of short pressing of the counting switch and the counting switch is pressed again before the next counting notification timing.

In FIG. 43, the counting switch is pressed at the timing of S1, the counting switch is separated at the timing of S2 after 50 ms has passed, and the counting switch is pressed again at the timing of S3 before the next count notification timing T4. , T3, and T4 before reaching T5, the counting switch is separated at the timing of S4. The counting execution flag becomes 1 at timing F1 50 ms after S1 (timing S2 when the counting switch is released 50 ms after the counting switch is pressed at timing S1), and the counting notification timing after timing S2. The counting execution flag=1 is maintained at the timing of S3 prior to the timing of T3, and the counting execution flag is set to 0 at the timing of T3 (F2). At timing T4, 300 ms after T3, the counting execution flag is set to 0 because 500 ms has not passed since timing S3 when the counting switch was pressed again and the counting switch is still pressed. ing. In addition, the counting execution flag is set to 2 at the timing of F3, which is 500 ms after the timing of S3 when the counting switch is pressed again, and the counting switch is separated from T4 until T5 elapses, so F4 (T5). At the timing of , the count execution flag is set to 0.

In FIG. 43, the counting switch pressed in S1 is released at S2, which is the timing of short pressing, and the counting switch is pressed again at timing S3, which is the time until T3, which is the next count notification timing. , At the timing of T3, the counting process of the count value "1" of the short press is executed, but since the counting of the counting execution timer is executed from the timing of S3 before reaching T3, the counting switch is turned off at the timing of S4. Even if they are separated from each other, the counting process of "50" can be executed as the count value at the timing of T5. In this way, even if there is a long press after a short press, the counting process by the short and long presses can be executed, and the counting execution timer for judging the long press starts from the pressing timing of the counting switch that becomes the long press. Since the button is counted, even if the player performs a long press after a short press, it is possible to execute the counting process of the long press and the short press. Since the starting point can be set to the timing S3 when the counting switch is pressed before the timing F2 when the short-press counting process is executed, the control can be executed in accordance with the player's operation intention.

Next, the effect during counting will be described.

As described above, when the counting switch P7 is operated and counting (when counting), by transmitting information based on the counting flag (_FL_CAL_EXE) to the main control board P15, the effect control board counts It is possible to produce a corresponding performance inside. Effects corresponding to the counting include effects using sounds and/or images.

In addition, as an effect corresponding to the counting, the length of the effect output according to the count point (referred to as one count point) counted by one operation (including long press operation etc.) of the count switch P7 can be different. In the case of such a configuration, since the length of the performance differs according to the amount of counting points based on the operation of the counting switch P7, it is possible to add joy to the act of counting the total points accumulated.

As described above, the maximum number of points that can be counted in one count notification (one cycle) is "50", and the cycle of outputting the count notification is about 0.3 seconds.

Below, the length of the effect due to the difference in the number of points counted by one operation of the count switch P7 (including a long press operation, etc.) will be exemplified.

Example 1) When the count point for one time is "25" Since the count point is greater than "0" and less than "50", an effect of about 0.3 seconds (0.3 seconds x 1) is uniformly executed. be. Note that the coefficient (here, x1) indicates the number of count notifications for counting all the count points. The same applies to the following.

Example 2) When the count point for one time is "50" Since the count point is "50", an effect of about 0.3 seconds (0.3 seconds x 1) is executed.

Example 3) When the count point for one time is "130" Since the count point is greater than "100" and less than "150", an effect of about 0.9 seconds (0.3 seconds x 3) is executed. Note that the coefficient (here, x3) indicates the number of count notifications for counting all the count points.

Example 4) When the count point for one time is "1480" Since the count point is greater than "1450" and equal to or less than "1500", an effect of about 9 seconds (0.3 seconds x 30) is executed. Note that the coefficient (here, x30) indicates the number of counting notifications for counting all the counting points.

Also, as an effect corresponding to the counting, it is possible to vary the type of effect output according to the number of points (total score) that can be counted by one operation of the counting switch P7. When configured in this manner, the type and/or length of the performance differs according to the amount of counting points based on the operation of the counting switch P7. becomes possible. In the case of such a configuration, for example, the information of the total score storage area (_NB_MEDAL) capable of storing the total score is transmitted to the main control means, and the number of points that can be counted by one operation of the counting switch P7 is calculated. (Total score) can be grasped by the main control board P15 and/or the performance control board.

For example, when the counting switch P7 is operated and counted when the total score is less than "500", the production A can be executed as a corresponding production during counting, and the total score is "500" or more. When the counting switch P7 is operated and counted when the total score is less than '1000', the performance B can be executed as a corresponding performance during counting, and when the total score is '1000' or more, the counting switch. When P7 is operated and counted, an effect C may be executed as a corresponding effect during counting.

Below, the difference in the number of points counted by one operation (including a long-pressing operation, etc.) of the counting switch P7 and the effect due to the difference in the total score will be exemplified.

Example 1) When the total score is "25" and the single counting point is "25" Since the total score is less than "500" and the counting point is greater than "0" and less than "50", it is uniformly 0 0. 3 seconds×1, which is about 0.3 seconds of the effect A, is executed. Note that the coefficient (here, x1) indicates the number of count notifications for counting all the count points.

Example 2) When the total score is "300" and the single counting point is "50" Since the total score is less than "500" and the counting point is "50," A 0.3 second effect A is executed. Note that the coefficient (here, x1) indicates the number of count notifications for counting all the count points.

Example 3) When the total score is "300" and the single counting point is "150" Since the total score is less than "500" and the counting point is greater than "100" and less than or equal to "150", 0.3 Effect A for about 0.9 seconds, which is seconds×3, is executed. Note that the coefficient (here, x3) indicates the number of count notifications for counting all the count points.

Example 4) When the total score is "700" and the single counting point is "150" Because the total score is "500" or more and less than "1000" and the counting point is greater than "100" and less than "150" , 0.3 seconds×3, which is approximately 0.9 seconds, is executed. Note that the coefficient (here, x3) indicates the number of count notifications for counting all the count points.

Example 5) When the total score is "700" and the single counting point is "700" Because the total score is "500" or more and less than "1000" and the counting point is greater than "650" and less than "700" , 0.3 seconds×14, about 4.2 seconds of effect B is executed. Note that the coefficient (here, x14) indicates the number of counting notifications for counting all the counting points.

Example 6) When the total score is "2000" and the single counting point is "700" Since the total score is "1000" or more and the counting point is greater than "650" and less than "700", 0.3 Effect C for about 4.2 seconds, which is seconds×14, is executed. Note that the coefficient (here, x14) indicates the number of counting notifications for counting all the counting points.

Example 7) When the total score is "2000" and the single counting point is "2000" Since the total score is "1000" or more and the counting point is greater than "1950" and less than "2000", 0.3 Effect C for about 12.0 seconds, which is seconds×40, is executed. Note that the coefficient (here, x40) indicates the number of count notifications for counting all the count points.

As described above, even if the count points are the same, the total score is different as in example 5) and example 6), so that the effects to be output can be controlled differently. In addition, even if the total score is the same, if the number of points for one round is different, the length of the effect to be output is controlled to be different even if the effect is the same as in example 6) and example 7). can do.

If the player does not operate the counting switch P7 while the total score is being counted (halfway through), the total score is not counted as in Example 6). One count may end. In other words, the player can once again enjoy the performance during counting by temporarily stopping the operation of the counting switch P7 after enjoying the performance during counting halfway and then operating the counting switch P7 again.

In this embodiment, one switch is provided as the counting switch P7, and "50" is set as the maximum counting point by the counting notification, but another counting switch P7 is provided for counting the total score collectively. may

Further, in the present embodiment, the specification is such that counting is performed when the counting switch P7 is operated. may count the total score.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the specification is such that counting is performed when the counting switch P7 is operated. It may be configured to count by a predetermined unit (for example, "50") when it is operated. Although 50 is used as the predetermined unit, this is an example. For example, if the count switch P7 is operated when the remaining total score is 38 points, "38" will be counted.

Here, in this embodiment, it is possible to perform counting based on the operation of the counting switch P7 even during the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. However, when the counting switch P7 is operated in a situation where points can be betted, an effect based on the operation of the counting switch P7 is executed during the setting change mode and/or during the setting confirmation mode. When the counting switch P7 is operated, the effect based on the operation of the counting switch P7 may not be executed. The reason for this configuration is that when the counting switch P7 is operated during the setting change mode and/or during the setting confirmation mode, there is a high possibility that the hall clerk is counting (game (because it is highly likely that they are not

In other words, even if the counter switch P7 is operated during the setting change mode and/or the setting confirmation mode, the dedicated screen during the setting change mode and/or the setting confirmation mode is displayed on the image display device. By continuing to display with , or continuing to output voice, necessary information can be provided to the hall clerk. It should be noted that while displaying a screen dedicated to the setting change mode and/or the setting confirmation mode, a notification indicating that counting is in progress (for example, displaying "counting" on the screen) may be performed. This notification is configured to be different from the above-described effect during counting.

In addition, in the present embodiment, counting based on the operation of the counting switch P7 is possible even during errors (predetermined partial (predetermined) errors or all errors). . However, when the counting switch P7 is operated under the condition that the points can be betted, an effect based on the operation of the counting switch P7 is executed, and when the counting switch P7 is operated during an error, An effect based on the operation of the count switch P7 may not be executed. The reason for such a configuration is that if the count switch P7 is operated during an error, there is a high possibility of fraudulent activity.

In other words, even if the counting switch P7 is operated during an error, the hall clerk can be notified by continuing to display the dedicated screen during the error on the image display device or continuing to output the sound. Can provide necessary information. It should be noted that a notification indicating that counting is in progress (for example, displaying "counting in progress" on the screen) may be performed while displaying a dedicated screen for errors. This notification is configured to be different from the above-described effect during counting. It should be noted that, at this time, it may be configured such that the settlement of the number of bets cannot be made by the settlement switch.

The types of errors are recoverable errors that can be recovered by operating the reset switch ("input error", "payment error", "payment error", etc.) and those that cannot be recovered by operating the reset switch (initial errors such as setting changes). During a recoverable error, operation of the counting switch P7 enables counting processing, and during an unrecoverable error, the counting switch P7 , the counting process may be disabled. According to such a configuration, recoverable errors that can occur in normal operation can be counted, and unrecoverable errors, which are more likely to be fraudulent than recoverable errors, cannot be counted. A fair game can be realized.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to count based on the operation of the counting switch P7 even during the game (for example, while the reels are rotating). However, when the counting switch P7 is operated in a situation where points can be betted, an effect based on the operation of the counting switch P7 is executed, and when the counting switch P7 is operated during the game, An effect based on the operation of the count switch P7 may not be executed. The reason why such a structure is adopted is that there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act is being carried out when the counting switch P7 is operated during a game.

In other words, even if the counting switch P7 is operated during an error, the hall clerk can be notified by continuing to display the dedicated screen during the error on the image display device or continuing to output the sound. Can provide necessary information. It should be noted that a notification indicating that counting is in progress (for example, displaying "counting in progress" on the screen) may be performed while displaying a dedicated screen for errors. This notification is configured to be different from the above-described effect during counting.

Even if the player can select the volume of the effect sound during the game from a plurality of levels by operating a switch (for example, a sub switch) during the game standby (under the situation where the game is not executed). good. For example, it is configured to be selectable from five levels of volume 1 to volume 5, and is configured so that volume 1 is the lowest sound effect sound is output, volume 5 is the loudest sound effect sound is output. ing. When configured in this manner, a specific effect sound (for example, a voice for a dialogue effect, BGM during a normal game, BGM during AT, BGM during BB, tenpai sound, etc.) has a volume corresponding to the selected effect sound. However, it is preferable that the effect sound output during counting be output at the same volume regardless of which one of volume 1 to volume 5 is selected. Specifically, even if the player counts by an illegal method after selecting the volume 1, the effect sound output during counting at a low volume is prevented from being output. A player who is trying to count by the method can be restrained. Also, even for ordinary players, the counting is a blissful time, so even when the volume is set to 1, the volume is the same as when other volume is set. By being output, it attracts the attention of players other than the player who is counting, and the player's interest in counting can be heightened.

In the present embodiment, the gaming machine P transmits the gaming machine information notification to the lending unit every 300 ms, but it is not limited to this, and can be transmitted at any timing within the range of 300 ms to 310 ms. good too. However, it does not take a random value every time it is sent, but a predetermined value is sent.

In the present embodiment, the gaming machine P transmits the counting notification to the lending unit 100 ms after transmitting the gaming machine information notification. You can send it in time. However, it does not take a random value every time it is sent, but a predetermined value is sent.

Next, game machine information management will be described with reference to FIG.
Game machine information management is control for transmitting game machine information notifications from the game machine P to the lending unit. FIG. be. In other words, the game machine information management is executed each time the timer interrupt process is executed (with a period of 1 ms).

First, various terms in FIG. 30 will be explained.

The gaming machine information notification timer A is a timer for measuring 300 ms. As a storage area (_TM_INF_CTL_A) for measuring the game machine information notification timer A, 2 bytes of the RWM area of the game medium number control board P16 are used. The storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer A stores an initial value (“0”) by initialization processing when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine information notification timer B is a timer for measuring 60 seconds. As a storage area (_TM_INF_CTL_B) for counting the game machine information notification timer B, 1 byte of the RWM area of the game medium number control board P16 is used. The storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer B stores an initial value (“0”) by initialization processing when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine information notification timer C is a timer for measuring 180 seconds. As a storage area (_TM_INF_CTL_C) for measuring the game machine information notification timer C, 1 byte of the RWM area of the game medium number control board P16 is used. The storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer C stores an initial value (“0”) by initialization processing when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine performance information notification request flag is a flag that changes from “0” to “1” when a cycle for transmitting gaming machine performance information among gaming machine information notifications arrives. The storage area for storing the gaming machine performance information notification request flag uses the D0 bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag (_FL_INF_CTL), which is a 1-byte storage area in the RWM area of the game medium number control board P16. .

The gaming machine installation information notification request flag is a flag that changes from "0" to "1" when the cycle of transmitting the gaming machine installation information among the gaming machine information notifications arrives. The storage area for storing the gaming machine installation information notification request flag uses the D1-th bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag (_FL_INF_CTL), which is a 1-byte storage area in the RWM area of the game medium number control board P16. .

Note that the gaming machine information notification request flag (_FL_INF_CTL) stores an initial value (“0”) (each bit becomes “0”) by initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Next, control processing in each step will be described with reference to FIG.

“Game machine information notification timer A-1” is an operation process for subtracting 1 from the storage area for measuring the game machine information notification timer A. FIG. In addition, if the arithmetic processing results in a carry (when the arithmetic processing for subtraction is executed while the game machine information notification timer A is "0" (also referred to as "less than "0")) By storing "300" in the game machine information notification timer A, the count value can be stored in the game machine information notification timer A.

As described above, since the period of the timer interruption of the game medium number control board P16 in this embodiment is 1 ms, by storing "300" as the count value in the game machine information notification timer A, the count of 300 ms can be reduced. Although it is possible, it is not limited to this, and if the period of the timer interrupt of the game medium number control board P16 is set to 2 ms, it is sufficient to store "150" as the count value in the game machine information notification timer A, If the timer interrupt period of the game medium number control board P16 is set to 2.235 ms, any value from "135" to "138" may be stored in the game machine information notification timer A as the count value. In this way, if it is not divisible, an arbitrary value can be set so that the gaming machine information notification transmission timing is between 300 ms and 310 ms.

Here, there is a case where the zero flag and the carry flag of the flag register (also called F register) provided in the CPU become "1" due to the "gaming machine information notification timer A-1". The zero flag is a flag that becomes "1" when the result of the arithmetic processing becomes "0". On the other hand, the carry flag is a flag that becomes "1" when the result of arithmetic processing is less than "0".

The zero flag and the carry flag will be described below using specific numerical values as examples.

Example 1) In gaming machine information management executed when "10" is stored in the storage area for measuring gaming machine information notification timer A, "9" is obtained by subtracting one. At this time, the zero flag and carry flag do not change (become "0").
Example 2) In gaming machine information management executed when "1" is stored in the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer A, subtracting "1" results in "0". At this time, the zero flag becomes "1". On the other hand, the carry flag does not change (becomes "0").
Example 3) When "0" is stored in the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer A, the result becomes "300" by subtracting 1. At this time, the zero flag does not change (becomes "0"). On the other hand, the carry flag becomes "1".

A DCPWLD instruction can be given as an operation instruction for the above-mentioned "gaming machine information notification timer A-1". The DCPWLD instruction is an instruction for storing a predetermined value when the carry flag becomes "1" as a result of subtraction by one. The predetermined value in the embodiment described above is "300".

Subsequently, "timer value before update = 0?" means that the value of the storage area for measuring game machine information notification timer A before executing "game machine information notification timer A -1" is "0". determine whether it was For example, when the carry flag is "1" after executing "game machine information notification timer A-1", the game machine information notification timer A before executing "game machine information notification timer A-1" is measured. It can be determined that the value of the storage area for the update was "0" (the result of the determination of "timer value before update=0?" is YES). On the other hand, when the carry flag is "0" after executing "game machine information notification timer A-1", the game machine information notification timer A before executing "game machine information notification timer A-1" is measured. Therefore, it can be determined that the value of the storage area for is not "0" (the result of the determination of "timer value before update=0?" is NO).

If the value of the storage area for measuring the game machine information notification timer A before executing the "game machine information notification timer A -1" is "0" ("timer value before update = 0?" If the result of the judgment is YES), the “transmission of hall control/unauthorized monitoring information” is executed. Note that YES in this step means that the gaming machine information management is executed in the first interrupt process after the power is turned on in the state where the power is turned off. This is because, as described above, the memory area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer A is initialized by the initialization process when the power is turned on, and "0" is stored. Also, if the value before the update is "0", the carry flag is "1". 300" can be stored.

Furthermore, without executing the process of updating the game machine information notification timer B or the game machine information notification timer C, it is possible to immediately execute the "transmission of hall controller/fraud monitoring information" after the power is restored. This has the effect of shortening the time and reducing the program capacity. The reason why the game machine information notification timer B and the game machine information notification timer C are not updated when the power is turned on will be described later.

Subsequently, when the result of the determination of "timer value before update=0?" is NO, the determination of "timer value before update=1?" is executed.

"Timer value before update = 1?" means whether the value of the storage area for measuring the game machine information notification timer A before executing "game machine information notification timer A - 1" was "1". determine whether

For example, when the zero flag after executing "game machine information notification timer A-1" is "1", to measure game machine information notification timer A before executing "game machine information notification timer A-1" was "1" (the result of the determination of "timer value before update=1?" is YES). If the result of the determination of "timer value before update=1?" is YES, "save game machine information notification timer A count value" is executed.

On the other hand, when the zero flag after executing "game machine information notification timer A-1" is "0", the game machine information notification timer A before executing "game machine information notification timer A-1" is measured. is not "1" (the result of the determination of "timer value before update=1?" is NO).

If the value of the storage area for measuring the game machine information notification timer A before executing "game machine information notification timer A - 1" is not "1" ("timer value before update = 1?" If the determination result is NO), the gaming machine information management is terminated. Note that the situation in which the value of the storage area for measuring the game machine information notification timer A before executing the "game machine information notification timer A - 1" is "1" means that the game machine information notification timer A is measured. This corresponds to the situation in which 300 interrupt processes have been executed (300 ms has elapsed).

In addition, the situation in which the value of the storage area for measuring the game machine information notification timer A before executing the "game machine information notification timer A - 1" was not "1" means that the game machine information notification timer A This corresponds to a situation where the value is "2" to "300" and that the gaming machine information notification timer A is counting. In addition, the value of the storage area for measuring the game machine information notification timer A before executing the "game machine information notification timer A - 1" is not "1", but "0" is also included. In the case of "0", since the determination was made in the immediately preceding process, the process does not proceed to this determination process.

Next, “storage of gaming machine information notification timer A count value” is a process of storing “300” in the storage area for counting gaming machine information notification timer A. FIG. By this processing, "0" stored in the gaming machine information notification timer A can be updated to "300". As described above, in this embodiment, the "game machine information notification timer A -1" is executed using the DCPWLD instruction, so when the carry flag becomes "1", the game machine information notification timer A "300" is stored, but before the game machine information notification timer A becomes "0" (when it becomes "1") except immediately after the power is turned on, by "game machine information notification timer A count value save", Since "300" is stored, the game machine information notification timer A will not become "0" except immediately after the power is turned on (except for abnormalities), so the count value is stored in this process. I'm trying

Next, “gaming machine information notification timer B +1” is an operation process using a special addition instruction to add 1 to the value in the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer B. FIG. In the arithmetic processing, when a value less than "199" is stored in the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer B, 1 is added to the value of the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer B. When a value less than "199" is not stored in the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer B (that is, when a value of "199" is stored under normal operating conditions) This is arithmetic processing for storing "0" as the value of the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer B. FIG. Specific examples are described below.

Example 1) When "0" is stored in the storage area for measuring game machine information notification timer B, if arithmetic processing using a special addition instruction to add 1 is performed, game machine information notification timer B is set to The value of the storage area for measurement is "1".
Example 2) When "100" is stored in the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer B, if arithmetic processing using a special addition instruction to add 1 is performed, the gaming machine information notification timer B is set to The value of the storage area for measurement is "101".
Example 3) When "199" is stored in the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer B, if arithmetic processing using a special addition instruction to add 1 is performed, the gaming machine information notification timer B is set to The value of the storage area for measurement becomes "0" instead of "200".

Thus, in the "gaming machine information notification timer B +1", when "199" is stored in the value of the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer B, a special addition instruction for adding 1 is used. When the calculation process described above is performed, by executing the addition process for storing "0", it is possible to circulate "0" to "199" as the value of the storage area for measuring the game machine information notification timer B. Further, the situation in which "1" is added when "199" is stored in the value of the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer B is the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer A. This corresponds to a situation in which the opportunity for the area to become "0" has arrived 200 times. In other words, the gaming machine information notification timer B is incremented by 1 each time the interrupt process is executed 300 times, so the interrupt process is executed 300 times×200 times (=60000 times) (300 ms×200 times ( = 60000ms (60s) passed). Normally, a 3-byte storage area must be provided in order to measure whether interrupt processing has been executed 60,000 times. The storage area can be 1 byte, and the storage capacity of the RWM can be reduced.

Note that an ICPLD instruction can be cited as an operation instruction for the above-described special addition instruction "gaming machine information notification timer B +1".

In this embodiment, an addition instruction such as "game machine information notification timer B +1" is used, but a subtraction instruction may be used. In the case of a subtraction command, when the power is turned on, "200" may be stored as a count value in the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer B, and then when it becomes "0", or when the power is turned on. It is also possible to store "199" as a count value in the storage area for measuring the game machine information notification timer B, and then when the carry flag becomes "1".

In addition, in this embodiment, since an addition command such as "gaming machine information notification timer B +1" is used, processing for setting an initial value can be omitted compared to the case of a subtraction command (initialization processing when power is turned on). , the initial value becomes "0"), there is an effect of improving the processing speed and reducing the program capacity.

Next, for “game machine information notification timer B time elapsed?”, YES is determined when the count number of game machine information notification timer B reaches 200 by “game machine information notification timer B +1”. For example, when the value in the storage area of the game machine information notification timer B becomes "0" by "game machine information notification timer B + 1" (when the addition command is executed 200 times from the initial value "0" ) can be determined as YES. On the other hand, if the value in the storage area of the game machine information notification timer B does not become "0" by "game machine information notification timer B + 1" (200 addition instructions have not been executed from the initial value "0"). case), it can be determined as NO.

If the determination result of "Game machine information notification timer B time elapsed?" is NO, "Game machine installation information notification request?" is executed.

When the determination result of "Game machine information notification timer B time elapsed?" is YES, "Game machine information notification timer C +1" is executed.

Next, “gaming machine information notification timer C +1” is arithmetic processing using a special addition instruction for adding 1 to the value in the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer C. In the arithmetic processing, when a value less than "2" is stored in the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer C, 1 is added to the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer C. , when a value less than "2" is not stored in the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer B (that is, when a value of "3" is stored under normal operating conditions), the gaming machine This is arithmetic processing for storing "0" in the storage area for measuring the information notification timer C. Specific examples are described below.

Example 1) When "0" is stored in the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer C, if arithmetic processing using a special addition instruction to add 1 is performed, the gaming machine information notification timer C is set to The value of the storage area for measurement is "1".
Example 2) When "1" is stored in the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer C, if arithmetic processing using a special addition instruction to add 1 is performed, the gaming machine information notification timer C is set to The value of the storage area for measurement is "2".
Example 3) When "2" is stored in the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer C, if arithmetic processing using a special addition instruction to add 1 is performed, the gaming machine information notification timer B is set to The value of the storage area for measurement becomes "0" instead of "3".

In this way, in the "gaming machine information notification timer C+1", when "2" is stored in the value of the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer C, addition processing for storing "0" is performed. By executing this, it is possible to circulate "0" to "2" as the value of the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer C. Further, the situation in which "1" is added when "2" is stored in the value of the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer C means that the memory for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer B This corresponds to a situation in which the opportunity for the area to become "0" has arrived three times. In other words, the gaming machine information notification timer B is incremented by 1 each time the interrupt process is executed 300 times, and the processing for adding 1 to the gaming machine information notification timer B has arrived three times. (=180000 ms (180 s)) (300 ms.times.200 times.times.3 times (=180000 ms (180 s))). Normally, a 3-byte storage area should be provided in order to measure whether interrupt processing has been executed 180,000 times. The storage area of the game machine information notification timer C can be set to 1 byte, and the storage capacity of the RWM can be reduced.

An ICPLD instruction similar to the operation instruction of the "game machine information notification timer B +1" can be given as an operation instruction of the "game machine information notification timer C +1" which is the special addition instruction described above.

In the present embodiment, an addition instruction such as "gaming machine information notification timer C+1" is used, but a subtraction instruction may be used. In the case of a subtraction command, "3" may be stored as a count value in a storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer C when the power is turned on, and then it may become "0", or when the power is turned on. It is also possible to store "2" as a count value in the memory area for measuring the game machine information notification timer B, and then when the carry flag becomes "1".

In addition, in the present embodiment, an addition instruction such as "game machine information notification timer C + 1" is used. , the initial value becomes "0"), there is an effect of improving the processing speed and reducing the program capacity.

Next, for “Game machine information notification timer C time elapsed?”, YES is determined when the count number of the game machine information notification timer C reaches 3 by “Game machine information notification timer C +1”. For example, when the value in the storage area of the game machine information notification timer C becomes "0" by "game machine information notification timer C + 1" (when the addition command is executed three times from the initial value "0" ) can be determined as YES. On the other hand, if the value in the storage area of the gaming machine information notification timer C does not become "0" by "gaming machine information notification timer C + 1" (the addition instruction has not been executed three times from the initial value "0"). case), it can be determined as NO.

If the determination result of "game machine information notification timer C time elapsed?" is NO, "set game machine installation information notification request flag" is executed.

If the determination result of "Game machine information notification timer C time elapsed?" is YES, "Set game machine performance information notification request flag" is executed.

Next, “set gaming machine performance information notification request flag” is control to store “1” in the D0th bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag (_FL_INF_CTL). As described in the flow chart of FIG. 30, "game machine performance information notification request flag set" is executed when "game machine information notification timer C time elapsed?" becomes YES. In other words, when the cycle of 180 seconds arrives, the "gaming machine performance information notification request flag set" is executed.

Next, the "game machine installation information notification request flag set" is control to store "1" in the D1-th bit of the game machine information notification request flag (_FL_INF_CTL). As described in the flowchart of FIG. 30, the "game machine installation information notification request flag set" is executed when "game machine information notification timer C time elapsed?" This is when the game machine performance information notification request flag setting" is executed (when the question "game machine information notification timer C time elapsed?" becomes YES). In other words, when the period of 60 seconds arrives, the "game machine installation information notification request flag set" is executed. Therefore, in the case of the period of 180 seconds, which is three times the period of 60 seconds, the control of both the "game machine performance information notification request flag set" and the "game machine installation information notification request flag set" is executed. Become.

In this way, in order to manage the timing of transmitting the gaming machine installation information to the rental unit and the timing of transmitting the gaming machine performance information to the rental unit with flags, hall control/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, and gaming machine It is possible to simplify the process of transmitting the performance information to the rental unit (by interlocking the timers corresponding to various types of information, it is possible to transmit to the rental unit without managing them individually). Furthermore, by not updating the game machine information notification timer B and the game machine information notification timer C when the power is turned on, hall controller/fraud monitoring information, game machine installation information, and game machine performance information are transmitted. Since the measurement start timing of the timer for this purpose does not deviate, accurate transmission is possible. In other words, by updating only the gaming machine information notification timer A when the power is turned on, the timing of transmitting the linked gaming machine information notification timer B and the gaming machine information notification timer C to the lending unit can be adjusted without complicated processing. It is possible to prevent deviation.

Next, "game machine installation information notification request?" is control for determining whether or not the game machine installation information notification request flag is set. For example, if the D1 bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag (_FL_INF_CTL) is "1", the determination is YES, and if the D1 bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag (_FL_INF_CTL) is "0", the determination is NO. do.

If the determination result of "game machine installation information notification request?" is NO, "game machine performance information notification request?" is executed.

If the result of the determination of "game machine installation information notification request?" is YES, "game machine installation information transmission" is executed.

Next, "game machine performance information notification request?" is control for determining whether or not the gaming machine performance information notification request flag is set. For example, if the D0 bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag (_FL_INF_CTL) is "1", the determination is YES, and if the D0 bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag (_FL_INF_CTL) is "0", the determination is NO. do.

If the judgment result of "Game machine performance information notification request?"

If the result of the determination of "game machine performance information notification request?" is YES, "game machine performance information transmission" is executed.

Incidentally, as described in the flowchart of FIG. 30, the processing order is to determine "game machine performance information notification request?" after determining "game machine installation information notification request?" By adopting such a processing order, in a situation where both the gaming machine installation information notification request flag and the gaming machine performance information notification request flag are set (for example, in a situation where the 180 second cycle has arrived), " Gaming machine installation information notification request?", the transmission control of the gaming machine installation information can be executed prior to the transmission control of the gaming machine performance information. Further, by simply judging the gaming machine installation information notification request before judging the gaming machine performance information notification request, it is possible to perform communication according to the priority without using complicated processing.

Next, "transmission of whole control/unauthorized monitoring information" corresponds to control processing for transmitting the above-described "hall control/unauthorized monitoring information" to the lending unit. The content transmitted to the lending unit at this time is the information stored in the storage area of the RWM acquired at the timing of transmission. For example, as for the total score included in the "hall control/fraud monitoring information", the information stored in the total score storage area (_NB_MEDAL) at the time of transmission is transmitted. In other words, if the transmission timing of every 300 ms, which is the original transmission timing of hall control/fraud monitoring information, coincides with the transmission timing of gaming machine installation information, the gaming machine installation information has a higher priority. At the timing, the hole check/fraud monitoring information is not transmitted, and the hole check/fraud monitoring information is transmitted after the next 300 ms. Regarding this "hall control/fraud monitoring information to be sent after the next 300 ms", instead of transmitting the hall control/fraud monitoring information at the time when the transmission timing of the game machine installation information matches,・By transmitting the hole control and fraud monitoring information acquired at the timing of transmitting fraud monitoring information, it is possible to transmit the latest information even if the transmission timing is off.

Also, the serial number is updated (+1) after the processing for transmitting the "hall controller/fraud monitoring information" to the lending unit is completed. As with the count serial number, the serial number will be "0" when it is sent immediately after the power is restored, and after that, any one of "1" to "255" can be sent ("1" to " 255"). This serial number is a serial number that is updated when any one of the three pieces of information of hall control/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, and gaming machine performance information is transmitted. In other words, since the same serial number is used for hall controller/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, and gaming machine performance information, the serial number is updated at intervals of 300 ms when the power is on. It is configured.

When the "transmission of hole control/illegal monitoring information" is completed, the gaming machine information management is terminated.

Next, “transmission of gaming machine installation information” corresponds to control processing for transmitting the aforementioned “gaming machine installation information” to the lending unit. The content to be transmitted at this time is the information stored in the storage area of the RWM acquired at the timing of transmission.

Also, after the processing for transmitting the "gaming machine installation information" to the rented unit is completed, the gaming machine installation information notification request flag is cleared. Specifically, the D1 bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag (_FL_INF_CTL) is set to "0". Also, after the processing for transmitting the "gaming machine installation information" to the rental unit is completed, the serial number is updated (+1).

When the "game machine installation information transmission" ends, the game machine information management ends.

Next, the “gaming machine performance information transmission” corresponds to the control process of transmitting the aforementioned “gaming machine performance information” to the lending unit. The content to be transmitted at this time is the information stored in the storage area of the RWM acquired at the timing of transmission. In other words, when the transmission timing of each 180 seconds, which is the original transmission timing of the gaming machine performance information, coincides with the transmission timing of the gaming machine installation information, the gaming machine installation information has a higher priority. The gaming machine performance information is not sent, and the gaming machine performance information is sent after the next 300ms. Regarding this "gaming machine performance information to be sent after the next 300ms", instead of sending the gaming machine performance information at the time when the timing of sending the gaming machine installation information matches, "gaming machine performance information will be sent after the next 300ms" By transmitting the gaming machine performance information acquired at the timing of transmission, it is possible to transmit the latest information even if the transmission timing is off.

Further, after the processing for transmitting the "gaming machine performance information" to the lending unit is completed, the gaming machine performance information notification request flag is cleared. Specifically, the D0 bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag (_FL_INF_CTL) is set to "0". Also, after the processing for transmitting the "gaming machine performance information" to the rental unit is completed, the serial number is updated (+1).

When the "game machine performance information transmission" is completed, the game machine information management is ended.

As described above, the gaming machine information notification is configured to be transmitted to the lending unit every 300 ms. In addition, the blink switching timing of the role ratio monitor is also switched every 300 ms. However, while the timer update processing that measures 300 ms for transmitting the game machine information notification uses the carry flag and the zero flag to transmit to the lending unit, The timer update process for measuring 300 ms is switched using only the carry flag.

This is because the gaming machine information notification causes more damage if it is fraudulently, so two kinds of flags are used for management in order to improve the accuracy of the information to be transmitted.

Next, the transmission timing of the game machine information notification (any one of hall control/illegal monitoring information, game machine installation information, and game machine performance information) after the power of the game machine P is turned on will be described based on FIG. to explain.

FIG. 31 shows the transmission timing of the game machine information notification from the game medium number control board P16 to the lending unit after the power of the game machine P is turned on. "Timer B" indicates "game machine information notification timer B"; "Timer C" indicates "game machine information notification timer C"; "After activation" indicates "the first interrupt process in the game medium number control board P16", and "after 1 ms" indicates "the next interrupt process". Further, "timer A=0" indicates that the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A (timer value) is zero. Also, the timer value indicates the timer value at the start of interrupt processing, and is a value that has not been updated. In other words, it is the value updated in the previous interrupt processing.

As described above, the game machine information notification timer A, the game machine information notification timer B, and the game machine information notification timer C are initialized at the time of initial start-up, so that the respective timer values are "0". Then, since the timer value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is "0" (the timer value before subtraction is 0), hall controller/fraud monitoring information is transmitted as the first gaming machine information notification. Although the game machine installation information and the game machine performance information also have a timer value of "0", since the zero flag is "0" here, the game machine installation information and the game machine performance information are not transmitted.

Next, the timing of transmitting the second hall control/unauthorized monitoring information will be described with reference to FIG. Note that wording appearing in FIG. 32 is the same as that in FIG. 31, so description thereof will be omitted.

The timing of the second hole control/fraud monitoring information transmission is when the timer value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is "1". When the timer value of the game machine information notification timer A is "1" (the timer value before subtraction is 1), it becomes "0" by the subtraction processing, and as a result, the zero flag becomes "1", and hall control/illegal monitoring information is transmitted, and "300" is stored as the timer value of the gaming machine information notification timer A. Further, the timer value of the game machine information notification timer A changes from "1" to "0", and the timer value of the game machine information notification timer B becomes "1".

Next, the transmission timing of the game machine information notification when the transmission timing of the hall controller/fraud monitoring information and the game machine installation information match will be described with reference to FIG. Note that wording appearing in FIG. 33 is the same as in FIGS. 31 and 32, so description thereof will be omitted.

The timing for sending hall control/fraud monitoring information is when the timer value of game machine information notification timer A changes from "1" to "0" and "300" is stored. When the timer value changes from "199" to "0", the gaming machine installation information notification request flag becomes "1". For this reason, in the interrupt processing when the transmission timing of hall control/fraud monitoring information and gaming machine installation information occurs at the same time, the gaming machine installation information notification request flag is set to "1". Information will be sent, but hall control and fraud monitoring information will not be sent. Then, in the next interrupt process, the gaming machine installation information notification request flag is "0", but the timer value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is "300", so the zero flag is "0". , and hole control/fraud monitoring information will not be sent.

In other words, when the transmission timings of the hall control/fraud monitoring information and the game machine installation information match, the transmission of the game machine installation information has a higher priority, so the hall control/fraud monitoring information is not transmitted. Until the timer value of the information notification timer A changes from "1" to "0" and "300" is stored (until the next 300 ms elapses), the hall control/fraud monitoring information will not be transmitted. Further, the timer value of the gaming machine information notification timer A changes from "1" to "0", the timer value of the gaming machine information notification timer B changes from "199" to "0", and the gaming machine information notification timer C changes from "199" to "0". The timer value changes from "0" to "1".

In addition, since the transmission timing of the hall control/fraud monitoring information and the game machine installation information match, even if the transmission of the hall control/fraud monitoring information is 300 ms later, the timer for the game machine information notification timer A Since the value is continuously updated, even if the hall control/fraud monitoring information is not sent once, the transmission timing of the hall controller/fraud monitoring information, game machine installation information, and game machine performance information will not be delayed. .

Also, if the transmission timing of the hall control/fraud monitoring information and the game machine installation information match, and the transmission of the hall controller/fraud monitoring information is delayed by 300 ms, the hall controller/fraud monitoring information will be sent after the next 300 ms. is acquired at the timing of transmission, so information 300 ms before is not transmitted. As a result, old information will not be transmitted even if the transmission timing of the hall control/unauthorized monitoring information is shifted.

Next, the transmission timing of the gaming machine information notification when the transmission timings of the hall controller/fraud monitoring information, the gaming machine installation information, and the gaming machine performance information match, will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the wording appearing in FIG. 34 is the same as in FIGS. 31 to 33, so the description is omitted.

The timing for sending hall control/fraud monitoring information is when the timer value of game machine information notification timer A changes from "1" to "0" and "300" is stored. When the timer value changes from "199" to "0" and the timer value of the gaming machine information notification timer C changes from "2" to "0", the gaming machine installation information notification request flag becomes "1" and the game is played. The machine performance information notification request flag becomes "1". For this reason, in interrupt processing when the transmission timings of hall control/fraud monitoring information, game machine installation information, and game machine performance information occur at the same time, the game machine installation information notification request flag is set to "1". Therefore, the gaming machine installation information is transmitted, and the hall controller/fraud monitoring information and gaming machine performance information are not transmitted. In the next interrupt process, the gaming machine installation information notification request flag is set to "0" and the gaming machine performance information notification request flag is set to "1", but the timer value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is "300", the zero flag is "0", and the hole controller/fraud monitoring information is not transmitted. Not sent. However, the gaming machine performance information notification request flag is stored as "1".

In other words, when the transmission timing of hall control/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, and gaming machine performance information match, the transmission of gaming machine installation information has a higher priority, so the hall control/fraud monitoring information and gaming machine performance No information is transmitted, and next time the timer value of the gaming machine information notification timer A changes from "1" to "0" and "300" is stored, the gaming machine performance information notification request flag is "1". Based on this, the gaming machine performance information is transmitted preferentially over hall control/fraud monitoring information. Since the gaming machine performance information notification request flag becomes "0" after the gaming machine performance information is transmitted, the timer value of the gaming machine information notification timer A changes from "1" to "0" and becomes "300". When it is stored (when 300 ms elapse next), the hall control/fraud monitoring information will be transmitted.

In addition, since the transmission timing of hall control/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, and gaming machine performance information match, the transmission of gaming machine performance information is 300 ms later, and the transmission of hall controller/fraud monitoring information is 600 ms later. Even if this occurs, the timer value of the gaming machine information notification timer A continues to be updated. The transmission timing of machine installation information and game machine performance information is not shifted.

In addition, since the transmission timing of hall control/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, and gaming machine performance information coincides, the gaming machine installation information is transmitted at that timing, and then the gaming machine performance information is transmitted 300 ms later. , if hall control/fraud monitoring information is sent 600 ms later, game machine performance information is sent 300 ms after machine installation information is sent. timing) is not transmitted. In addition, hall control/fraud monitoring information, which is sent 300 ms after the game machine performance information is sent, is acquired at the time of transmission, so information 600 ms before (the timing when the game machine installation information is sent) is not sent. . As a result, even if the transmission timings of hall control/fraud monitoring information and game machine performance information are not synchronized, old information will not be transmitted.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the request flag of the gaming machine performance information transmitted every 180 seconds always becomes 1 at the same timing as the gaming machine installation information transmitted every 60 seconds. In other words, at the timing when the gaming machine performance information notification request flag becomes 1, the gaming machine installation information notification request flag always becomes 1. Therefore, the gaming machine performance information cannot be transmitted at the timing when the gaming machine performance information notification request flag becomes 1, and is transmitted after the next 300 ms. However, even in this case, since the timing when the gaming machine performance information notification request flag becomes 1 is 180 seconds after the gaming machine performance information notification request flag becomes 1, the gaming machine performance information is periodically updated. It is possible to send.

In addition, the storage areas for storing the game machine information notification timer A, game machine information notification timer B, and game machine information notification timer C managed by the game medium number control board P16 are initialized by power-off (initialization by power-on processing). ), but the timer that measures the wait time (4.1 seconds, also called the minimum game time) managed by the main control board P15 is saved when the power is turned off and is not initialized when the power is turned on. After the input, it is configured to start the measurement from the continuation. With such a configuration, various game machine information notification timers for transmitting game machine information notifications to the lending unit can be reset after the power is turned on, enabling regular communication.

In addition, the storage areas for storing the game machine information notification timer A, game machine information notification timer B, and game machine information notification timer C managed by the game medium number control board P16 are initialized by power-off (initialization by power-on processing). ), but the timer that measures the freeze time (also called reel performance time) managed by the main control board P15 is saved even when the power is turned off and is not initialized when the power is turned on, so that the freeze after power is turned on. It is configured to measure the time from the continuation. With such a configuration, various game machine information notification timers for transmitting game machine information notifications to the lending unit can be reset after the power is turned on, enabling regular communication.

<Description on operation check mode applicable in this embodiment>
Since the game machine in this embodiment is prohibited from performing a game operation unless it communicates with the rented unit, it is necessary to install a dummy unit instead of the rented unit when it is desired to check the operation of the game machine alone. Dummy units can communicate with gaming machines in the same way as rental units. must be very strict. For this reason, in order for the second-hand dealer to check the operation of the second-hand gaming machine, it is necessary to borrow a dummy unit from the gaming machine maker, and it takes time to check the operation.

Therefore, in order to check the operation of the game machine by itself, the game machine is equipped with an operation confirmation mode in which the game machine can operate without being connected to the lending unit or the dummy unit. Since this operation confirmation mode is a mode for confirming whether or not the game machine operates normally, it is configured such that game media are not inserted or paid out.

It is desirable to configure the operation confirmation mode so that the player cannot easily execute it. For this reason, the input port for a predetermined switch is read during power-on processing, and the operation confirmation mode is activated when it is determined that the operation of the predetermined switch is detected during power-on processing. As a predetermined switch, any one or more of 1 bed switch, MAX bed switch, start switch, left stop switch, middle stop switch, right stop switch, settlement switch, reset switch, counting switch, setting key switch A combination of As a combination of two or more, for example, turning on the setting key switch while the power is off and turning on the power while pressing the counter switch can be considered. Alternatively, a dedicated switch that cannot be operated unless the front door is opened may be provided, and the operation check mode may be activated by turning on the power while operating the dedicated switch.

The operation confirmation mode is a mode that allows a game to be played even with a single gaming machine, but it is possible to activate the operation confirmation mode even if it is connected to a rental unit. For this reason, it is assumed that the rental unit and the gaming machine P are connected or not connected during the operation confirmation mode, so communication with the rental unit is executed in the same manner as in the normal operation during the operation confirmation mode. do. For example, it executes the reception of a rental notification and the transmission of a rental reception result response.

When the operation check mode is activated, the display of the five segment display portions of the game medium number display portion P9 is displayed as "-----". Furthermore, in the operation confirmation mode, every game, 3 points are automatically put in, and the operation of the start switch becomes effective. Also, in order to make it easier to recognize that it is in the operation confirmation mode, a part of the image may be displayed as "in operation confirmation mode". The display "in operation check mode" is always displayed in the same size even if the effect is switched due to the effect lottery or the transition to the demo screen.

When the start switch is operated in the operation confirmation mode, the game progress program such as the same lottery process as the normal game operation By operating the game machine using the game medium number control board P16 and the program executed by the sub control board P12, it is possible to check whether the game machine is normal. However, the payout process is not executed, and only the given number is displayed on the given number display section, and the display of the game medium number display section P9 is not updated. In addition, in the case of a game machine that does not have a given number display unit, the given number is displayed on the liquid crystal display during the operation confirmation mode, since the given number is displayed on the liquid crystal. Also, since the minimum game time is measured even in the operation confirmation mode, if the start switch is operated before the minimum game time elapses, the rotation of the reels waits until the minimum game time elapses.

Further, in the operation confirmation mode, the communication processing between the game machine and the rental unit may not be executed. By configuring in this way, the abnormality determination process based on the communication process performed between the gaming machine and the rental unit is not executed.

In addition, in the operation confirmation mode, a predetermined set value (for example, "1" at which the payout rate is the lowest or "6" at which the payout rate is the highest) is set in advance as a set value related to the player's advantage. The gaming machine may be configured to operate, or may be configured to operate after setting an arbitrary set value. Furthermore, during the operation check mode, the setting value display may be configured to display the setting value by operating the setting key switch, or the setting value can be displayed on the setting value display regardless of the operation of the setting key switch. It may be configured so that the setting value can be displayed, or it may be configured so that the setting value display does not display the setting value even when the setting key switch is operated.

In addition, in the operation confirmation mode, the presentation by the display device such as the liquid crystal, the lighting mode of the frame lamp, the voice output from the speaker, etc. are performed as usual. For this reason, when the game is played for a long time in the operation confirmation mode, it is possible to easily confirm an effect with a low appearance rate (so-called premium effect) in the operation confirmation mode, and the confirmed premium effect is uploaded on the web as a video or image. Therefore, when the game is executed a predetermined number of times in the operation confirmation mode, the operation confirmation mode is automatically terminated (in other words, the operation confirmation mode A predetermined number of times is set as the upper limit of the number of games that can be executed, and after reaching the predetermined number of times, the game in the operation confirmation mode can not be played). The predetermined number of times may be, for example, 1 time, 10 times, 20 times, or the like. When a predetermined number of games have been played during the operation confirmation mode, the operation confirmation mode may be ended and the subsequent normal game may be prohibited. In order to make the normal game executable from the state in which the normal game is prohibited, operations such as turning on the power again and shifting to the setting change mode (turning on the power switch while the setting key switch is on) are included. . It should be noted that, when the conditions for starting the operation check mode are satisfied from the state in which the normal game is prohibited, the operation check mode is started again.

Also, if you want to end the operation check mode arbitrarily, turn off the power during the operation check mode (execute the operation check mode end processing during the power off processing) or turn off the power during the operation check mode. It is desirable to end with a normal operation such as turning on the power (executing the operation confirmation mode ending process during the power-on process). This is because the situations where the operation check mode is required are limited, such as when moving used equipment. This is because the possibility of entering the operation check mode during business hours is reduced by immediately ending the normal operation such as. The method of arbitrarily ending the operation check mode is not limited to turning off the power during the operation check mode, but by the operation of shifting to the setting change mode (turning on the power switch while the setting key switch is on). The operation check mode may be ended in the initialization process accompanying the setting change process that is executed.

Also, in the operation check mode, if the power is turned off while the reel is rotating, the operation check mode can be terminated without re-rotating the reel when the power is turned on, or the reel can be restarted when the power is turned on. It is conceivable that the action confirmation mode is terminated after the game is completed by rotating the terminal. Although the description has been given while the reels are rotating, the same operation is performed when the power supply is interrupted between the operation of the start switch and the end of the game.

Further, when ending the operation mode, a process of initializing the RWM used in the operation mode is performed. As a result, the game in the operation mode can be prevented from being handed over to the normal game. However, the RWM required for signal output to the lending unit is not initialized. In addition, when the operation mode is terminated and the normal game is started, an operation to shift to the setting change mode (the power switch is turned on while the setting key switch is ON) is required. If the specification is such that the used RWM is initialized, the RWM used in the operation mode does not need to be initialized when the operation mode ends.

In addition, the above-described example is such that, during the operation check mode, the production by the display device such as the liquid crystal, the lighting mode of the frame lamp, the voice output from the speaker, etc. are executed as usual, but this is not the only option. No effect by the device is executed (the display "in operation confirmation mode" is continuously displayed on a black background), the lighting mode of the frame lamp is set to non-lighting or a dedicated lighting mode, and no sound is output from the speaker. , or a mode in which dedicated BGM or voice is output. Since it is enough to determine whether the operation of the main control board P15 and the game medium number control board P16 is normal or not, it is sufficient to check the operation of the sub control board P16. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a game is erroneously played in the operation confirmation mode or a premium effect appears during the operation confirmation mode.

Also, the result of a game played during the operation confirmation mode is configured not to affect the normal game mode after the operation confirmation mode is ended. For example, even if you win the AT lottery in the game played during the operation confirmation mode and end the operation confirmation mode in a situation where you have obtained the right to AT, the normal game mode after ending the operation confirmation mode is configured to start the game without the right of the AT.

Also, during the operation confirmation mode, the role ratio monitor is configured to display a test pattern. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to determine whether or not the operation check mode is in progress by the display of the role ratio monitor. In the operation check mode, the test pattern may be displayed for 5 seconds after the power is turned on. Various ratios may be displayed on the role ratio monitor without displaying the test pattern at the time of input.

Also, the result of a game played during the action confirmation mode is configured so as not to affect the ratio of various items displayed on the role ratio monitor. For example, based on the game played during the operation confirmation mode, each storage area for calculating the ratio of various items displayed on the role ratio monitor (total number of games played, total number of grants, etc.) is not updated. Configure. By configuring in this way, it is possible to display various ratios showing behavior in the actual market on the role ratio monitor.

<Determination order of abnormality>
A description will be given of determination of abnormality in command communication between the main control board P15 and the number-of-game-media control board P16.

Commands that can be transmitted from the main control board P15 to the game media count control board P16 include an insertion request command, a settlement request command, a payout request command, and the like.

As described above, if the input point received when the game media number control board P16 receives the input request command is a value other than 1 to 3, the VL error ( It is configured to confirm whether or not the VL signal is OFF. This is to preferentially execute processing relating to the total score, which is the most important information in the gaming machine according to this embodiment. If the order is to determine the command abnormality after determining the VL abnormality, even if there is an abnormality in the command communication between the main control board P15 and the game medium number control board P16 in the case of the VL abnormality, the determination is made. I can't. This is because the betting process for invalidating the betting operation is not executed when it is determined that the VL is abnormal.

The reason why the number-of-games-medium control board P16 is configured to check the data of the second control command and then check for VL abnormality when receiving the settlement request command or payout request command is the same as for the input request command. be.

In order to prevent such a situation, it is confirmed whether or not there is an abnormality in command reception from the main control board P15 before determining whether or not there is a VL abnormality.

In addition, when all commands transmitted from the main control board P15 are received, regardless of the example described above, it is determined whether or not the command contents are normal before determining whether or not the VL is abnormal.

<Timer measurement of basic communication sequence>
As described in FIG. 20, the gaming machine information notification is output from the gaming machine to the lending unit every 300ms. Also, the count notification is output from the game machine to the lending unit 100 ms after the game information notification is output. Also, the rental notification is output from the rental unit to the gaming machine within 170 ms after outputting the counting notification. Also, the lending receipt result response is output from the gaming machine to the lending unit within 10 ms after receiving the lending notification. In this way, it is necessary to output and receive information at prescribed timings. For this reason, it is possible to provide a plurality of timers to measure the timing of transmission and reception of information, but in order to reduce the capacity of RWM, one timer is used to measure the timing of transmission and reception of information. method can be adopted. An example using a storage area (_TM_INF_CTL_A) for measuring gaming machine information notification timer A (a timer for measuring 300 ms) will be described below.

<Game machine information notification timer A>
As described above, the value of the storage area for measuring the game machine information notification timer A is decremented by one each time the game medium number control board P16 timer interrupt processing is performed. For example, when the value of the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer A is "300", it is "299", and when the value of the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer A is "1", it is "300". ” (when it becomes 0, “300” is stored). In other words, except for immediately after power-on, in principle, it is configured to circulate from 300 to 1 (0 immediately after power-on). Further, when the value of the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer A is "300", the processing for outputting the gaming machine information notification is executed.

<Notification of counting>
When the value of the storage area for counting the gaming machine information notification timer A is "200", the processing for outputting the count notification is executed. In other words, when the value of the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer A is "200", it means that 100 ms have elapsed since the gaming machine information notification was notified.

<Rental Notice>
If the value of the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer A is greater than "200" when the rental notification is received, or if the value of the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer A is "30" is smaller than , it is judged to be abnormal. In other words, when the value of the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer A is greater than "200", it is the timing before 100 ms has passed since the gaming machine information notification was notified. In other words, it means the timing before executing the processing for outputting the count notification. Further, when the value of the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer A is smaller than "30", it is the timing after 270 ms have passed since the gaming machine information notification was notified. In other words, it means the timing after 170 ms has passed after executing the processing for outputting the count notification. If it is determined that there is an abnormality based on the value of the storage area for storing the gaming machine information notification timer A, processing for determining whether or not the checksum is normal based on the received rental notification, Processing to determine whether or not the lending serial number is normal based on the notification, processing to add the lending score to the total score based on the received lending notice, and outputting the basic lending receipt result response corresponding to the received lending notice Do not perform any processing for

<Rental Receipt Result Response>
When the rental notification is received, the value of the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer A is "200" or less and "30" or more (when the rental notification is received, the gaming machine information notification timer A is not determined to be abnormal based on the value of the storage area for storing), processing for outputting a lending receipt response is performed in the interrupt processing in which the lending notification is received. Incidentally, as described above, when it is determined that there is an abnormality based on the value of the storage area for storing the game machine information notification timer A, the process of determining whether the checksum is normal based on the received rental notification , processing to determine whether or not the lending serial number is normal based on the received lending notice, processing to add the lending score to the total score based on the received lending notice, and lending receipt result response corresponding to the received lending notice Do not perform processing to output . In other words, no response indicating abnormality is made as a loan receipt result response. In other words, if the gaming machine receives the lending notification at a timing other than the timing based on the basic communication sequence, there is a possibility that the received lending notification is an unauthorized lending notification. It is configured not to output to

<Lighting control of each LED>
The state display lamps 1 to 5, each segment display portion of the game medium number display portion P9, and each segment display portion of the role ratio monitor are subjected to dynamic lighting control.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the LED display counter takes five different values (01h, 02h, 04h, 08h, 10h), so that it is lit up every five interrupts. When the LED display counter value is 01h, LED digit A corresponds, when the LED display counter value is 02h, LED digit B corresponds, and when the LED display counter value is 04h, LED digit A corresponds. C corresponds, LED digit D corresponds when the LED display counter value is 08h, and LED digit E corresponds when the LED display counter value is 10h.

The LEDs controlled by the LED digit A are the first digit LED of the game media number display section P9, the LED of the status display lamp 1, and the fourth digit LED of the role ratio monitor. The second-digit LED of the game media number display portion P9, the LED of the status display lamp 2, and the third-digit LED of the role ratio monitor. The LED of the eyes, the LED of the status display lamp 3, and the second-digit LED of the role ratio monitor. The LED, which is the first digit LED of the role ratio monitor and is controlled by the LED digit E, is the fifth digit LED of the game medium number display portion P9 and the LED of the status display lamp 5 .

In the present embodiment, the game machine and the rental unit communicate with each other via the game medium count control board P16 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board, but the present invention is not limited to this. The game machine and the rental unit may communicate via the device connection terminal board. In this case, the production cost is reduced by not mounting the game medium number control board P16. Further, all the processing controlled by the game medium number control board P16 is performed by the main control board P15. When the function of the main control board P15 and the function of the game medium number control board P16 are realized on the same board, the main control chip and the game medium number control chip are provided on the same board, and the main control chip and the game medium number control chip are provided on the same board. This can be realized by performing transmission/reception processing similar to that of the above-described embodiment between the number-of-media control chips.

As described above, the configuration of a slot machine (rotary type gaming machine) has been exemplified as a gaming machine, but the configuration described above can be applied to various gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and casino machines.

P: Gaming machine P1: Cabinet P2: Front door P3: Start switch P4: Stop switch P4C: Middle stop switch P4L: Left stop switch P4R: Right stop switch P5: Bed switch P5M: MAX bed switch P5O: 1 bed switch P6: Settlement switch P7: Count switch P8E: Effect determination switch P8W: Effect selection switch P9: Game media number display section P10: Display window P11M: Image display device P11S: Image display device P12: Sub control board P13: Game medium number display board P14DL : Lower left speaker P14DR : Lower right speaker P14UR : Upper right speaker P15 : Main control board P16 : Game media number control board P17 : Spinning drum device board P18C : Middle reel P18L : Left reel P18R : Right reel

Claims (1)

Equipped with a counting switch,
It is configured so that information related to counting points can be transmitted to the lending unit side for each first period (hereinafter, the timing for each first period at which information related to counting points can be transmitted to the lending unit side is (referred to as "counting notification timing"),
A predetermined number of counting points can be transmitted to the lending unit at the counting notification timing after the pressing time of the counting switch is equal to or longer than the second period,
The counting switch is separated from the counting notification timing after the pressing time of the counting switch is equal to or longer than the second period to the next counting notification timing (hereinafter referred to as "second counting notification timing"). In this case, the game machine is configured to be able to transmit a predetermined number of counting points to the lending unit side at the second counting notification timing.

Images